NAVIGATION BY THE Ma …

NAVIGATION BY THE Mariners Plain Scale new plain'd: OR, A TREATISE OF Geometrical and Arithmetical Navigation; Wherein Sayling is performed in all the three kindes by a right Line, and a Circle divided into equal parts.

Containing

  • 1. New Ways of keeping of a Reckoning, or Platting of a Traverse, both upon the Plain and Mercators Chart, with­out drawing any Lines therein, with new ways for measu­ring of the Course and Distance in each Chart.
  • 2. New Rules for Estimating the Ships way through Currents, and for Correcting the Dead Reckoning.
  • 3. The refutation of divers Errors, and of the Plain Chart, and how to remove the Error committed thereby, with the De­monstration of Mercators Chart from Proportion, and how to supply the Meridian-line of it Geometrically, albeit there is added to the Book a Print thereof from a Brass-Plate to go alone, or with the Book; as also a Table thereof made to every other Centesm.
  • 4. A new easie Method of Calculation for Great Circle-sayling, with new Projections, Schemes and Charts, giving the Latitudes of the Arch without Calculation.
  • 5. Arithmetical Navigation, or Navigation performed by the Pen, if Tables were wanting, with excellent new easie ways for raising of a Table of Natural Sines, which supplies the want of all other Tables.

By John Collins of London, Pen-man, Accomptant, Philomathet.

London, Printed by Tho Johnson for Francis Cossinet, and are to be sold at the Anchor and Mariner in Tower-street, as also by Henry Sutton Mathematical Instrument-maker in Thread needle street, behinde the Exchange. 1659.

THE AZIMVTH COMPASS AND PLAINE SCALE.

To the Honorable, The Governor, Deputy, and Committee of Merchant-Adventurers, Trading to the EAST-INDIA.

THe Restitution and Establishment of your Honor­able Society, promiseth and presageth no less then the future felicity of this Nation, the more or less disemboguings of Nilus could not be more infallible Sig­nals of Egypts Exuberance or Indigence, then the greater or lesser enlargement of your Trade, is of the increase or decay of our Fame, Riches, and Strength.

You by penetrating those Oriental Coasts, will to our Clime in great measure restore the Golden Age; many poor being employed by your noble Adventures and Re­turns, will escape the miseries of complaint and want.

Your Navy, as at present, it doth employ many able and experienced Sea-men, who possibly might otherwise languish under many discouragements, so we may assu­redly promise to our selves the further encrease of their number in your Service.

That their Art and Knowledge might likewise be ad­vanced and rendred more facil, as it should be the desire of all, so it hath been my particular aim and endeavor in the ensuing Treatise, which by that experience I have had amongst them, I guess not to be unsuitable to their de­sires and spare hours, and though intended chiefly for [Page] their benefit, yet may be of general use to every person, but especially to those that are Mathematically inclined. And now before whom can I more justly prostrate my En­deavors in this kinde, then Your Honored Selves, whose re­nowned Employments will exercise the choicest Results of this nature, which by how much the more serviceable they are rendred unto you, by so much the more will they become the Objects of Applause and Desire in others; Accept therefore this Offspring of some spare Hours improved, more with an intent for the Advance­ment of the Publique good, then for any private benefit.

I shall conclude this my humble Address with a Tem­poral and Spiritual Wish, viz. That the Encrease of your Treasures may answer your Hazards and Desires, and that your Vertues and Graces may exceed your Treasures in this Life; and in that to come, may your Glories as far transcend BOTH, as heaven does earth: And for this you have not onely the earnest Wishes, but the Cordial Prayers of

Your Honours most humble Servitor to be commanded, JOHN COLLINS.

To the Courteous Reader, whether Mariner or Student.

HAving formerly spent some part of my time at Sea, I perceived the Genius and Inclination of most Mariners to be affected with drawing such Paper Schemes and Delineations of the Sphere, as might not onely represent the same to their fancy, but likewise suit the reso­lution of such Spherique questions, as commonly they had occasion of; and finding a complaint amongst them of the want of a good Treatise of that kinde, I have often wished that some of our able Artists would display their endeavours to that purpose, wherein failing of my desire, and considering that some mean performances of this nature have for­merly found good Acceptance with Seamen, as being suitable to the meanest Capacity, and performed by a Scale of small bulk and price, I thought fit to impart my Observations of that kinde, and certainly to the most learned it will be matter of use and delight, to see that what­soever they can perform by exact Calculation, if their Tables be free from error, may be confirmed and performed without them, by the sole assistance of a pair of Compasses and a bare Ruler, and what great ease ensues, both in Navigation and Dyalling, &c. by skill in carrying on of Proportions Geometrically, is scarcely as yet expected or apprehend­ed by those who are strangers thereto.

If thou art just entring upon the Mathematicals, this Treatise may serve as an Introduction, in which after thou hast read to page 20 of the first Part, thou mayest apply thy self to the Spherical Definitions in the second Part, and there proceed, or else where, as shall be most suitable to thy desires. Thou wilt easily perceive that the right Angled Cases from page 57 to 63, in the second Book, and also from page 2 to 11 in the third Book, might have been contrived in one general Scheme for each Book, but not so perspicuous to be understood: If this finde acceptance it will encourage me to be more laborious here­after, and if thou reap benefit thereby, I have attained my desire, and that thou mayest so do, is the hearty wish of thy Well-willer and Friend,

John Collins.

To his Worthy Friend Mr. JOHN COLLINS, ON HIS Mariners Plain Scale New Plain'd.

I fear'd, good Friend, your Works would sole employ
O ur Brass, not Wood, which time might putrifie,
H owe're I see your time not spent in vain,
N or Labor lost the Scale in making plain.
C apacious, useful, long before neglected,
O bscur'd and tedious, therefore disrespected.
L et those that work in Brass thy Worth admire,
L et them applaud thee, they have their desire
I n Wood, if any will be doing too,
N or can they less in imitation do,
S o they'l have work, and Students they will gain
The use o'th rough-hewn Scale now its made plain:
And I for thee an Anagram have chose,
S o good a Work as this NO HIL INCLO'S.
N oted are the Accounts thou didst put forth,
I ngenious are thy Quadrants of like worth:
L et Dyalling Geometrical ne're fail,
L est Mariners forget to use the Scale;
O h let not Momus with his inked thumbs,
C ome near to slur thy Works, or try the Rumbs.
N ever desist, but let's have more of thine,
H ere's but a Tangent, but let's have a Sine,
O r bosom full of thy industrious toyl,
I t will inform the weak, enrich our Soyl.
Your loving Friend, Sylvanus Morgan.

The CONTENTS of the First Book.

In the Proportional Part.
  • GEometrical Definitions. Page 1, 2
  • To raise Perpendiculars. 2, 3, 4
  • To draw a line parallel to another Line. 5
  • To bring three points into a Circle. 6
  • To finde a right line equal to the Arch of a Circle. 9, 10
  • Chords, Sines, Tangents, Secants, Versed Sines, &c. defined. 11, 12, 13
  • The Scale in the Frontispiece described. 14
  • Plain Triangles both right and obliqued Angled resolved by Pro­traction. from p 15 to 25
  • Proportions in Sines resolved by a Line of Chords. p 21 to 25
  • Proportions in Tangents alone so resolved. p. 25, 27, 28, 29, 30
  • Proportions in Sines and Tangents resolved by a Line of Chords. p. 26, 31, 32, 33
Particular Schemes fitted from Proportions to the Cases of Oblique Angled Sphoerical Triangles.
  • To finde the Azimuth. p. 34, 35
  • As also the Amplitude. p. 36
  • The Azimuth Compass in the Frontispiece described. p. 38
  • The Variation found by the Azimuth Compass. p. 39
  • To finde the Hour of the Day. p. 40
  • As also the Azimuth and Angle of Position, p. 41
  • To finde the Suns Altitudes on all Hours. p. 43, 46
  • Also the Distances of places in the Arch of a great Circle. p. 44
  • To finde the Suns Altitudes on all Azimuths p. 48
  • The Latitude, Declination and Azimuth, given to finde the Hour. p. 50 to 54
  • ☞ To finde the Amplitude with the manner of measuring a Sine to a lesser Radius. p. 55
  • To get the Suns Altitude by the shadow of a Thread or Gnomon. p. 56
The Contents of the Treatise of Navigation.
  • [Page]OF the Imperfections and Uncertainties of Navigation. p. 1 to 5
  • To measure a Course and Distance on the Plain Chart. p. 7, 8, 9
  • Of the quantity of a degree, and of the form of the Log-board. p. 9, 10
  • A Reckoning kept in Leagues, how reduced by the Pen to degrees and Centesmes. p. 11, 12
  • Of a Traverse-Quadrant. p. 13
  • A Traverse platted on the Plain Chart, without drawing Lines there­on. p. 14 to 18
  • A Scheme, with Directions to finde what Course and Way the Ship hath made through a Current. p. 18 to 21
  • Divers Rules for Correcting of the Dead Reckoning from p. 21 to 33
  • Of the errors of the Plain Chart. p. 33
  • And how such Charts may be amended. p. 34
  • To finde the Rumbe between two places. p. 35
  • Proportions having one tearm, the middle Latitude how far to be trusted to. p. 35 to 38
  • To finde the Rumbe between two places by a Line of Chords onely. p. 39 to 42
  • The Meridian-line of Mercators Chart supplied generally by a line of Chords. p. 42 to 47
  • The Meridian-line divided from the Limbe of a Quadrant, with the use thereof in finding the Rumbe. p. 48 to 51
  • The error committed by keeping of a Reckon [...]ng on the Plain Chart removed. p. 52 to 54
  • Of the nature of the Rumbe on the Globe. p. 55 to 57
  • Mereators Chart Demonstrated from Proportion. p. 58 to 60
  • Objections against it answered. p. 60 to 63
  • To finde the Rumbe between two places in the Chart. p. 64
  • Distances of places how measured on that Chart. p. 65 to 71
  • Another Traverse-Quadrant fitted for that Chart, with a Traverse platted thereby, without drawing lines on the Chart. p. 71 to 78
  • To measure a Course and Distance in that Chart, without the use of Compasses. p. 79
  • Of Sailing by the Arch of a great Circle. p. 81
  • To finde the Latitudes of the great Arch by the Stereographick Pro­jection. p. 82 to 83
  • [Page]Of a Tangent Projection from the Pole for finding the Latitudes of the great Arch p. 84 to 88
  • With a new Method of Calculation raised from it p. 89, 90
  • And how to measure the Distance in the Arch, and the Angles of Position. p. 91
  • Another Tangent Projection from the Equinoctial for finding the La­titudes of the Arch. p. 93 to 100
  • And how to finde the Vertical Angles, and Arkes Latitudes Geome­trically. p. 100 to 102
  • To draw a Curved-line in Mercators Chart resembling the Arch, with an example for finding the Courses and Distances in following the Arch. p. 102 to 104
  • The Dead Reckoning cast up by Arithmetick. p. 106 to 108
  • A brief Table of Natural Sines, Tangents and Secants for each point of the Compass and the quarters. p. 107
  • The difference of Longitude in a Dead Reckoning found by the Pen. p. 109
  • That a Table of Natural Sines supplyes the want of all other Tables p. 110
  • Many new easie Rules and Proportions to raise a Table of Natural Sines. p. 111 to 113
  • And how by having some in store to Calculate any other Sine in the Quadrant at command. p. 114
  • Of the contrivance of Logarithmical Tables of Numbers, Sines and Tangents, and how the want of Natural Tables, and of a Table of the Meridian-line, are supplied from them. p. 117
  • The Sides of a Plain Triangle being given, to Calculate the Angles without the help of Tables two several ways. p. 118, 119
  • An Instance thereof in Calculating a Course and Distance. p. 119

CHAP. I. Containing Geometrical Definitions.

A Point, is an imaginary Prick void of all length, breadth or depth.

A Line, is a supposed Length without breadth or depth, the ends or limits whereof are Points.

An Angle, derived from the word Angulus in Latine, which signifieth a Corner, is the inclination or bowing of two lines one to another, and the one touching the other, and not being directly joyned together.

If the Lines which contain the Angle be right Lines, then is it called a Right lined Angle.

A right Angle, when a right Line standing upon a right Line, maketh the Angles on either side equal, each of these Angles are called Right Angles, and the Line erected is called a Perpendicu­lar Line unto the other.

An obtuse Angle, is that which is greater then a right Angle.

An acute Angle, is that which is less then a right Angle, when tvvo Angles are both acute or obtuse, they are of the same kinde, othervvise are said to be of different affection.

An Angle, is commonly denoted by the middlemost of the three Letters set to the sides, including the said Angle.

The quantity of an Angle is measured by the arch of a Circle, described upon the point of Concurrence or Intersection, where the two sides inclosing the said Angle, meet.

By the complement of an Arch or Angle, is meant the remain­der of that Arch taken from 90d, unless it be expressed the com­plement thereof to a Semicircle of 180d.

A Circle, is a plain Figure contained under one Line, which is called the Circumference thereof, by some the Perimeter, Peri­phery, or Limbe, a portion or part thereof is called a Segment.

The Center thereof is a Point in the very midst thereof, from which Point all right lines drawn to the Circumference are equal, [Page 2] if divers Circles are described upon one and the same Center, they are said to be Concentrick, if upon divers Centers, they are in respect of each other said to be Excentrick.

The Diameter of a Circle is a right Line drawn through the Center of any Circle, in such sort that it may divide the whole Circle into two equal parts.

The Semidiameter of a Circle, commonly called the Radius thereof, is just one half of the Diameter, and is contained betwixt the Center and one side of the Circle.

A Semicircle is the one medeity or half of a whole Circle, de­scribed upon the Diameter thereof.

And a Quadrant is just the one fourth of a whole Circle.

All Circles are supposed to be divided into 360 equal parts, called Degrees, consequently a Semicircle contains 180d, and a Quadrant 90d, and so much is the quantity of a right Angle.

A Minute is the sixtieth part of a degree, being understood of measure, but in time a Minute is the sixtieth part of an hour, or the fourth part of a degree, 15 degrees answering to an hour, and 4 Minutes to a degree. A Minute is marked thus 1′, a second is the sixtieth part of a Minute, marked thus 1″.

Where two lines or arches cross each other, the point of meet­ing is called their Intersection, or their common Intersection.

CHAP. II. Containing some Geometrical Rudiments.

Prop. 1. To raise a Perpendicular upon the end of a given Line.

[figure]

Let it be required to raise a Per­pendicular upon the end of the Line C D, upon C as a Cen­ter, describe the arch of a Circle as D G, prick the Extent of the Compasses from D to G, and up­on G as a Center, with the said Extent, describe the ark D E G, in which prick down the Extent of the Compasses twice, first [Page 3] from D to E, and then from E to F, then joyn the points F D with a right line, and it shall be the Perpendicular required.

Otherwise in case room be wanting.

Upon G with the Extent of the Compasses unvaried, describe a small portion of an Ark near F, then a Ruler laid over the Points C and G, will cut the said Ark at the Point F, from whence a line drawn to D, shall be the Perpendicular required.

In this latter case the Extent C F becomes the Secant of 60d to the Radius C D, which Secant is always equal to the double of the Radius.

As to the ground of the former Way, if the three Points C G F were joyned in a right line, it would be the Diameter of a Semi­circle, an Angle in the circumference whereof made by lines, drawn from the extreamities of the Diameter, as doth the Angle C D F, is a right Angle by 31 Prop. 3 Book of Euclid.

Otherwise:

To raise a Perpendicular upon the end of a given Line.

[figure]

Let the Line A C be gi­ven, and let it be required to erect the Line B A per­pendicularly thereto.

Set one foot of the Com­passes in the Point A, and opening the other to any competent distance, let it fall in any convenient point at pleasure, as at D, then retaining that foot in D, without altering the Compasses, make a mark in the line A C, as at E: Now if you lay a Ruler from D to E, and by the edge of it from D, set off the Extent of the Compasses, it will find the point B, from whence draw the line A B, and it shall be the Perpendi­cular required: Thus upon a Dyal we may raise a Perpendicular from any point or part of a Line, without drawing any razes to de­face the Plain.

Otherwise upon the Point D, having swept the Point E, with [Page 4] the same Extent draw the touch of an Arch on the other side at B, then laying the Ruler over D and E as before, it will intersect the former Arch at the Point B, from whence a line drawn to A, shall be the Perpendicular required.

The converse of this Proposition would be from a Point assign­ed, to let fall a Perpendicular on a line underneath.

To be done by drawing a line from the Point B, to any part of the given line A C, as imagine a streight line to pass through B D E, and to finde the middle of the said line at D, where set­ting one foot of the Compasses with the Extent D E, draw the touch of an Arch on the other side the Point E, and it will meet with the said line A C at A, from whence a line drawn to B, shall be the Perpendicular required.

Prop. 2. To raise a Perpendicular from the midst of a Line.

[figure]

Though this may be per­med by the former Propo­sition, yet there remains an­other way of doing the same

In the Scheme annexed, let A B be the line given, and let it be required to raise a Perpendicular in the Point C.

First set one foot of the Compasses in the point C, and open the other to any distance at pleasure, and mark the given line therewith on both sides from C, at the point A and B, then setting one foot of the Compasses in the point A, open the other to any competent distance beyond C, and draw a little Arch a­bove the line at D, then with the same distance set one foot in B, and with the other cross the Arch D with the arch E, then from the Point of Intersection or crossing, draw a streight line to C, and it shall be the Perpendicular required.

The converse will be, to let a Perpendicular fall from a Point upon a given Line: Let the Point given be the Intersection of the two Arks D, E, setting down one foot of the Compasses there, with any Extent draw two Arks upon the line underneath, as at B [Page 5] and A, divide the distance between them into halfs, as at C, and from the given Point to the Point C draw a line, and it shall be the Perpendicular required; and if this be thought troublesom, upon the Points A and B with any sufficient Extent, you may make an Intersection underneath, and lay a Ruler to that and the upper Intersection, and thereby finde the Point C.

Prop. 3. To draw one Line parallel to another Line, at any distance required.

[figure]

A Line is then said to be parallel to another Line, when it is every where a­like, or equally distant from it, so that both those Lines produced or continu­ed, would never meet.

In this Figure, let the Line A B be given, and let it be required to draw the Line C D parallel thereto, according to the distance of A C.

First open the Compasses to the distance required, then setting one foot in A, or further in, with the other draw the touch of an Arch at C, then retaining the same extent of the Compasses, set down the Compasses at B, and with the former extent draw the touch of an Arch at D, then laying a Ruler to the outwardmost edges of these two Arks, draw the right line C D, which will be the Parallel required.

This Proposition will be of frequent use in Dyalling, now the drawing of such pieces of Arks as may deface the Plain, may be shunned; for having opened the Compasses to the assigned Parallel distance, set down one foot opposite to one end of the line proposed A B, so as the other but just turned about, may touch the said Line, and it will finde one Point: Again, finde an­other Point in like manner opposite to the other end of the Line at B, and through these two Points draw a right Line, and it shall be the Parallel required.

This way, though it be not so Geometrical as the former, yet in other respects may be much more convenient, and certain enough.

Prop. 4. To draw the Arch of a Circle through any three Points, not lying in a streight Line.

[figure]

In the Figure adjoyning let A B C be the three Points given, and let it be required to draw a Circle that may pass through them all.

Set one foot in the mid­dle Point at B, and open the Compasses to above one half of the distance of the furthest point therefrom, or to any other competent extent, and therewith draw the obscure Arch D E F H with the same extent, setting one foot in the point C, draw the Arch F H: Again, with the same extent, setting one foot in the point A, draw the Arch D E, then laying a Ruler to the Interse­ctions of these Arches, draw the lines D G and G H, which will cross each other at the point G, and there is the Center of the Circle sought; where setting one foot of the Compasses, and ex­tending the other to any of the three points, describe the Arch of a Circle, which shall pass through the three points required.

Prop. 5. Two lines being given, inclining each to other, so as they seem to make an acute an­gle, if they were produced, To finde their angular point of con­currence or meeting, without producing or continuing the said Lines.

[figure]

Let the two Lines given be A B, and C D, and let it be required to finde the point of their meeting (as at I, if they [Page 7] were continued) without producing the said Lines: Over the two lines given, draw two other lines parallel to each other, as are G H, and F E, and prick the extent B D twice from B to G, also the extent A C twice from A to F, then if the line A B and F G be produced, they will finde the point I, being the point desired, and the extent A C and B D may be multiplied as oft as shall be thought convenient.

And if they be multiplied the other way, from D to H, and from C to E, then the lines E H and F G being produced, find the same point I, without continuing either of the lines first given, and with much more certainty.

An Oblong, a Rectangle, a right angled Parralellogram, or a Long Square, are all words of one and the same signification, and signifie a flat Figure, having onely length and breadth, the four Angles whereof are right Angles, the opposite sides whereof are equal.

In Proportions the product of two tearms or numbers, are cal­led their Rectangle or Oblong, because if the sides of a flat be di­vided into as many parts as there are units in each multiplyer, lines ruled over those parts, will make as many small squares as there are units in the Product, and the whole Figure it self will have the shape of a long Square.

[figure]

A Rhombus (or Diamond) is a Figure with four equal sides, but no right Angle.

But a Rhomboides (or Diamond-like Figure) is such a Figure whose opposite Sides and opposite Angles onely are equal, either of these Figures are commonly called Oblique Angled Parralel­lograms: Thus either of the Figures A B, F E, or B C, E D are Rhomboides, or Oblique Angled Parralellograms.

This foregoing Figure is much used in Dyalling, thereby to set off the Hour-lines: Admit the Sides A B and B E were given, and it were required on both sides of B E to make two oblique Par­ralellograms, whose opposite sides should be equal to the lines given, this may be done either by drawing a line through the point E, parallel to A B C, and then make F E, E D and B C, each equal to A B, and through those points draw the sides of the Parralellogram, or continue A B, and make B C equal thereto, and with the extent B E upon A and C, draw the cross of an Ark at F and D: Again, upon E, with the extent A B, draw o [...]her Arks crossing the former at F, and those crosses or interse­ctions limit the extreamities of the sides of the Parralellogram.

A line drawn within a four-sided Figure from one corner to an­other, is called a Diagonal-line.

A Parralellipipedon, is a solid Figure, contained under six four­sided figures, whereof those which are opposite are parallel, and is well represented by two or many Dice set one upon another, or by the Case of a Clock-weight.

To finde a right Line equal to the circumference of a Circle given.

Let the given Circle be B D C, divide the upper Semicircle B D C into halfs at D, and the lower Semicircle into three equal parts, and draw the lines D E, D F, which cut the Diameter at G and H, and make G I equal to G H, then is the length D I a little more then the length of the quadrant B D, neither doth the excess amount unto one part of the Diameter B C, if it were di­vided into five thousand, and four times the extent D I will be a little more then the whole circumference of the Circle.

[figure]

To finde a right Line equal to any Arch of a given Circle.

Let C D be an arch of a given Circle less then a Quadrant, whereto it is required to finde a right line equal.

Divide the Arch C D into halfs at E, and make the right line F G equal to the Chord C D, and make F H equal to twice C E, and place one third part of the distance between G and H, from H to I, and the whole line F I will be nigh equal in length to the Arch C D, but so near the truth, that if the line F I were di­vided into 1200 equal parts, one of those parts added thereto would make it too great, albeit the Ark C D were equal to a Quadrant, but in lesser Arches the difference will be less, and if the given Arch be less then 60 degrees, or one sixth part of the whole Circle, the line found will not want one six thousandth part of its true length; But when the given Arch is greater then a quadrant, it may be found at twice, thrice, or four times by for­mer Directions: These two Propositions are taken out of Huge­nius de magnitudine Circuli, Page 20, 21.

[figure]

In Dyalling, to shun drawing of Lines on a Plain, it may be of frequent use to prick off an Angle by Sines or Tangents in stead of Chords, it will therefore be necessary to define these kinde of Lines.

[figure]

1. A Chord is a right line drawn in a Circle from one part of the Circum­ference to another, thus G L is the Chord of the Arch G A L, as also of the Arch G B L, also A B the Dia­meter, is the Chord of the Semicircle A D B and A K B: now for the ready pricking off of any Arch, there may be one quadrant of a Circle divided into nine equal parts, or a whole Semicircle into 18 equal parts, [Page 11] and one of those parts below the Diameter into ten Sub-divisions, but if you divide the Arch B D into 90 equal parts, then setting one foot of a pair of Compasses in B, extend the other to each de­gree of the said Arch, and transfer those extents into the line B C, as we have done, for every tenth degree to 60 degrees, and it shall be a Line of Chords, which may be continued further at pleasure.

2. The right Sine of an Arch is half the Chord of twice that Arch: thus G F being the half of G L, is the Sine of the Arch, G A half of the Arch G A L, whence it follows that the right Sine of an Arch less then a quadrant, is also the right Sine of that Arks residue from a Semicircle, because, as was shewed above, the Chord of an Ark is the same both to an Ark lesser then a quadrant, and to its complement to a Semicircle.

What an Arch wants of a quadrant, is called the Complement thereof: thus the Arch D G is the Complement of the Arch A G, and H G is the Sine of the Arch D G, or which is all one, it is the Cosine of the Arch A G, and the Line H G being equal to C F, it follows that the right Sine of the Complement of an Arch is equal to that part of the Diameter, which lieth between that Arch and the Center.

From the former Scheme also follows another Definition of a right Sine, as namely, that it is a right Line falling from one end of any Arch perpendicularly upon the Radius, drawn to the other end of the said Arch, so is G F perpendicular to C A, being the Sine of the Arch G A; likewise A I falls perpendicularly on C G, therefore by the same definition is also the Sine of the said Arch.

3. The Versed Sine of an Arch is that part of the Diameter which lieth between the right Sine of that Arch and the Circumfe­rence: thus F A is the Versed Sine of the Arch G A, and F B the Versed Sine of the Arch B D G.

4. If unto one end of an Arch there be drawn a Radius, and to the other end a right line from the Center, cutting the Circle, and if from the end of the Radius a Perpendicular be raised till it meet with the Line cutting the Circle, that Perpendicular is the Tangent of that Arch: thus A E is the Tangent of the Arch G A, and D M is the Cotangent of the said Ark, namely, it is the Tangent of the Arch H G, which is the Complement of the former Arch.

[Page 12]5. The aforesaid right Line cutting the Circle, is called the Secant of the said Arch: thus C E is the Secant of the Arch G A, and C M is the Cosecant of the said Arch, for it is the Secant of the Arch D G.

6. Assigning the Radius C A to be an unit with Ciphers at pleasure, to define or express the quantities of these respective lines, in relation to the Arches to which they belong, were to make a Table of natural Sines, Tangents and Secants; of which at large see Mr. Newtons Trigonometria Brittanica, for abbreviate ways, and something we shall adde about it in the Arithmetical part of Navigation.

7. The Tables being made, their chief use was to work the Rule of Three, or Golden Rule Arithmetically, by multiplying the se­cond and third tearms of any Proportion, and dividing by the first, and thereby to resolve all Propositions relating either to Plain or Spherical Triangles, which in lines is performed by drawing a line parallel to the Side of a Triangle, and where four tearms either in Sines, Tangents, Secants, Versed Sines, are expressed, as the first to the second, so is the third to the fourth, it implyes a Propor­tion, and that the second and third tearm are to be multiplyed to­gether, and the Product divided by the first.

The proportion or reason of two numbers, or reference of one to the other, is measured by the Quotient, the one being divided by the other.

A Proportion is then said to be direct, when the third tearm bears such proportion to the fourth, as the first to the second: four num­bers are said to be proportional when as often as the first and se­cond are the one contained in the other, so often are the third and fourth the one contained in the other.

Reciprocal Proportion is when the fourth tearm bears such Pro­portion to the third, as the first doth to the second.

A Proportion is said to hold alternately, when the second and third tearms thereof change places, and inversly, when the order of the tearms are so altered, that one of the three first tearms shall become the last.

Divers Proportions are expressed in this following Book, which if the Reader would apply to Tables, he must understand that when a Side or an Angle is greater then a Quadrant, that in stead of the [Page 13] Sine, Tangent, or Secant of such an Ark, he must take the Sine, Tangent, or Secant of that Arks complement to a Semicircle.

That the words Cosine or Cotangent of an Arch given or sought, signifie the Sine or Tangent of the Complement of the Arch given or sought.

That the Cosine or Cotangent of an Arch greater then a Qua­drant, is the Sine or Tangent of the excess of that Arch above a Quadrant, or 90 degrees.

8. What trouble the Ancients were at in resolving of Propor­tions by Multiplication and Division, is wonderfully abbreviated by an admirable Invention called Logarithmes, where by framing and substituting other numbers in stead of the former, Multiplica­tion is changed into Addition, and Division into Substraction; of which also see the former Book Trigonometria Brittanica.

9. What may be performed by either of the former kindes of Tables, may also with a Line of Chords and equal parts be per­formed, but not so near the truth, without them, and that either by projecting or representing the Sphere on a Flat or Plain, as we have handled in the second and third Part, or by Protracting and Delineating of such Proportions as may be wrought by the Ta­bles: and this in some measure is the intended subject of our sub­sequent Discourse.

10. Therefore before we proceed any further, it will be neces­sary to describe such Lines as are upon the Scale, intended to be treated of.

The Description of the Scale in the Frontispiece.

1. The first or uppermost line is a line of a Chords, numbred to 180 degrees, and is called the Lesser Chord, being a double Scale, the undermost side whereof being numbred with half those Arks, is a line of Sines and is called the greater Sines; at the end of this Scale stands another little Scale, which is called the lesser Sines, being numbred with 90 degrees, and both these Scales seem to be one continued Scale.

2. The second Scale is another line of Chords, called the grea­ter Chord, being fitted to the same Radius with the greater Sine, and numbred to 90 degrees.

Annexed thereto is a single Line called the line of Rumbes or [Page 14] Points of the Compass, numbred from 1 to 8, in which each Rum­be is divided into quarters, having pricks or full points set thereto.

3. The third Scale is a line of equal parts or leagues, divided into ten greater divisions, and each of those parts into ten smaller divisions, and each of those smaller divisions into halfs.

Annexed thereto is another Scale of six equal parts, each of which parts is sub-divided as the former.

How to make a Line of Chords or Sines from the equal divisi­ons of the Circle, is spoke to in the second Book, page 2. The Scale thus described is indeed a double Scale, for it hath two Lines of Chords, two Lines of Sines, and two Lines of equal Parts up­on it, and this rather for conveniency then necessity, whereas in­deed one of each kinde had been sufficient, yea, the Sines might have been wholly spared; for throughout these Treatises nothing is more required of necessity, then a Circle divided into equal parts, as in the third Book, page 4. and a right Line divided into equal parts, which we suppose in every mans power to do if he have Compasses. The Schemes throughout these Books are fit­ted either to the Radius of the greater or lesser Chord before de­scribed, that is to say, they are drawn with 60 degrees of the one or the other of those Lines of Chords.

CHAP. III. Shewing how all the common Cases of Plain Triangles may be resol­ved by a Line of Chords and equal Parts.

THis Chapter, from the very Title of it, will seem to many to be unnecessary, if not impertinent, as being in it self so easie that any person that knows any thing can perform, however I thought fit to adde it for methods sake, that it might be said that all the usual Cases of Triangles are here performed with Scale and Compasses, which possibly some that are meer Beginners may be ignorant of.

If a Figure be made of three right Lines, so joyned that oppo­site to each there be an angular point or corner, it is called a right lined Triangle.

If it have three equal sides, it is called an Equilateral Triangle.

If it have but two equal sides, it is called an Isoceles, or Equi­ [...]rural Triangle.

If all the sides be unequal, it is called A Scalenon Triangle, or Oblique plain Triangle.

If it have one right angle, it is called A right angled Triangle, that side which subtends the right Angle, is called the Hipotenusal, the other sides are indifferently called Sides, or Legs, or one of them the Base, and the other the Perpendicular, those parts of the Six of a Triangle which are given or known, are tearmed the Data, and those unknown or sought, the Quesita.

Cases of Plain Triangles being right angled.

1. To finde a Side. Given the Hipotenusal and one of the acute Angles, consequently both.

[figure]

Admit a Ship sayl South-east and by South ninety Leagues, In this case the Course is the Angle given, and the distance is the Hipotenusal.

Having drawn E N and N S at right Angles one to another, and described the Quadrant E A with 60d of the Chords, therein set off A B equal to the Course from the south, being 3 points [Page 16] or 33d 45′ of the greater Chord, and this is called setting off of an Angle, and draw N B, wherein set off the distance 90 Leagues to D, the nearest distance from D to N A measured on the equal parts, shews the side sought, if B N A be the Angle given, which in this example is D C 50 Leagues, and so much is the Ships de­parture from the Meridian or Separation.

But if B N E were the Angle given, the nearest distance from D to E N measured on the equal parts, is the side sought, in this Example D F 74 Leagues, and eight tenths more of another League, and so much is the difference of Latitude, called the Va­riation: Now to perform this without letting fall or drawing the prickt Perpendicular Lines D C, D F, which are added onely for illustration, will be of excellent use, as shall follow hereafter.

2. To finde a Side. Given the Hipotenusal and the other Side.

Admit the difference of Latitude were the given Side, and the Distance the Hipotenusal, and it were required to finde the de­parture from the Meridian.

Prick out of the equal parts the difference of Latitude from N to C 74, 8 Leagues, and from the point C raise the Perpendi­cular C D, then take the distance out of the equal parts ninety Leagues, and setting one foot in N, the other will somewhere meet with C D, as at D, and the line D C measured on the equal parts, is the Departure from the Meridian, to wit, 50 Leagues in this example, being the Side sought.

3. To finde an Angle. Given the Hipotenusal, and one of the Sides.

Admit the Distance 90 Leagues were the given Hipotenusal, and the Difference of Latitude N C n were the other Side, and that it were required to finde the Course, which is the Angle sought: Having proceeded so far as is directed in the second Case, draw N D, and upon N as a Center, describe the Arch B A, which measured on the Chords or Rumbes, sheweth the Course from that Coast of the world that N C represents, to be 3 points or 33 degrees 45 minutes.

4. To finde a Side. Given a Side and one acute Angle.

Admit the Side given were the Difference of Latitude N C, and the Angle were the Course B A from the Meridian, and that it were required to finde the Departure from the Meridian D C.

In this case set off the Difference of the Latitude from the equal parts from N to C 74, 8 Leagues, and raise the Perpendi­cular D C. Upon N describe the Arch E B A, and therein out of the Rumbes, having set off the Course B A, draw the Line N B produced, and it meets with D C produced at D, and the Side D C measured on the equal parts is 50 Leagues, the Depar­ture from the Meridian, as before.

5. To finde the Hipotenusal. Given one of the Sides and an acute Angle.

In the former Triangle let D C represent a Tower of unknown height, perpendicular to the Horizon, and let N C be a distance measured off from it, 74 yards and eight tenths more, the line N C making right Angles with D C then standing at N. If by a Quadrant the Altitude of D C were found to be 33d 45′, upon N as a Center, describe an Arch with 60d of the Chords, and therein set off 33d 45′ from A to B, and draw the line N B pro­duced, till it concur with D C at D, then the line N D measu­red on the equal parts, shews the Distance between the eye and the top of the Tower, which is the Hipotenusal sought, and in this Example is 90 yards, and the line D C there measured, shews the height of the Tower 50 yards.

6. To finde the Hipotenusal. Given both the Sides.

Admit in the former Triangle that D C being the Departure from the Meridian, namely 50 Leagues, and C N the difference of Latitude, to wit, 74, 8 Leagues were given, and it were requi­red to finde the Distance N D: Having drawn D C and N C at right Angles one to another, and therein prickt down from the equal parts the Variation and Separation, the distance between the Points N D measured on the equal parts, sheweth the Hipo­tenusal sought, in this Example 90 Leagues.

7. To finde an Angle. Given both the Sides.

If it were required to finde the Course by what in the former Case was given: Having proceeded so far as is there exprest, draw N D, and upon N as a Center with 60d of the Chords, draw the Arch B A, which Arch measured on the Chords, sheweth the Course from that coast of the world that N A represents, in this Example 3 points, or 33d 45′ from the Meridian, and the Angle N D C is the complement thereof; and the Ark might as well have been described on D as a Center, if the Sides D N and D C had been produced far enough.

Cases of Oblique Plain Triangles.

1. To finde an Angle. Given two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them, to finde the Angle opposed to the other.

[figure]

Let the quantities of the two given Sides be 46, 6 and 30.

Prick off that next the Angle given from A to B, and upon A as a Center, describe the Ark D F, and therein prick down 30 de­grees 58 minutes for the Angle given, and draw the line A F C, then from the end of the Side prickt off, prick the other Side from B to C, or E, and so the Angle B C A or B E A, is the Angle sought, but which of the two cannot possibly be determined, un­less the affection be also given, to wit, whether it be obtuse or [Page 19] acute, though some of our Writers affirm it may be determined by drawing the Triangle as true as you can.

Then upon the angular Point C, describe an Arch with 60d of the Chords, and measure the said Arch in the Chords, continuing the Sides if need be, and it shews the quantity of the said Angle to be 53d 6′, and the Complement thereof to 180d, being 126d 54′ is the measure of the Angle B E A, because the Angle B E C is equal to the Angle B C E.

How to frame such Triangles whose Sides shall be all whole numbers, is shewed in our English Ramus, page 155, 156.

2. From what is given, to finde the third Side and the other Angle.

In this case also, unless the quality of the Angle opposite to the greatest Side be determined, the third Side will be doubtful, to wit, it may be either A E or A C, which extents measured on the equal parts, shew the Side accordingly, and the third Angle to be measured, as before.

This Mr. Norwood doth not make a Case, because an Angle must be first found and determined before the third Side can be found, and then it will be resolved by the following Case.

3. Two Angles with a Side opposite to one of them given, to finde the Side opposed to the other.

In this Case the third Angle is also given, as being the comple­ment of the sum of the two former Angles to a Semicircle. As if there were given the Side A B in the former Triangle, the Angle B A C, and the Angle A C B.

First prick off the Side A B, then substract the sum of the Angles B A C, and A C B, from 180d or a Semicircle, and there re­mains the Angle A B C, then upon A as a Center, set off upon the Arch D F the measure of the Angle A.

Also upon B as a Center, the measure of that Angle must be set off, and lines drawn through the extreamities of those Arks will meet, as at C, the point that limits the two Sides A C, and B C, which are to be measured on the equal parts: By this Case if A C were the Wall of a Town, and B a Fort shooting into the said Town, the distance of the said Fort might be found from any part of the Town wall, without going out to measure it; for first, with any whole circle or a compass, observe the Arch between A B [Page 20] and A C, and measure the distance C A, again at A observe the Arch between A B and A C, and protract as in this Example, and you may measure the distance between B and any point in the line A C; And so if B were a Tower or Mark on the land, and A C represent the Ships distance in her course, by observing how B bears both at A and C, the Ships distance therefrom might be measured.

4, 5. Two Sides with the Angle comprehended given, to finde the third Side and both the other Angles.

Thus if there were given the two Sides A B and A C, with the Angle A between them, the said Angle must first be set off in the Arch D F, then a line joyning the extreamities of the two Sides, as doth B C, is the third Side, which being first found, up­on the angular Points C and B, with 60d of the Chords Arks must be drawn, which being limited by the two Sides (produced when it is necessary) are the measures of the Angles sought.

6. Three Sides to finde an Angle.

If the three Sides be joyned in a Triangle which is easily done, first pricking down any one of the Sides, and from its extreamities with the other Sides describe two Arks which will intersect at the Point where the other two Sides concur, then will the three angu­lar Points be given, upon which Arks being described between the given Sides, are the measures of the Angles sought.

7. Three Angles being given, are not sufficient to finde any one of the Sides.

CHAP. III. Shewing how all Proportions relating to Sphaerical Triangles, may be performed by a Line of Chords.

1. Proportions in Sines alone.

LEt the Proportion be:

As the Sine of 19d to the Sine of 25d, So is the Sine of 31d.

To what Sine? to wit, the Sine of 42d.

Double the two first Arks, and they are 35d and 50d, and ha­ving drawn the line V I, prick down the Chords of these Arks, to wit, of 38d from V to A, and of 50d from V to B, then on V as a

[Page 21]

Center, draw the Quadrant I H and its Ra­dius H V per­pendicular to I V, and prick off the third tearm of the Proportion 31d from I to C, and draw C V, from B the se­cond tearm of the Proportion take the near­est distance to C V, and with that extent upon A, the first tearm of the Proportion, describe the Ark F, a ruler from the Center just touching that Ark, cuts the Limbe at D, and the Arch I D being 42d, is the measure of the fourth Proportional sought.

Otherwise:

Place the extent wherewith the Ark F was described from V to E, and draw the line E G just touching the extreamity of the said Ark, then with the extent V A, one foot of the Compasses resting in V, cross the aforesaid line at G, and a ruler over V and G will finde the Point D in the Limbe, as before.

Here observe, that every Proportion without the Radius, may be made into two single Proportions, with the Radius in each, thus:

  • As the Radius, Is to one of the middle tearms,
  • So is the other middle tearm, To a fourth Proportional.

Again:

  • As the first tearm, Is to the Radius,
  • So is the fourth Proportional before found, To the true Proportional sought.

From which consideration the former Scheme was contrived.

Two other general ways for working Proportions in Sines.

Let the Proportion be:

As the Sine of 70d to the Sine of 50d, So is the Sine of 35d. To what Sine? Answer: 27d, 50′.

[figure]

Having drawn the Quadrant D E with 60d of the Chords, and its two Radii D C, C E at right Angles in the Center, prick down from the Chords one of the middle tearms, to wit, 35d from D to H, and draw a line into the Center, and upon the said line from the Center to A, prick down out of the Sines the other mid­dle tearm, to wit, 50d, and through the Point A draw the line A B parallel to D C, then count the first tearm from D to G 70d, and draw a line from the Center which passeth through A B at F, and the extent C F measured on the Sines, is 27d 50′ the fourth Proportional, and thus the first tearm may be varied as much as you please.

Otherwise:

Place the Sine of the first tearm, to wit, of 70d, which in this Example is the nearest distance from G to D C so from the Cen­ter, that it may cross A B produced when need requires: In this Example it crosseth it at I, a ruler over the Center and the point I, [Page 23] cuts the Limbe at K, and the Arch D K being 27d 50′, is the measure of the fourth Proportional, as before.

When it cannot be there placed, to wit, as when the Sine of the first tearm is shorter then C B, the fourth Proportional is more then the Radius, and the Arch of the first tearm being counted from D towards E, a line from the Center meeting with A B produced, shall be the Secant of the fourth Proportional to the common Radius of the Quadrant.

The Demonstration of this Scheme is inferred from varying the Proportion, which may stand thus, by changing the two first tearms into their complements, and altering their order they be­come Secants.

As the Secant of 55d to Secant 20d, So is the Sine of 50d to the Sine of 27d 50′.

If C B be made Radius, then is C A the Secant of 55d to the same Radius, and it is also by construction the Sine of 50d to the common Radius, then from the proportion of equality, because the first tearm is equal to the third, the second tearm C F being the Secant of 20d to the lesser Radius, is also the Sine of the fourth Proportional to the common Radius, this suitable to the former of those directions, the latter carries on this Proportion:

As the Sine of 50d to Sine of 70d, So is the Secant of 55d to the Secant of 62d 10′.

A third, being the common Geometrical way of working all Pro­portions in Lines, is by drawing a Line parallel to the Side of a Plain Triangle.

[figure]

Thus from the for­mer Scheme make C A the Secant of 55d to the lesser Radius, and C H the Sine of 50d to the common Radius, and joyne A H; also make C F the Secant of 20d, and draw F G parallel to A H, then because A C is equal [Page 24] to H C, therefore F C shall be equal to G C, wherefore the Sine of the fourth Proportional is equal to the Secant of the se­cond Proportional, which is the foundation of the former Scheme; which form of Operation holds generally, though by reason of ex­cursions we shall pursue other forms of Operation more speedy.

Another way for working Proportions in Sines with a Line of Chords onely.

Let the Proportion be:

As the Sine of 30d to the Sine of 18d, So is the Sine of 23d. To what Sine? Answer is, 14d.

If a Line of Sines be wanting, it may be observed that a Line of Chords will supply the defect thereof, by doubling the three first tearms, and you will for the fourth tearm finde the Chord of twice the Arch sought, the half whereof is the Arch sought.

The three tearms of the former Proportion doubled, are 60d, 36d, 46d.

[figure]

Draw the line A B, and therein prick down the Chord of 60 de­grees from A to B, upon which Point, with the Chord of 36 de­grees, describe the Ark C, and draw a line from A just touching the outward extreamity of it, then prick down the Chord of 46 degrees from A to D, the nearest distance from it to the line A C, is the Chord of 28 degrees, the half whereof be­ing 14 degrees, is the fourth Proportional Sine sought.

It will be convenient to describe the Ark C always with the least of the three tearms, and this kinde of Operation is best when the two first tearms of the Proportion are fixed.

If the Proportion had been of the less to the greater:

As the Sine of 36d is to the Sine of 60d, So is the Sine of 14d to the Sine of 23d.

In this case the Chord of 28 degrees must be so entred on the line A B, that on foot resting thereon, the other turned about should but just touch the line A C, the foot of the Compasses would rest at D, and the extent D A, being the Chord of 46 de­grees, the half thereof 23 degrees, is the fourth Proportional sought.

This way was chiefly added, to shew the manner of Proportion­ing out of any line to a lesser Radius, for here A B being the common Radius, and the extent wherewith the ark C was descri­bed another lesser Radius, the nearest distance from D to A C, shal be the Chord of 46 degrees to the said lesser Radius.

To work Proportions in Tangents alone by a Line of Chords.

Let the Proportion be:

As the Tangent of 40d: Is to the Tangent of 50dSo is the Tan­gent of 20d: To the Tangent of 27d 20′.

Double the three first tearms, and they are 80d, 100d, 40d.

[figure]

Upon V as a Center, with 60 degrees of the Chords de­scribe the Cir­cle A B C D, and prick 80d, the first tearm from A to B, and 100d the second tearm from C to D, a ruler over B & D cuts the Di­ameter at E, and the Seg­ment A E bears such Proportion to E C, as the Tangent of 40d doth to the Tangent of 50d: See this demonstrated in the Geome­trical Dyalling, page 20. Prick the Chord of 40d the double of the third tearm from A to F, a ruler over F and E cuts the circle at G, and the Arch C G measured on the Chords, is 54d 40′, the [Page 26] half whereof 27 degrees 20 minutes, is the fourth Proportional sought: if a line of Sines equal to the Diameter be at hand, the doubling and halfing of Arches is spared.

Much after the same manner Proportions in Sines and Tangents joyntly may be protracted.

Example. Let the Proportion be:

As the Sine of 20 degrees, Is to the Sine of 10 degrees,

So is the Tangent of 31 degrees, To the Tangent of 17 degrees.

[figure]

Having drawn a Circle and its Diameter, as before, prick any extent from C to H, and from A to I, and draw the lines A H and C I, which will be parallel, then double the three first tearms of the Proportion, and they are 40d 20d ∷ 62d.

Prick the Chord of 40 degrees from A to B, and the Chord of 20 degrees from C to D, a ruler over B and D cuts the Diameter at E, and the Segment A E bears such Proportion to E C, as the Sine of 20 degrees doth to the Sine of 10 degrees, then prick the Chord of 62 degrees from A to F, a ruler over F and E, cuts the Circle at G, and the Arch C G measured on the Chords, is 34 degrees, the half whereof 17 degrees, is the Tangent sought.

In like manner when a Sine is sought, the Diameter must be di­vided, according to the Ratio of the two first tearms.

If the Proportion were:

As the Tangent of 17 degrees, Is to the Tangent of 31 degrees,

So is the Sine of 10 degrees, To a fou [...]th Proportional, to wit, the Sine of 20 degrees.

Here A H and C I being drawn parallel to each other, if C G be 34 degrees, the double of the first tearm and A F 62 degrees, the double of the second tearm, a ruler over G and F cuts the Di­ameter at E, and the Segment C E bears such Proportion to E A as the Tangent of 17 degrees doth to the Tangent of 31 degrees, then pricking the Chord of 20 degrees the double of the third tearm from C to D, a ruler over D and E cuts the other line at B, and the extent A B being the Chord of 40 degrees, the half there­of 20 degrees, is the fourth Proportional Sine sought.

Otherwise to Delineate Proportions in Tangents alone within the limits of a Quadrant.

In the performance whereof, it is required to take out one Tangent by help of the Chords, and to measure another, and so to regulate these two tearms, as they may both be lesse then the Radius, thereby to shun Excursion, which requires knowledge in varying of Proportions.

Example:

As Radius, to Tangent 67 degrees, So is the Tangent of 70 degrees to a fourth Tangent. The answer is: 79 degrees 30 minutes.

A Proportion wholly in Tangents may be all changed into their Complements, without altering the order of their places, the former Porportion so changed, is:

As the Radius is to the Tangent of 27 degrees, So is the Tangent of 20 degrees to the Tangent of 10 degrees 30 minutes.

Operation.

Draw the Quadrant A B C, and set off the greater middle tearm 27 degrees from A to D, and draw the Line D C, then set­ting one foot in A, draw the Arch H C, and from the Chords prick off the other middle tearm from C to I, a ruler laid from A to I, helps you to the Tangent thereof E C, take that extent and enter it, so that one foot resting on the line D C, the other turn­ed about may just touch B C, the foot of the Compasses, will rest

[Page 28]

at F, the nearest distance from F to A C set from C to G, and lay a ruler from A to G, and it cuts the Arch at K, the Arch K C measured on the Chords, is 10 degrees 30 minutes the fourth Proportional sought in the latter Proportion, the complement whereof is the fourth Proportional sought in the former Propor­tion, namely, 79 degrees 30 minutes.

Otherwise:

Any two Tangents may be changed into their complements, if the other two tearms of the Proportion do onely change places.

The former Proportion thus changed, is:

As the Tangent of 63 degrees: To the Radius ∷ So is the Tangent of 20 degrees: To the Tangent of 10 degrees 30 minutes.

This Proportion is also wrought by the former Scheme.

The former Proportion lyes evident, imagine a Perpendicular raised from the point A till it meet with D C, which being con­tinued, is the Secant of the ark A D, it then lyes:

As the Radius C A to the said Perpendicular or Tangent:

So is the other Tangent L C, equal to E C to L F, the Tangent sought.

The other Proportion lyes evident also.

Imagine a Perpendicular erect from the point B, till it meet with C D continued, then:

As the said Perpendicular the Tangent of 63 degrees: Is to its Base B C, the Radius ∷ So is the Perpendicular L C to its Base L F.

These are Equiangled Triangles, for the Angle C F Z, is equal to the Angle D C B: what hath been said is sufficient for any Proportion whatsoever, if where the Radius is not ingredient, it be brought in according to former Directions.

Another manner of Operation derived from the Proportion of Equality.

Example.

As the Tangent of 40d: To the Tangent of 50d

So is the Tangent of 62d 40′: To the Tangent of 70d.

If this Proportion be changed into the complements, it will be:

As the Tangent of 50 degrees: To the Tangent of 40 degrees

So is the Tangent of 27 degrees 20 minutes: To the Cotangent of the Arch sought, namely, to the Tangent of 20 degrees.

[figure]

Draw the Quadrant A C B, and from A to D out of a Line of Chords, prick off the first tearm 50 degrees, and draw the line D C, then setting one foot in A, draw the Arch H C, and there­in prick off 27d 20′ from C to I, a ruler laid from A to I, will [Page 30] help you to the Tangent of 27 degrees, 20 minutes C E, then ei­ther finde the Point F by drawing a line through E parallel to A C, through which Point F draw the parallel M F, or take E C and enter it, so that one foot resting in D C, the other turned a­bout may just touch A C, and then take the nearest distance from F to B C, which place from C to M, and through the Points F and M draw a right line, then prick off 40 degrees the other mid­dle tearm from A to L, a ruler laid from the Center to L will find the Point N, place M N from C to G, a ruler from A to G, will finde the Arch K C, which measured on the Chords, is 20 degrees, the fourth Proportional sought in the latter Proportion, the complement whereof 70 degrees, is the fourth Proportional in the former Proportion.

The foregoing Scheme doth also represent a Proportion of the less to the greater.

As the Tangent of 20 degrees, to the Tangent of 40 degrees,

So is the Tangent of 27 deg. 20 min. to the Tangent of 50 degrees.

Having pricked off 40 degrees to L, draw a Line from it into the Center, then enter the Tangent of 20 degrees, so as one foot resting in L C, the other turned about may just touch A C, and it will finde the Point N, through which draw a line parallel to B C, and therein prick down M F the third Tangent, then lay a ruler from the Center over F, and it will cut the Circle at D, the Arch A D is the measure of the fourth Proportional, and by chan­ging in many Cases the places of the second and third tearm, and admitting the work to be a little without the Quadrant, it may be performed after the same manner, onely the parallel F M will be more remote from B C, and possibly the Operation thereby ren­dred more certain.

If the Proportion were:

As the Tangent of 5 degrees, To the Tangent of 10 degrees,

So is the Tangent 65 degrees, To the Tangent of 77 degrees.

This Proportion being changed wholly into their Complements would not be inconvenient; or if the two latter tearms were changed into their Complements, it would be:

As the Tangent of 10 degrees, To Tangent of 25 degrees,

So is Tangent 5 degrees, To Tangent of 13 degrees.

Either way might be commodious enough.

Proportions in Sines and Tangents protracted from Equa­lity of Proportion.

Example:

As the Sine of 10 degrees, To the Sine of 20 degrees,

So is the Tangent of 59 degrees, To the Tangent of 73 degrees.

Which by altering the two latter tearms into their Comple­ments, and altering the place of the first and second tearm, will stand thus:

As the Sine of 20 degrees, To the Sine of 10 degrees,

So is the Tangent of 31 degrees, To the Tangent of 17 degrees.

And the Radius might be introduced into either of these Pro­portions several ways, from whence might issue divers Varieties of Operation, either of which Proportions may also be performed with as much facility without the Radius.

Example of the latter.

[figure]

Having made the Quadrant A B C, making a right Angle at the Center, prick out of the Chords 31 de­grees from A to F, and draw F C, then take the Sine of 20 de­grees, and enter it so upon C F, that one foot resting thereon, as namely at D, the other turn­ed about may touch A C, through the point D draw a line paral­lel to B C, and therein from G to E out of the Sines, prick down 10 degrees, a line drawn, or a ruler laid over C and E, will cut the Quadrant at H, and the Arch A H measured on the Chords is 17d, the measure of the Tangent sought, and this way may be per­formed on an Analemma ready cut.

Again, when a Sine is sought, I say the former Scheme serves to finde it, if the Proportion were:

As the Tangent of 31d: Is to the Sine of 20d

So is the Tangent of 17d: To the Sine of 10d.

If the three first tearms were given, the Scheme would finde E G to be the measure of the fourth Proportional, the Sine sought.

To sum or difference two Arks would be easily done, by ap­plying the Chord of the lesser Ark both upwards and downwards: And thus to solve with a Line of Chords all the Cases of Sphaeri­cal Triangles, will be a matter of no difficulty, but to prescribe Protractions for many particular questions, without intimation of the Proportion applyed, were but to mislead and puzzle the Rea­der, as hath been the vain affectation of some.

Proportions in Sines and Tangents otherwise performed.

Example: Let a Tangent be sought, and let the Proportion be:

As the Sine of 40d: Is to the Sine of 25d

So is the Tangent of 39d: To another Tangent, to wit, 28d.

[figure]

Having drawn the Quadrant D L C, place the Sine of 40 de­grees from C to A, and the Sine of 25 degrees to B, and draw [Page 33] B K and A I, parallel to C L, then prick the third tearm 39d in the Limbe from D to E, and draw C E, it cuts the Line passing through the second tearm at F, place the extent B F upon the line passing through the first tearm from A to G, a rule [...] over C and G cuts the Limbe at H, and the Arch D H being 28d, is the fourth Proportional sought.

If a Sine were sought. Example.

Let the Proportion be:

As the Tangent of 28 degrees: Is to the Tangent of 39 degrees

So is the Sine of 25 degrees To what Sine? 40 degrees.

Place 28 degrees and 39 degrees, the two Tangent Tearmes in the Limbe at H and E, and draw Lines into the Center, then place the Sine of 25 degrees the third tearm from C to B, and draw B K parallel to C L, and thorough the point where it cuts the line of the second tearm of the Proportion, as at F, draw a line parallel to C D, as is G M, and mind where it crosseth the line H G drawne thorough the first tearm of the Proportion, as at G, so is the extent G M the Sine of the fourth Proportional sought, to wit, 40 degrees, as it will be found being measured on the Sines.

By the like reason Proportions in Tangents alone, or in equal parts and Tangents, might have been protracted, for the extents A C, B C, might as well have been Tangents or equall parts, as Sines.

CHAP. IV. Containing other particular Schemes suited properly from Proportions to the resolution of the oblique Cases of Sphaerical Triangles, having here laid a general Method for both, and have expresly handled the right Angled Cases in the second or Analemmatick part, where­in the Reader will meet with such Sphaerical Definitions as are here wanting.

CASE I. Three Sides to finde an Angle.

THe particular Example shall be to finde the Suns Azimuth, the Proportion is:

As the Cosine of the Altitude: Is to the Secant of the Latitude

So is the difference of the Versed Sines of the Ark of Difference be­tween the Latitude and Altitude, and of the Suns Distance from [Page 34] the Elevated Pole: To the Versed Sine of the Azimuth from the North in this Hemisphere.

Example:

  • Let the Latitude be 51d 32′.
  • The Altitude —41 34.
  • The Suns declination 23 31 North.
[figure]

Having first drawn the quadrant B F C, with the Radius, or 60 degrees of the Chords, then prick the Chord of the Latitude 51 degrees 32 minutes from B to L, and draw C L produced: prick the Chord of the Atitude, to wit, 41 degrees 34 minutes, from B to A, prick the Chord of the Declination 23 degrees 31 minutes in summer, from F upwards to D, but in winter downwards in the arch of the quadrant continued, and draw D E parallel to C F, the nearest distance from A to C F, is the Cosine of the Altitude, which place on the Latitude line, from C to H, so is C H the secant of the Latitude, the nearest distance from H to C F being Radius, which extent place from C to K.

Then place the arch A L from B to G, and the nearest distance from G to E D is the difference of the versed Sines of the third tearm of the Proportion; it is also by reason of the Proportion of equality, the versed Sine of the Azimuth from the North, which [Page 35] place from C to M, then because it is greater then the Radius C K, the Azimuth is more then 90 degrees from the North, and K M is the Sine of the Azimuth from the East or West, wherewith on the point K describe the ark O, and a ruler from the Center touching it, cuts the Limbe at Q, and the arch F Q being 15 degrees, is the Suns Azimuth to the Southwards of East or West, whereas if the point M had fallen as much on the other side K, it had been so much to the Northwards of it.

This is an excellent Scheme, in regard it requires the drawing of no new Lines till the Declination vary.

The Cosine of the Altitude may be multiplied, &c. being dou­bled, it reacheth to I, the Radius, to wit, C K doubled reacheth to L, the extent C M being doubled, reacheth to N, with L N de­scribe the Ark P, and a ruler from the Center, touching its extre­mity, finds the Point Q in the Limbe, as before.

Note also, that the Cosine of the Altitude, and the difference of the versed Sines aforesaid, may be taken from a line of Versed or Natural Sines on a Ruler of any Radius big enough, and there­with proceed as if they were taken from the Scheme.

Moreover, the extent C R is the Sine of the Amplitude to the same Radius, wherewith the quadrant was drawn, and the extent E R is the Sine of the Ascensional difference, or of the time of Sun rising or setting from Six, the Radius to which Sine being D E.

Another Scheme for finding the Azimuth.

Example:

  • Latitude 51d 32′.
  • Declination 13d North.
  • Altitude 31d 18′.
[figure]

Having with 60 degrees of the Chords, described a Semicircle A D B, draw the Diameter A C B, perpendicular thereto from the Center raise C D, prick off the Latitude from A to L, and draw the Latitude line L M parallel to D C, prick off the height from D to H, and place the Sine thereof being the nearst distance from H to D C, from L to N place the Chord of the Suns Polar distance, to wit 77 degrees, from N to P, and setting one foot on M, with the extent M P, describe an Ark, then take the Cosine of the Altitude being the nearest distance from H to A C, and upon C as a Center, describe another Ark which crosseth the for­mer at S, a Ruler from the Center over S, cuts the Limbe at V, and the Arch A V being 110d, is the Suns Azimuth from the North.

The like Operation holds for South Declination, onely then the Chord of the Polar distance is greater then 90d by the Suns decli­nation.

If the Sun have Depression, the Sine of it must be pricked up­ward above L in the Latitude Line, and then as before.

Thus when three Sides are given to finde an Angle, the complements of those Sides may bear the names of Latitude, Altitude and Declination as here, and the Solution will be the same.

To finde the Amplitude.

Prick 77d the Chord of the Suns Polar distance from L to P, and setting one foot in M, with the extent M p, cross the Limbe at K, and the arch D K being 21d 12′, is the measure thereof.

In following Schemes we shall finde the hour from Noon from the Point A, also the Azimuth from the South may be found from the same Point, and possibly with more convenience in regard the Intersections may not happen so oblique, and that upon this consideration, that whatsoever Altitude the Sun hath in any Signe upon any Azimuth from the north, he hath the like De­pression in the Opposite Sign upon the like Azimuth counted from the South.

Wherefore retaining the former construction, L N the Sine of the Altitude, which in the former Scheme was placed down­wards, in this following Scheme place upwards.

[figure]

Also prick the Chord of 103d the Suns di­stance from the de­pressed Pole, from N to P, and upon M as a Center, with M P, de­scribe a prickt Ark al­so upon C, with the nearest distance from H to A C, describe another Ark crossing the former at S, a Ru­ler over C and S, cuts the Limbe at V, and the Arch B V being 110d, is the Suns Azi­muth from the North, and the Arch A V 70d, his Azimuth from the South in this Hemisphere.

This is a Scheme of much worth, in regard it requires the draw­ing of no new Lines till the Latitude vary. In South Latitudes when the Altitude is very great, the intersections of the prickt Arks will fall near the Center, in that case let the Altitude and Latitude change Names, and fit the Scheme thereto: Here note, that the three points M C S are the angular points of the Sides of a plain Triangle, & if those Sides be doubled (doubling the sine M C outward beyond M) the intersection at S which now happens within the Semicircle, would happen without and beyond it: The foundation of this Scheme shall afterwards be suggested.

The Azimuth Compass in the Frontispiece described.

It is supposed to be made of a square Board, on which there is a Circle described which is cut out through: the Line N S represents a thread, upon the Point N as a Center placed in the Circum­ference, there moveth a Labell or Triangle represented by N S A, the Side N A is supposed to stand Perpendicular, and to have a Slit in it, the line S A is to be a thread extended from S to A, the other side of which Triangle resembles a Moveable Toung or Labell, the Center being in the Circumference, every degree is twice as large as it would be, if it were at the Center, wherefore the quadrants S E, S W, are numbred with 45d on each side the [Page 38] Line N S, but are not divided with concentrick Circles and Dia­gonals, nor can they be with truth when ever the Center is placed in the Circumference, and this I call an Azimuth Compass, because though it be not so, yet it supplies the use of one, and if a right line be continued from N to E, and made a line of Sines; also a Tan­gent of 45d put through the Limbe, it, or an Azimuth Compass, is rendred general, without the use of Paper-draughts, as I have shewed in the Uses of the smallest Quadrant in my Treatise, The Sector on a Quadrant, Page 277 to 284. where the Reader will meet with ready Proportions for Calculating the Suns Azimuth or true Coast, not before published.

The Use of the said Azimuth Compass at Sea, is readily to ap­ply it to any Compass in the Ship, and thereby finde the true Coast of the Suns bearing by that Compass to which it is applyed, and consequently the Variation thereof, and by my own experi­ence I have often found, that by the thread which passeth through the Diameter of the said A [...]imuth Compass, it may very well by the View be placed over the Meridian line of the Compass, and then turning the moveable Label towards the Sun, so that the shadow of the thread may pass thorough the Slit, the tongue of the Label, amongst the graduations of the Limbe, shewes how the Sun bears by the said Compass, in which the toucht wires is supposed to be precisely under the Flower-deluce, & when the Sun is more then 45d from the Meridian either way, the thread in the [...]iameter of the Circle must be placed by the view over the East or West point of the Compass, and the Suns bearing accordingly reckoned from thence.

Then admiting that the bearing of the Sun by the Compass and his true Azimuth or Coast of bearing, be found either by Calcula­tion or the former Schemes, the Variation of the said Compass from the North (which all Needles are lyable unto) with the Coast thereof may thus be found.

Example:

Let the bearing of the Sun by the Compass be 55d East-ward from the South, and his true coast in the Heavens be 43d ¾ from the South East-wards.

Having upon C with 60 degrees of the Chords, described the Circle S W N E, prick 55 degrees the Suns coast by the Compass

[Page 39]

from S to ⊙, and draw ⊙ C, then place 43d ¾ the Suns true coast from ⊙ to A, and A is the true South Point, and B opposite thereto the North Point, and the Arch S A sheweth that the Compass varieth 11 degrees and a quarter from the South West­ward; or, which is all one, the Arch B M sheweth it to vary as much from the North East-ward, because the Point N falleth to the Eastward of B.

Then admit it were required to steer the Ship away N E by E, being the fifth point from the North East-ward, it is desired to know how she must wind or steer by that Compass. Out of the Scale of Rumbes place five point from B to R, then measure the extent N R on the Rumbes, and it sheweth four points, whence we may conclude th [...]t to make good the former Course, the Ship must be steered North-east by this Compass.

The re [...]diest wa [...] for fin [...]ing the Variation, is by those Sea Rings described by M [...]. Wright, but those are chargeable, are but in few ships, fixed but to one Compass, reserved for the Ship masters own peculiar Ob [...]ervations, so that the common Mariners can have no practise thereby.

A Scheme for finding the Hour.

Example.

  • Latitude 51d 22′ North.
  • Declination 23d 31′ North.
  • Altitude 10d 28′, Complement 79d 32′.
[figure]

Having described the Semicircle, and divided it into two Quadrants by the line D C, prick as before, the Latitude 51d 32′ from A to L, and draw L M parallel to D C: Prick off the Declination 23d 31′ from D to E, prick the Sine thereof being the nearest distance from E to D C in Winter, or South Declina­tion from L to Q upwards, but in Summer or North Declination O N downwards, and with the Cosine of the Declination being the nearest distance from E to A C, upon C as a Center, describe the Ark G W, so is the Scheme prepared for that Declination both North and South.

To finde the Hour in Winter.

The Suns height being 10d 28′, its Complement is 79d 32′, prick the Chord thereof from Q to T, and setting one foot upon M, with the extent M T draw the arch I, a ruler from the Center over that Intersection, finds the point K, and the Arch A K being 30d, the hour is either 10 in the Morning, or 2 in the Afternoon.

To finde the time of Sun rising.

Prick the Chord of 90d from Q to O, and with the extent M O upon M as a Center, cross the ark G W at P, a ruler from the Center over P, finds the point R in the Limbe, and the ark D R [Page 41] being 33d 12′, in time about 2 hours 13′, is the time of the Suns ri­sing or setting from Six to that Declination both North and South.

To finde the Hour of the Day in Summer to the same Declina­tion, the Latitude being the same.

Let the Altitude be 9d 30′, its Complement is 81d 30′, prick the Chord thereof from N to H, and with the extent M H upon M as a Center, cross the arch G W as at S, a ruler from the Center over that Intersection, finds the point V in the Limbe, and the ark D V being 15d, the true time of the day is either five in the Morning, or seven in the Afternoon.

Having found the Hour first, then the Azimuth and Angle of Position may be easily found from the Proportion of the Sines of Sides to the Sines of their opposite Angles, as in the following Scheme.

Example:

  • Latitude 51d 32′.
  • Declination 13d North.
  • Altitude 37d 18′.
[figure]

By the former Directions the Hour will be found to be 45d from noon, either 9 in the morning, or 3 in the afternoon, the Intersecti­on whereof happens at e, through e, draw e F parallel to A B, and prick the Altitude 37d 18′ from D to H, and draw H C, also joyn e C and make C O equal to C M, and through the point O, draw O Q parallel to A B, so is the extent C Q the Sine of [Page 42] the Angle of Position, and the extent C P the Sine of the Azimuth from the Meridian.

Otherwise for the Azimuth.

With the nearest distance from H to C B, setting one foot in C, cross the parallel e F at F, a ruler from the Center cuts the Limbe at I, and the arch B I is the Suns Azimuth either from the North or South, in this Case 60d from the South.

For the Angle of Position.

With the former extent cross the parallel O Q at G, a ruler from the Center cuts the Limbe at K, and the arch B K being 33d 34′, is the measure of the Angle of Position, and this work might have been performed on the other side D C; but to avoid confusion when the Doubts about Opposite Sides and Angles may be re­moved, and when not, as when a double answer is to be given, I have shewed in a Treatise, Entituled, The Sector on a Quadrant, page 139, 140. And how to find the points I or K without draw­ing the lines e F or O G, and that by help of a cross or Intersection like that at e, which may either happen within or without the out­ward Circle, the Reader may attain from the last Scheme for fin­ding the Amplitude.

[figure]

The Converse of the former Scheme for finding the Hour, will finde the Suns Altitudes on all Hours, and the Distances of Places in the Arch of a great Circle.

Example.

  • Latitude 51d 32′.
  • Declination 23d 31′ North.
  • Hour 75d from Noon, that is either 7 in the Morning, or 5 in the Afternoon.

Having drawn the Semicircle, its Diameter, and by a Perpen­dicular from the Center divided it into two quadrants, and therein having prickt off A L the Latitude, and thorough the same drawn L M produced and parallel to D C, therein from L to M and Q prick off the Sine of the Declination.

Then prick off the Hour from Noon from A to R, and laying the Ruler from the Center, draw the line R E, and with the Co­sine of the Declination, namely, the nearest distance from F to D C, draw the Arch G E, and transfer the distance between the points M, and E from M to H.

Lastly, the distance between the points N and H, is the Chor [...] of the Suns distance from the Zenith for that Hour, namely, 62d 37′, the Complement whereof 27d 23′ is the Altitude sought.

Moreover, the distance between H and Q, is the Chord of the Suns distance from the Zenith for the winter declination, namely, 99d 30′, which being greater then a quadrant, argues the Sun to have 9d 30′ of Depression under the Horizon, and so much is his Altitude for the hours of 5 in the Morning, or 7 in the Afternoon when his Declination is 23d 31′ North.

Another Example for the same Latitude and Declination.

Let the Hour from Noon be either 10 in the Morning or 2 in the Afternoon, prick off 30d from A to K, and from the Center draw the line K G, place the distance M G from M to O, so is the di­stance O N the Chord of 36d 16′, the Complement whereof 53d 44′ is the Summer Altitude for that Hour, and the distance O Q is the Chord of 79d 32′, the Complement whereof 10d 28′ is the Winter Altitude for that Hour.

Also for the Distances of places in the ark of a great Circle, the Case in Sphaerical Triangles is the same with that here resolved.

So if there were two places, the one in North Latitude 51d 32′, the other in North Latitude 23d 31′, the difference of Longitude between them being 75d, their distance by the former Scheme will be found to be 62d 37′; but if the latter place were in as much South Latitude, then their distance would be 99d 30′.

Another Example for finding the Distances of Places in the Arch of a great Circle.

Example.

Let the two Places be according to the Sea-mans Calendar.

  • Isle of Lobos, Longitude 307d 41′. Latitude 40d 21′ South.
  • Lizard —18 30. Latitude 50 10 North.
  • Difference of Longitude 289 11. Complement 70d 49′.
[figure]

Having described a Circle, make AE M 70d 49′, M I the Lati­tude of the Island, B I the Sine thereof falling Perpendicularly on C M, AE L the Latitude of the Lizard, L A the Sine thereof, make A E equal to the extent A B, and prick B I from L upwards to H, when the places are in different Hemispheres, but downwards to K, when in the same Hemisphere, and the extent H E or K E, is the Chord of the Ark of distance between both places in this Example

  • H E is 109d, 41′.
  • K E is 48d, 57′.

Demonstration.

This Scheme I first met with in a Map made in Holland, the foundation whereof was long since laid by Copernicus and Regiomon­tanus, who from a right lined plain Triangle, happening at the Center of the Sphere, have prescribed a Method of Calculation for finding an Angle when three Sides are given: Here we shall illustrate the Converse, how from two Sides and the Angle com­prehended, to find the third Side.

From any two points in the Sphere, suppose Perpendiculars to fall on the plain of the Equator here represented by AE L Q M, which Perpendiculars are the Sines of the Latitudes of those two Points, and the distance of the points in the Plain of the Equino­ctial from the Center of the Sphere, are the Cosines of those Lati­tudes, & the angle at the Center between those points in the plain of the Equator, is equal to the arch of the Equinoctial between the two Meridians, passing through the supposed Points in the Sphere: now a right line extended in the Sphere between any two Points, is the Chord of the Ark of distance between those Points.

Understand then, that the three Points A, C, B, limit the Sides of a righ [...] lined Triangle in the Plain of the Equator, where­of the Angle A C B is at the Center, then the extent A B is placed from A to E, if then we draw D E G perpendicular to A Q, and place B I from E to G and D, the extent L G shall be the Chord of the third Side when the places are in different Hemi­spheres, and the extent L D is the Chord of their distance when they are in the same Hemisphere.

And if the extent E D, E G, be placed from L to H and K, the line D E G need not be drawn, because the extent L G and L D, if it be rightly conceived, are the two very Points at first supposed in the Sphere, the extent A B as to matter of Calculation, being one Side of a plain Triangle right angled. The sum or difference of the Sines of both Latitudes the other Side, and the Chord of the distance is the Hipotenusal, or third Side sought.

Thus the Ancients by Calculation, and we by Protraction, ha­ving two Sides and the Angle comprehended given, find the third Side; or having three Sides given, find the Angle opposite to that Side which in the Scheme is measured by a Chord, as by result from the three Sides there will be got the two extents A E [Page 46] and C B, and consequently the Intersection at B, and thence the Angle AE M, which before was insisted on in finding the Azimuth and Hour, by the like reason the Distances of Stars may be found from their Longitudes and Latitudes, or from their Declinations and right Ascensions. Divers other Schemes from other Proporti­ons might be added for finding the Hour and Azimuth, &c. which which I am loth to trouble the Reader withal.

I shall adde another Scheme for this purpose, which carries on the same Proportion, by which this Case is usually Calculated: The Proportions are expressed in a Treatise, The Sector on a Qua­drant, page 127.

Example.

  • Latitude —51d 32′.
  • Declination 23 31.
  • Hour—60 from Noon.
[figure]

Having drawn a Semicircle and the Radius Z D, prick the Latitude from C to L, and draw L A parallel to C E, and making A L Radius, place the Sine of 30d from A to 30d: how to do this, is shewed in the Second Part, a ruler over D and 30d cuts the Limbe at B, from B to F set off 66d 29′ the Suns distance from the Elevated Pole, and draw a line into the Center, and make D K equal to D 30d, and draw H K parallel to C E, and it is the parallel of Altitude required, the measure whereof being the Arch C H, is 36d 42′.

Two Sides with the Angle comprehended to find both the other angles, & then the third side. Schemes may be fitted to Proportions [Page 47] which at two Operations find both those Angles, first according to the first Direction for operating Proportions in the Sines and Tangents, and then by another operation, the third Side may be found: also this Case is performed otherwise in the Geometrical Dyalling.

To finde the Suns Altitudes on all Azimuths.

Example.

  • Latitude—51d 32′.
  • Declination 23 31 North.
  • Azimuth 30 deg. from the Vertical or Point of East and West.
[figure]

Having described a Semicircle, and divided it into halfs by the Perpendicular H C, prick the Latitude from S to L, and draw L A parallel to S N, and proportion out the Sine of 30d to the Radius L A, and prick it from A to 30d, upon which point with the Sine of the Declination, describe a prickt Circle, and a ruler from the Center just touching the outward extreamities of it, cuts the Limbe at T and K: Here note, that H C is the Horizontal line and any Ark counted from H towards K is Altitude, but to­wards N is Depression; so in this Example the Arch H K being 49d 56′, is the Altitude for 30d of Azimuth to the South­wards of the East and West for North Declination, and the Arch H T being 6d 36′, is the Suns Depression under the Horizon for the same Azimuth, when his Declination is 23d 31′ South.

It is also his Altitude for 30d of Azimuth to the North-wards of the East or West, when his Declination is 23d 31′ North, because [Page 48] if we place A 30d as much on the other side the Vertical at M, and with the Sine of the Declination describe an Ark at f, a ruler from the Center will cut the Limbe as much on this side H, as T is on the other side.

If the prickt Circle had hapned wholly on one side C H, a ruler from the Center touching its extreamities, and cutting the out­ward Circle in two points, that nearest unto H had been the Altitude to the assigned Azimuth for South Declination, and the remotest for North Declination.

And if one Side of the prickt Circle happens below S C, as it may do both for the Sun or Stars, when their Declination is more then the Latitude of the place, then the Quadrant H S. must be continued to a Semicircle, and H C must be also produced, and the Altitude counted above the other end of the said Horizontal Line.

If the ruler should touch the prickt Circle near the Center, let it be noted that C 30d is the Radius, and the extent that described the prickt Circle, is a Sine of an Ark to that Radius; whence it followes, that a right angled Triangle may be framed, and the answer given in the Limbe, as we have often done before. See the last Scheme for finding the Amplitude.

The Demonstration of this Scheme, is founded not onely on the Analemma, as I have said in the Second Part, but likewise on those Proportions, whereby the Suns Altitudes are Calculated on all Azimuths.

The first Proportion finds the Equinoctial / Altitude proper to the given Azimuth, and is:

As the Radius: To the Cotangent of the Latitude

So is the Sine of any Azimuth from the Vertical:

To the Tangent of the Equinoctial Altitude

In the former Scheme L A is the Radius of a line of Sines, it is also the Cotangent of the Latitude, if we make C A Radius.

Then because of the Proportion of Equality in the two first tearmes, it followes that the sine of the Azimuth from the Vertical A 30d, to the Radius L A, is also the Tangent of the Equinoctial Altitude, making C A Radius, wherefore a ruler over C 30d cuts the Limbe at B, and the Ark H B being 21d 40′, is the Equinoctial Altitude sought.

The next Proportion is:

As the sine of the Latitude:

Is to the Cosine of the Equinoctial Altitude

So is the sine of the Declination:

To the sine of a fourth Ark

Get the sum and diffe [...]ence of the Equinoctial Altitude, and of this fourth Ark, the Sum is the Summer Altitude for Azimuths from the Vertical toward the South in this Hemisphere.

The difference when this fourth ark is

  • lesser
  • greater

then the Equino­ctial Altitude, is the

  • Winter
  • Summer

Altitude for Azimuths from the ver­tical towards the

  • South.
  • North.

In the former Scheme if C 30d be Radius, 30d A is the sine of the Equinoctial Altitude, and C A is the Cosine thereof, which is also the sine of the Latitude to the common Radius, then by rea­son of the Proportion of equality in the two first tearms, it follows that the sine of the Declination to the common Radius being the third tearme, is also the sine of the fourth Arch sought, C 30d being Radius, and the summing or differencing of the two Arks, is performed by describing the prickt Circle, and laying a ruler from the Center touching its Extreamities, after this m [...]nner a Scheme is contrived from Proportions, to find the third Side, having two Sides with an angle opposite to one of them given.

Two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them given, to finde the Angle included.

This of all other Cases is the most difficult either on the Ana­lemma or from Proportions to suit Schemes unto, however we shall adde a particular Question, with the Proportions and Scheme fitted thereto:

  • Let there be given the Latitude,
  • The Suns Declination,

And the Azimuth to the Sun or Stars from the East or West, and let it be required to finde the Hour from Noon,

The Proportion is:

As the Tangent of the Azimuth from East or West:

Is to the sine of the Latitude

So is the Radius:

To the Cotangent of the first Ark

Again:

As the Cotangent of the Declination:

Is to the Cosine of the first Ark

So is the Cotangent of the Latitude:

To the Cosine of the second Ark

The Declination being North, if the Azimuth and Angle of Position be both acute, the Sum of the first and second Ark is the Hour from Noon, if of different kindes, their difference.

But when the Declination is South, if the Azimuth be to the South-wards of the East or West, the complement of the Sum of the former Arkes to a Semicircle, is the Hour from Noon; but if the Azimuth be to the Northwards of the East or West, the complement of their difference is the Hour from Noon.

When the Angle of Position will be acute, and when obtuse. See my Treatise, The Sector on a Quadrant, page 117.

These Proportions we shall carry on in the Scheme following.

Example.

  • Latitude 51d 32′ North.
  • Declination 23d 31′
  • Azimuth from the Vertical 30d
[figure]

Upon C as a Center, describe a Semicircle, draw the Diameter N C S, and the Radius C E W perpendicular thereto, set off the Declination from S to D, and the Latitude to L, drawing lines in­to the Center.

Set off the Azimuth being 30d from the Vertical from E to A, the nearest distance from A to N C, prick on the Latitude line from C to I, and draw I Q parallel to C E, and where it intersects the Declination line (which may sometimes fall on the other side of L) set K; also draw I H parallel to S C, and H B equal to the nearest distance from A to C E, then with K Q upon the point B describe an Ark, and on both Sides of it lay a ruler from the Center just touching the outward Extreamitie thereof, and you will finde the points R and T in the Limbe.

The Declination being North.

If the Azimuth be to the Northwards of the East, and Angle of Position acute, the Ark N T is the Hour from Noon, in this Ex­ample 110d 16′, but if the Azimuth be to the Southwards of the Vertical, and Angle of Position acute, or to the Northwards and the Angle of Position obtuse, the Ark S R is the Hour from Noon, in the former of these Cases 37d 26′.

The Declination being South.

If the Azimuth be to the Southwards of the East or West, the Ark S T is the Hour from Noon, in this Case 69d 44′.

If it be to the Northwards, then is the Ark N R the Hour from Noon, to wit, 142d 34′, we speak in reference to the Northern Hemisphere, in the other Hemisphere let the words North and South change places.

Thus when we have two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them, we may finde the Angle included by this Scheme, calling one of those Sides the Colatitude, the other the Polar distance, and the Angle given the Azimuth, and that sought the Hour; and thus for the Sun or such Stars as have two Altitudes on every Azimuth, we may finde the respective times when they shall be on that Azimuth, by turning the Stars Hour into common time, as I have shewed in a Treatise called, The Sector on a Qua­drant.

[figure]

Here we have retained the former Scheme, but onely conti­nued some of the lines thereof, making the Cosine of the Azimuth, to wit, the nearest distance from A to N C to be Radius, equal to C I the sine thereof, to wit, the nearest distance from A to C E, will become the Tangent, which is equal to H B or C R, and ma­king C I Radius, the extent C H equal to I Q, is the sine of the Latitude, then the first Proportion lyes plain:

As C R the Tangent of the Azimuth from the Vertical:

Is to R B the sine of the Latitude

So is C S the Radius:

To S G the Cotangent of the first Ark

Wherefore the point B is in a right line from the Center with the first Ark.

Then making C B Radius, H B is the sine of the first Ark, and C H the Cosine, then the second Proportion lyes thus:

As F H the Cotangent of the Declination:

Is to H C the Cosine of the first Ark

So is M K equal to H I the Cotangent of the Latitude:

To M C equal to K Q, the Cosine of the second Ark to the Radius C B. Lastly, the summing and differencing of these Arks is performed by describing an Ark with K Q upon the Point B.

Another Scheme for the same purpose, in which the Opera­tions are Sinical, and the Latitude, Declination and Azimuth, the same as before.

[figure]

Having described a Semicircle, and divided it into two Qua­drants by the Radius C W, prick the Declination from W to D, the Azimuth to A, drawing Lines into the Center, also the Lati­tude from W to L.

Then place the Cosine of the Latitude (being the nearest di­stance from L to N C) from C to I, and draw I K parallel to N C, then place the extent C O so at Q as a sine in the Limbe, that it may fall Perpendicular on C E, as doth Q E, wherein make E B equal to K O, and upon the Point B as a Center, with the sine of the Azimuth, being the nearest distance from A to C W, describe the prickt Ark, and lay a ruler from the Center touching its ex­treamities on both Sides, and cutting the Limbe at R and T, and the Arkes

  • S T
  • S R
  • N T
  • N R

are agreeable in order to the four Cautions given in the former Scheme.

This Scheme first findes the Angle opposite to the other of the given Sides, whereof C O is the sine, and then we have two Angles with a Side opposite to one of them given, to finde the third Angle, which is the Angle included, and the Proportions [Page 54] are of the same kind with those for finding the Altitudes on all Azimuths, which may be found in this Scheme, if we place C I in the Limbe as is Q E, and in it make the extent E B equal to I K, then an Ark described after the same manner, with the nearest distance from D to C W, shall in like kind give the Suns Altitudes on all Azimuths, C W being the Horizontal Line.

In page 60 of a Treatise of Dyalling by the Plain Scale or Line of Chords, for the more easie drawing the Parallels of Declination on the Horizontal Projection of the Sphere, I have intimated that a ready way should be shewed for finding the Amplitude, and al­though that before prescribed be very ready, yet I shall adde one more from the common Proportion:

As the Cosine of the Latitude: Is to the Sine of the Declination

So is the Radius: To the Sine of the Amplitude

Example.

  • Latitude—62d 35′.
  • The complement is 27d 25′.
  • Declination—23d 30′.
[figure]

Having drawn the Quadrant C B F, double the complement of the Latitude, and it is 54d 50′, prick the Chord thereof from C to R, then double the Declination, which will be 47d, with the Chord thereof upon the point R, describe the prickt Ark G, a ruler laid from the Center just touching that Ark, cuts the Limbe at A, and the Arch B A being 60d, is the measure of the Amplitude.

Here note, That the extent wherewith G was drawn is the Sine of the Amplitude, if you make C R Radius, and when the Am­plitude falls to be large, it may be better found the other way by help of the Cosine, thus: Prick the extent R G from C to D, then make C L and D E equal to C R, so is C E the Cosine of the Amplitude, with which extent upon the Point L, describe the Ark H, and a ruler from the Center just touching it, cuts the qua­drants Limbe at A, as before.

Otherwise with more certainty.

Upon the Point E, with the extent C D, describe a little Ark neare N: Again, upon the point D with the extent C E, describe another Ark crossing the former at N, then a ruler laid over the Center and the cross at N, will cut the Limbe at A, as before; Note this well, because it is wholly omitted in the Second Book, page 18, where it should rather have been handled; and if you will double the extent C D, and the Radius C R, you will finde the point E twice as far out towards B, and the intersection at N twice as remote from the Center, as now it is, and by the like reason when a line is to be drawn unto the Limbe from a Point that happens near the Center, take the nearest distance from the point, first to C F, and triple it in the said line, then the nearest distance to C B, and triple it in that line, and find a point of inter­section more remote from the Center, through which and the Cen­ter the line required is to be drawn, and the said extents may be doubled, or often multiplyed.

How to take the Suns Altitude or Height, by the Shadow of a Gnomon.

How to perform this, I have shewed in the Second Part, but there the Shadow doth not immediately give the height, whereto notwithstanding a Gnomon may be fitted.

Imagine the former Quadrant to lye flat upon the Plain of the Horizon, and draw the line F K perpendicular to C F of what length you please, which is supposed to be done upon a square piece of Wood.

Then to fit the Gnomon, prick the Chord of 45 degrees from F to M, and draw C K, then imagine the Triangle C K F to be a Gnomon or Cock standing perpendicularly upright over the line C E F, if then you turn this Quadrant so about towards the Sun, that the shadow of the streight edge of the Cock may fall in the line F K, the shadow of the slope edge of the Cock (which edge may be supplied by a Thread) will happen in the Limbe, and there shew the Suns Height required, if counted from B towards F. This Conceit is taken from Clavius de Astrolabio.

FINIS.
THE MARINERS PLAIN S …

THE MARINERS PLAIN SCALE NEW PLAIN'D: OR, A Treatise shewing the ample Uses of a Circle equally di­vided, or of a Line of CHORDS and equal Parts, Divided into Three Books or Parts.

Being contrived to be had either alone, or with the other Parts.

I. The first containing Geometrical Rudiments, and shew­ing the Uses of a Line of Chords, in resolving of all Proportions relating to Plain or Spherical Triangles, with Schemes suited to all the Cases derived from Proportions, and the full Use of the Scale in Navigation, according to the particulars in the following Page, and in finding the Variation of the Compass.

II. The second shewing the Uses of a Line of Chords, in resolving all the Cases of Spherical Triangles, by Projecting the Sphere Orthographically, or laying down the Sphere in right Lines, commonly called, The Drawing or Delineating of the Analemma.

With an everlasting Almanack in two Verses, &c.

III. The third part shewing the Uses of a Line of Chords, in resolving all the Cases of Spherical Triangles Stereogra­phically that is on the Circular Projection with Dyal­ling, from three Shadows of a Gnomon on a regular Flat, or by two Shadows, &c.

To which may also be added a Treatise of the Authors, of Dyalling by a Line of Chords, formerly published.

Of great Ʋse to Sea-men, and Students in the Mathematicks.

By John Collins of London, Pen-man, Accomptant, Philomathet.

London, Printed by T. J. for Fr. Cossinet, at the Anchor and Mariner in Tower-street, 1659.

The Greater Meridian Line.

The Lesser

CHAP. I. Of the Art of Navigation.

THe end of this Art, is to shew how a Ship is to be steered and guided, that at length she may arrive at the desi­red Port.

The Imperfections and Defects of this Art are many, partly in the skill or theorick, partly in the practice.

In the first Principles, or in the Theorick, a great defect is, that the true Longitudes of Places are not yet known, and unless the true Longitudes and Latitudes of Places be known, their true Courses and Distances cannot be found, whence it will unavoi­dably follow, that no true reckoning can be kept.

After a long Voyage, when a Ship is supposed to be a compe­tent distance, or not very far off the main Land, it is a usual cu­stom of the Master to require from his Mates an account of their judgement concerning the bearing and distance of some Cape or Head-land which they may make, or gain sight of, and in the event he that gives the best judgement, is supposed to have kept the best reckoning; and this may be admitted of, provided they were all at first agreed concerning the true Course and Distance of the Place they shall first espie, from that place from which they were bound, otherwise a bad reckoning in the result may prove better then a good one, in respect of the uncertainty in the Longitude: I suppose Mr. Wright and others have made such grie­vous Complaints as these.

That there is 150 or 200 Leagues error in the distance between the Bay of Mexico and the Azores, and in some Charts about 600 Leagues error in the distance between Cape Mendosino and Cape California, which great errors are partly to be ascribed to the uncertainty of Longitude, and partly to the Plain Chart, which makes Places far more distant then they would be, and situated much out of their true Rumbe.

Another uncertainty there is in keeping the Ship steered upon [Page 2] the true Rumbe, albeit it were known, for the Wyres of the Needle being touched by the Load-stone, are subject to be drawn aside by any Iron near it, and liable to variation, and doth not shew the true North and South, which ought continually to be observed and allowed for, as I have said.

And moreover in one and the same Region or Place, doth not exactly shew the same Rumbe or Course, as is well known to Dyallists, by their Experiments in observing the Situation of a Wall; thereby Maetius saith, he sometimes found a degree or two difference, and Mr. Gunter's Experiments at Limehouse, for finding the variation, made it in some places of the same ground more by half a degree then in other places, and in some other places less, which may be thus illustrated.

Let a Sea-Compass, or rather a Box and Needle, be fastened upon a Surveying Instrument, so that the Needle may exactly point to some mark or graduation in the Box, whereto it may be afterwards set, and then looking through the Sights of the Instru­ment, observe what mark, as Tree, Tower, Building, or the like, appears in view to the eye, and if there be no such mark, then a Staff may be set up at a competent distance, then move the Field-Instrument round, that the Needle may totter and be unsetled, but the Sights not altered, and afterwards in the same place let it settle it self to point out the very same Point or mark in the Box, as it did before, then if you look through the former sights, the mark set up will not appear in the same visual line to the eye, as before, but on one side or the other.

And if there be so much uncertainty on the firm Land; how much more in the floating Sea, where the Ship may be carried a­way with secret and unknown Currents; for the finding out whereof it will be necessary for the Masters and Mates when they see any Island or Land, to observe which way the ripples of water use to set: It will also be very advantagious to observe the usual customs of the Winds, called A Trade Wind, which many times causeth the Sea to have a Course or Current therewith, as Maetius instanceth by an Example between Brasilia and Angola, in the op­posite Coast of Africa.

From the tenth of April to the tenth of July, the Current sets North-west.

From the tenth of July to the tenth of October, it seems to have no motion.

From the tenth of October to the tenth of January, it sets South­west.

And from the tenth of January to the tenth of April, it seems to have no motion again.

Another Instance of the uncertainty in a reckoning by reason of Currents, may be taken from Davis his Streights, where the Sea flows with such a violent, secret, or undiscerned force, that those which steer from thence East by the Compass, do finde they have made their Course South-east, which is a sufficient Instance of the danger and uncertainty of Navigation, for when a Ship steers but one Rumbe, or 11d ¼ from the true Course, in the space of an hundred Leagues, she shall fall wide of expectation almost ten Leagues, or 1/10 of the distance, which in four Rumbes error will amoun [...] to about 70 Leagues.

The Estimation of the distance sailed, for the most part depends upon [...]he judgement, albeit when the Course is directly under the Meridian, it may be known by Observation of the difference of Latitude, if we suppose the true quantity of the measure of a degree on the Surface of the eatrh to be agreed upon, and hereby Estimation ought to be rectified, which otherwise is helped and furthered by the Log-line; the uncertainty whereof by Currents is so great, that Maetius instanceth, that an expert Master being bound to the Isle of St. Helens in the midst of the Sea, in 16d of South Latitude, and having got into the parallel or Latitude there­of, thinking to make it Eastward, was notwithstanding carried by the hidden Motion or Current of the Sea about 800 Miles West­ward, till he found himself near America or Brasilia, and yet notwithstanding stemmed the Current with a fair Wind: And S [...]ellius instanceth that a Navigator of good repute failing out of Holland, twice mist the Maderas, and returned home to the great dammage of the Owners.

And where such Currents are if you stem them, the distance run will be less then it is by Estimation, but if you sayl with them, it will be much more, and proportionally it will be less or more, if you cross it eitheir directly or obliquely, according as it sets with or against your intended Course.

Lastly, the observation of the Latitude (being the sole help whereby to rectifie an erronious reckoning) cannot be performed so near the truth, but that divers minutes of error may be committed, as Suellius instanceth, that six several persons at the same time in one Ship, who were accustomed to Observations, and who for the most part of them had been more then once at the East and West Indies, observing the latitude, found it to be by their several observations:

48d7′
488
4820
4834
4838
4858

of which himself thinks that of 48d 38′ to be the truest, as relying most upon the ability of the Observer.

Whereto we may adde, that the Refraction of the Sun, especially in Winter, makes his Altitude or Height seem greater then it is, which is caused by the gross va­pours and thickness of the Air near the Horizon, this we may allude to after this manner: Set down an empty Bason on a Stool, laying a shilling at the bottom thereof, and go so much backwards, till you bring the edge of the Bason and the shilling in a right line with your Eye, and then let another fill the Bason with fair water, and you may go a pretty way further backward, and still see the shilling and the edge of the Bason in a right line, the refraction of the water being the cause thereof; and from this Reason we conclude, That the Sun seems to appear above the Horizon when he is really set.

This is confirmed also by many Experiments, we may recite one: A certain Dutch Ship being upon the Discovery of a North­east passage to the East-India, was constrained to winter in the Island of Nova Zembla, where after the Sun had been for divers moneths under the Horizon, the Mariners beheld the whole body of the Sun iust above the Horizon 14 days sooner then according to his Declination he should appeare, and by Computation was then at least 5 degrees under the Horizon; Also at other times, especially in winter, he appears to be higher then he is, for which there are Tables of Allowance, as also for the Parralax and height of the eye in Mr. Wrights Correction of Errors in Navigation, wherefore those that come from the South-wards, expecting to fall in with the Lands-end, or Lizard, are to be admonished that in trusting to the Observed Latitude, they do not estimate themselves more to the Southwards then really they are, and so incur danger through presumption; but this erro [...] is somewhat abated by the [Page 5] height of the eye above the water, observing the Sun with Davis his Quadrant backward in a Horizon more northwardly then the true one: Notwithstanding the imperfections and uncertainties that arise in the practick part, yet it should be our endeavour to render this excellent Art as easie and certain as we can, which is the thing I aim at, and the Instrument here used being the Plaine Scale, is, as I said before, in every mans power, if he have Com­passes.

CHAP. II. Shewing the Use of the Plain Chart, and of a Traverse-Quadrant, for the more ready keeping of a reckoning.

Proposition I. The first Proposition is, how by having the Longi­tudes and Latitudes of two places, to lay them down on a blank or Plain Chart, in their Longitudes and Latitudes, and thereby to finde their Rumbe and Distance.

BY a Plain Chart, is meant a Chart drawn on Paper or Paste­board, lined with Meridians and Parallels, making right An­gles each with other, and numbred with degrees both of Lati­tude and Longitude, each equal to other, and what is commonly performed in casting up a Traverse on such a Chart, we shall per­form on a Blank of Paper.

By the Course, in a familiar sense, is meant that point of the Compass or Coast of the Horizon on which the Ship is to be steer­ed from place to place.

And the Rumbe is in effect the same thing with the Course, and is defined to be a Line, described by the Ships motion on the sur­face of the Sea, steered by the Compass, making the same Angles with every Meridian, the properties of which Line shall after­wards be handled; and whereas every Rumbe maketh with the Meridian both an acute and obtuse Angle, by the Angle of the Rumbe is meant the acute Angle.

Henricus Sutton fecit 1659.

We have here added in a Print of the Compass and its Winds, each Quadrant being divided into ninety degrees, and so may serve in stead of another Line of Chords, and those that are de­sirous may have these Prints upon loose Papers, and paste them on upon a Board, and so a quarter of it may serve for a Tra­verse-Quadrant, or in pricking down of Courses the common way, in stead of pricking down every Course from the Meridian, [Page 7] they may hereby prick off every following Course from the for­mer Course last sayled upon, without any respect to the Meridian at all.

Now to the Proposition:

Let it be required to finde the Course and distance between the Isle of Tenariff and St. Nicholas Isle, being one of the Hesperides, the Longitudes and Latitudes of these places I shall take from the late general Dutch Map, in two Hemispheres on the Stereogra­phick Projection, being the best and largest general Map that ever was, in which the first Meridian or beginning of Longitude, takes its rise from the Isle of Tenariff, which having in it the highest moun­tain in the world, and lying in the Western Ocean, seems to be a very remarkable place for this purpose, and it were to be wished that the Longitudes and Latitudes of places in the Seamans Ka­lendar which were taken from the Globes of our Country man Jodocus Hondius, were corrected according to the said Map, or rather by those Tables by which it was made.

  • Tenariff. Latitude 28d—Longitude 00.
  • Isle St. Nicholas—17—352d.
  • Difference —11—8d.

Having made the following Scheme like a Square, the Sides L T and T D being at right angles, let T represent Tenariff, prick the difference of Latitude, which is 11d out the greater Scale of equal part [...], which is graduated on the Sides of this Scheme from T to L, and the difference of Longitude, which is 8d from T to D, and with that extent upon L, describe a prickt Ark near N, and with the extent T L upon D, describe ano [...]her prickt Ark, crossing the former: where these Arks cross as at N, is the place of St. Ni­cholas Island, draw the line T N, and the Angle L T N shewes the Course from the Meridian, to measure it, with 60d of the Chords draw the arch R S, which measured on the Scale of prickt Rumbes, annexed to the greater Chord, shews that St. Nicholas Isle bears from Tenariff 3 points and a little more then a quarter to the Westward of the South, that is, South West and by South, a quarter Westwardly, and this prickt Ark need not be drawn, all that is required is the distance between the points R, S, which may be found without drawing any such Arch at all, for the nearest di­stance

[Page 8]

[Page 9] from R to S T measured on the greater Sines, sheweth it to be 36d 2′ from the Meridian, which in like manner may be found from the West when the Rumbe falleth more that way; and in stead of drawing the line N T, you may do the work by laying the slope edge of a Ruler over those points, on which Ruler, if the Scale of Leagues be graduated, you may measure the distance by view without Compasses.

Lastly, the extent T N measured on the same equal parts, sheweth the distance to be 13d 59 Centesms, and when this di­stance is too large to be measured on the Scale, you may take ten degrees, and turn it over as many times as you can, and after­wards measure the remaining part of the distance by it self.

Of the quantity of a degree.

Here it is to be noted, that we have found the distance in de­grees, and Centesimals or hundredth parts of a degree, which be­ing a general common measure to all the world, may afterwards be reduced into the Leagues or Miles of any Countrey whatso­ever. Now before we reduce this to our English measure, I will first shew what is the usual custom of expressing the Course and Distance on a Ships Log-board at Sea, and then how in effect the same custom may be still retained or altered, and yet either way agree with the Truth.

TimeCourseKnotsHalf knots
Hours2   
 4   
 6   
 8   
 10   
 12   
 2   
 4   
 6   
 8   
 10   
 12   

The first Column is for Time.

The second for the Ships Course.

The third for the Knots.

The fourth for the Half-knots.

Our English or Italian Mile by which we reckon at Sea, contains 1000 paces, and each pace five foot, and every foot 12 inches. The 120th part of that Mile is 41⅔ feet, and so much is the space betweene the Knots upon the Log-line: So many Knots as the Ship runs in half a minute, so many Miles she sayleth in an hour; or so many Leagues, and so many Miles she runneth in a Watch or [Page 10] four hours, called A Watch, because one half of the Ships Com­pany watcheth by turns, and changes every four hours.

Example

Six Knots in half a minute is six Miles in an hour, or six Leagues six Miles in a Watch, which is eight Leagues or twenty four Miles in all.

Every Noon the Master and his Mates take the reckoning off the Log-board, and double the Knots run, and then divide the Pro­duct, which is the number of Miles run by three, the quotient is the Leagues run since the former Noon, and according to custom the Log is thrown every two hours, and I never knew the course nea­rer expressed on the Log-board, then to half a point of the Com­pass.

But Mr. Norwood in his excellent Book, called, The Sea-mans Practise, sheweth, That according to a late exact Experiment of his, which seemes to be very satisfactory, and confirmed by many other Experiments, that in ordinary Practise at Sea we cannot, if we will yield Truth the conquest, allow less then 360000 of our English feet to vary one degree of Latitude upon the earth, in sayling North or South under any Meridian, according to which account there will be in a degree of our Statute measure 68 2/1 [...] Miles, each Mile containing 5280 feet, and of the common Sea-measure, allowing 5000 feet to a Mile, there will be 72 Miles, or 24 Leagues in a degree, which we shall take to be the truth.

A reckoning being kept in degrees, and Centesms or hundredth parts of a degree, is a ready way, and well approved by Mr. Nor­wood in his said Sea-mans Practise; as also by Mr. Phillips in his Geometrical Seaman, who wholly useth this measure, and yet the Mariner may very well refrain this measure, if he will keep his reckoning in Leagues and tenths, as I shall afterwards shew. Now to shew this measure, the Logline must have a knot placed at every 30 foot length, and as many of those as run out in half a Minute, so many Centesms or hundredth parts of a degree the ship sayleth in an hour, and for every three foot more you are to allow the tenth part of a Centesm, or the one thousandth part of a degree.

But if you would have it to shew the Miles of a true degree, allowing but 60 to a degree, the mile must be enlarged propor­tionally, and the distance between every one of the Knots must [Page 11] be 50 foot and as many of those as run out in half Minute, so many Miles or Minutes the ship saileth in an hour, and for every foot more you must allow the tenth part of a mile more and if Sea-men be desirous to retain their former custom of reckon­ing the ships way in Leagues, then must either the said reckoning be reduced into degrees and Centesms of degrees by Arithmetick, because the degrees of Latitude on the Plain Chart, and of Longi­tude and Latitude on Mercators Chart are divided, and that most conveniently into 10 parts, and each part supposed to be divided into 10 more, or else such a Scale of equal parts over and above must be added to each Chart, wherein a degree of Latitude in the Plain Chart, and of Longitude in Mercators Chart, must be divided into 20 equal parts, and the labor of reducing by the Pen, will be saved; or the adding of any such Scale, may very well be spared and otherwise supplied, as I shall afterwards shew.

Of Reduction by the Pen.

1. Miles and their Decimals parts, are reduced into Leagues and tenths of Leagues, by dividing by three: Here note, that the tenth part of any measure is expressed either with a Comma or point before it, or else with a separating line thus, 3 or ⌊3 either way, the figure 3 signifies three parts of any thing divided into ten, and ⌊35 signifies thirty five parts of any thing divided into one hundred, and generally in this Decimal Arithmetick, the Denomi­nator is understood to be an unit, with as many cyphers following it, as there are units in the Numerator; thus ⌊003 signifies three parts of one thousand.

Example:

375 ⌊6 Miles divided by 3, makes 125 ⌊2 Leagues, and on the contrary, 135 ⌊2 Leagues multiplyed by 3, makes 375 ⌊6 Miles.

2. Leagues and their Decimals parts, are reduced into degrees and Centesmes, by separating one figure from the whole Leagues towards the left hand, and dividing the whole by 2.

Example.

271 ⌊8 Leagues separated, will stand thus, 27 ⌊18 and then divi­ded by two, the quotient is 13 ⌊59, that is 13 degrees and 59 Cen­tesms, or hundredth parts of a degree more.

On the contrary degrees and centesms are deduced into Leagues, [Page 12] and their Decimal parts, by placing the Comma after the first Decimal part, toward the right hand, and then multiplying the whole by two: thus the former number of degrees are to be expres­sed 135, 9 which multiplyed by two, makes 271 ⌊8 leagues, as be­fore.

3. Minutes, whereof there are 60 in a degree, are reduced into Centesimals by annexing a Cipher thereto, and dividing by 6: thus 27 Minutes with a Cipher, make 270, which divided by 6, gives in the quotient 45 Centesms, here after 27 was divided by 6, the quotient was 4, and 3 remaining with the Cipher is 30, which divided by 6, the quotient is 5.

On the contrary, the Centesmes of a degree are reduced into Minutes, by multiplying them by 6, and cutting off the last figure: thus, 75 Centesmes multiplyed by 6, make 450, which is 45 minutes.

This trouble, as I said before, is taken away by fitted Scales by the View onely, if they stand back to back, as in the Scales of equal parts on the Plain Scale, where 75 Centesmes in the lesser Scale of equal parts, stands against 45 parts or Minutes in the greater Scale of equal parts, and thus when the Latitudes of two places are given in degrees and minutes, the minutes are to be turned or reduced into Centesmes.

And so in the example of the former Chart, the line A B con­taining 10 degrees, is divided into 20 parts, and one of those parts into 10 others, which I call, The Scale of Leagues of a true degree, then because the whole distance T N is too long to be measured at once, I first measure 10 degrees or 200 Leagues from T to C, and then C N measured on the Leagues, is 71 leagues and eight tenths more, and on the centesimal degrees, is 3 degrees 59 Centesmes.

So that the whole distance is 271 Leagues eight tenths, or 13 degrees 59 Centesmes, which is thus expressed 13d, 59: or thus, 13d ⌊59: or thus, 13d 59/100: and when we speak of minutes which are marked thus 1′, we alwayes presume there are but 60 of them in a degree.

Of the Traverse-Quadrant.

Before we come to work any Traverse, it will be very ready and convenient to prepare a Traverse-Quadrant, which as you see [Page 13] by the Scheme of it is no other then a common Quadrant, having its Limbe divided into 16 equal parts, for the points and half points of the Compass, which may be easily done by the prickt rum­bes on the Scale, each whole point being numbred from the Meri­dian with Capital or letter figures.

[figure]

In casting up a Traverse by this Quadrant, we shall imita [...] Mr. Norwood in his Sea-mans Practise, who after the same man­ner plots the Surveigh of any Field, which he doth by help of Ta­bles of Variation and Separation, but is here performed without them.

Then we will suppose that the Ship looseth from Tenariff, and sayleth 60 Leagues South South-West, afterwards she sayleth 80 Leagues West South-West, then meeting with a contrary winde she sayls 53 Leagues South and by East, half a point Eastwardly.

Suppose the Course and Distance from the Ship to St. Nicholas Island were now required; as also that it were demanded what Course the Ship should steer, and distance she should run to bring her self about 23 Leagues East from St. Nicholas Island, we shall plot the whole Traverse, and resolve the Questions demanded without drawing any Lines on the Plat.

[figure]

[Page 15]1. The first Course is 60 Leagues, South South West, which is the second point from the Meridian, take 60 out of the Scale of Leagues, and place it in the Traverse-quadrant from C the Center to a, the nearest distance from a to C W, place in the Chart, on the line T L from T to 1; also the nearest distance from a to C S in the Quadrant, place in the Court on the Line T D from T to 1.

2. The second Course was 80 Leagues, West Southwest, which is the sixth point from the Meridian, take 80 out of the Scale of Leagues, and place it in the Traverse-quadrant from C the Center to b, on the sixth Point, the nearest distance from b to C W place in the Chart on the line T L, from 1 to 2, and the nearest distance from b to C S in the Quadrant, place in the Chart on the line T D from 1 to 2, and thus the difference of Latitude or Variation, and the Departure from the Meridian or Separation, are added together, when they are of the same kind, that is, do still augment.

3. The third Course is South and by East, half a point East­wardly 53 Leagues, which is a point and a half from the Meridian, which enter in the Traverse-quadrant on the said Course from C to c, the nearest distance from c to C W, because the difference of Latitude doth still increase; place in the Chart on the line T L from 2 to 3 towards L (otherwise if it had decreased, it must have been prickt backwards towards T) and the nearest distance from c to C S in the Quadrant, place in the Chart on the line D T from 2 to 3 towards T, because the Departure from the Me­ridian decreaseth (otherwise if it had still increased, it should have been pricked from 2 towards D) having proceeded thus far, the point where the ship is in the Chart may be found to any one, or every one of the several Courses, without drawing any Lines in the Chart.

1. Out of the West line T D take T 1, and with it upon the point 1 in the South line T L, describe a little Ark at a, also out of the South line take T 1, and with it on the West Line at 1 de­scribe an Ark at a crossing the former, so the cross at the point a, shewes the place where the ship is at the first Course.

2. Again, take T 2 out of the West line, and setting one foot of the Compasses upon 2 in the South line, describe a small piece of an Ark near b; also take T 2 out of the South line, and set­ting [Page 16] one foot at 2 in the West line, describe an Ark crossing the former at b, which point is the place where the Ship was at the end of the second Course.

3. Take T 3 out of the South Line, and setting one foot of the Compasses on 3, in the West Line describe a small Ark near c: Again, take T 3 out of the West Line, and upon 3 in the South Line, draw an Ark crossing the former at c, and c is the Point where the Ship is, according to this dead reckoning, and the for­mer Point a and b need not have been found, for there is no question proposed concerning them.

To finde the Course and Distance from c to N.

1. For the Distance, the extent c N measured on the Scale of Leagues, sheweth it to be 114 Leagues and a half.

2. For the Course, to find it without drawing lines on the Chart, lay a ruler over N and c, which we must suppose to cross som [...] Meridian or parallel in the Chart, here it crosseth the South line at e, and the Scale of Leagues at f, then place the Radius or 90d of the line of greater Sines (which before was pricked from T to R) from e to g, and the nearest distance from g to the edge of the ruler measured on the Sines, sheweth the Course from the Ship to St. Nicholas Island, to lye 43d 17′ to the Westward of the South then if you look for 43d 17′ in the greater Chord, you shall finde in the Rumbes against it, that this Course is 3 points and above 3 quarters more to the Westward of the Meridian, that is, almost Southwest, and if e g had been placed from f toward A, the nearest distance to the edge of the ruler, would have shewed the complement of the Course required.

3. To finde what Course the Ship must steer to bring her self about 23 Leagues or 22 Leagues 8 tenths East from St. Nicholas Island, draw a Line from N to L, and prick down 22 ⌊8 out of the Scale of Leagues from N to d, and this may be performed by the edge of a ruler without drawing any such Line, or otherwise it may be found by the intersection or crossing of two Arks, as the former Traverse Points were found. Now laying a ruler over d and c, it crosseth the South Line at h, then place T R from h to k, and the nearest distance from k to the edge of the ruler, measured on the greater Sines, sheweth the Course to be 33d 45′ to the Westward of the South, that is three points, to wit, South-west and by South.

[Page 17]4. The extent c d measured on the Scale of Leagues, sheweth the distance to be 100 Leagues.

Lastly, we suppose the Ship to sail this Course and distance till she come into the parrallel or Latitude of St. Nicholas Island at d, and then she sailes almost 23 Leagues West, and arrives at the Island, being her desired Port.

If it were required to finde the Ships Course and distance from the Point c to Tenariff.

Lay a ruler over the Points T and c, the nearest distance from R to the edge of the ruler, measured on the greater line of Sines, sheweth that the Course from Tenariff to the Ship is 30d 47′ to the Westward of the South, which is almost two points three quar­ters; and contrarily Tenariff bears from the Ship as much to the Eastward of the North, and the extent c T measured on the Leagues, sheweth the distance of Tenariff from the Ship to be 158 Leagues.

This I think sufficient to explain the use of the Plain Chart, upon which in the laying down of any two places in their Rumbe and distance, there is framed a right angled Plain Triangle, one side whereof T L is the difference of Latitude, the other side L N the difference of Longitude, and the third side N T the distance, And after the same manner a Traverse is to be platted, when the Chart is made true as to the Latitudes of places, and as neare the truth as to the Rumbe and distance as it can, waving the longitude; and as the whole Navigation of a Voyage is performed on this Chart without drawing any lines thereon to deface it, so after the same manner, and well nigh with as much ease, may it be perform­ed on the true Sea Chart, commonly called Mercators, as shall afterwards be shewed.

But before I part from this Discourse, I think it necessary to shew how the former Scale of Leagues may very well be spared, and still account the distance run in Leagues and tenths, provided the degrees of Latitude on the Sides of the Chart be divided each of them into 10 equal parts, accounting each degree for 10 Leagues. Take 40 Leagues, and setting one foot in 80 leagues, draw the Ark G, which may be done by any other numbe [...]s in the same Proportion, and draw a line from H [...]ust touching the said Ark, and the Scale of leagues A B may be spared.

Suppose I would take out 60 leagues, take the nearest distance from six in the latitude side of the Chart, to the line H G, and it is the measure of 60 leagues, and so much is the distance at her first Traverse from T to a.

But supposing the distance T a in the Chart were unknown, and I would measure it, take the said extent, and prick it twice in the side of the Chart from H, and it will reach to 60, and so many leagues is the distance required; and so any other extent turned twice over, shewes the distance in leagues, accounting every de­grees 10 leagues, and being turned but once over, shewes the distance in degrees and Decimal parts.

How in estimating the Ships Course and Distance, to allow for known Currents.

This subject is handled by Mr. Norwood in his Sea-mans Pra­ctice, at the end, and by Mr. Phillips in his Advancement of Navi­gation, page 54 to 64. As also how to how find them out by com­paring the reckoning outwards between two places, with that homewards, wherefore I shall be very brief about it, and perform that with Scale and Compasses, which is by them done with Tables.

1. If you stem a Current, if it be swifter then the Ships way, you fall a stern; but if it be slower, you get on head so much as is the difference between the way of the Ship, and the race of the Current.

Example: If a Ship sail 7 Miles North in an hour, by estimation against a Current that sets South 4 Miles in an hour, then the ship makes way three Miles or a League in an hour on head, but if the Ships way were 4 Miles in an hour by estimation North against a Current that sets 7 Miles in an hour South, the Ship would fall 3 Miles or a league a stern in an hour.

But suppose a Ship to cross a Current that sets S S E about 3 miles an hour, and first the Ship in 4 hours sayls 8 leagues East and by South by the Compass, then in 8 hours more she sayls 12 leagues East South-east, by the Compass: Now it is demanded what Course and Distance the Ship hath made good from the first place where this recknoning began: In resolving this we shall ac­count every ten leagues of the former Scale of leagues in the Plat to be but one.

[figure]

Draw two lines at right Angles at the Center A, thus: First draw the line A F, then with 60 degrees of the Chords describe the prickt quadrant F I L, and therein set off one point from the East to I, and draw a line to A, this is the line of the Ships first Course, wherein prick off 8 leagues from A to B. Prick off the course of the Current, being 6 points to the Southwards of the East, from F to E, and draw the line L A, then because the Cur­rent in 4 hours sets 4 leagues forward in its own race, draw the line B C parallel to A L, by the former directions, and prick down 4 four leagues from B to C, and the line A C shews what course and distance the Ship hath made good the first Watch, or four hours.

Then for the second Course, draw C H parallel to the line A F, and with the Radius upon C as a Center, draw the Arch H D, wherein prick two points for the Ships second Course from the East from H to D, and draw D C, wherein prick down C D the Ships distance run in that Course, and draw D G parallel to A L, as you did B C; then because the Current sets 8 leagues in 8 hours, prick down 8 leagues from D to G, and joyn A G, so the extent A G being measured on the Scale of leagues, sheweth that the Ships direct distance from the first place, is about twenty eight leagues and a half; then measure the Arch F M on the Rumbes, and you will finde it to be a little above 3¼ points from the East, so that the Ship hath made her way good South-east and by East, and above a quarter of a point more Southwardly, and is now at the point G, whereas if there had been no Current, she had been but at N in the same line with D G, and distant from it equal to B C.

And what we have done here with drawing many Lines, after the old fashion of keeping a reckoning on the Plain Chart, may be done by help of the Traverse-quadrant by Intersection and points onely, without drawing any other Lines at all, but the two Lines making right angles at A, in which are plotted the Ships two Courses and distances; as also the Currents, Course, and distances proper to each of the Ships Courses, and the Variation and Se­paration proper to each Course, hath the figures 1, 2, 3, 4, on the South and East-line truly set down, whereby may be found the 4 points B, C, D, G, after the same manner, as the reckoning was [Page 21] platted between Tenariff and St. Nicholas Island before, and in stead of laying down the Current at the end of each Course and distance, it may be done at once for many courses and distances, if you bring them first into one right line from the first place, and cast up into one Sum how much ought to be allowed to each Course and distance during the time of its continuance, and from the Traverse Point of the Ships place so found, set off the allow­ance for the Current in a Rumbe line that runs the same way with the Current.

How to Rectifie the Account when the dead Latitude differs from the Observed Latitude.

By the Dead Latitude, is meant the Latitude in which the Ship is by the Dead Reckoning or Estimation, and this is always given, as in the former Chart between Tenariff and St. Nicholas Island, by the points 1, 2, 3, in the South-line, if they be measured in the other side of the Chart amongst the degrees of Latitude.

The whole Practise of the art of Navigation in keeping a due reckoning, consists chiefly of three Members or Branches.

1. An experienced judgement in estimating the Ships way in her Course upon every shift of Wind, allowing for Leeward-way and Currents.

2. In duly estimating the Course or Point of the Compass on which the Ship hath made her way good, allowing for Currents and the Variation of the Compass.

3. In the frequent and due Observing the Latitude.

The reckoning arising out of the two former Branches, is called the Dead Reckoning, and of these three Branches there ought to be such an harmony and consent, that any two being given, a third Conclusion may be thence raised with truth.

As namely, from the Course and distance, to find the Latitude of the Ships place.

Or by the Course and difference of Latitude, to finde the di­stance; or by the difference of Latitude and distance, to finde the Course: But in the midst of so many uncertainties that daily occur in the practise of Navigation, a joynt Consent in these three par­ticulars is hardly to be expected, and when an error ariseth, the sole remedy to be trusted to, is the observation of the Latitude, or [Page 22] the known Soundings when a Ship is near land, and how to rectifie the Reckoning by the observed latitude, we shall now shew.

Those that will not yeild unto truth in this particular, that a bout 24 of our common English Sea leagues are to be allowed to vary a degree of latitude under the Meridian, do put themselves into a double incapacity.

First, in sailing directly North or South under the Meridian where there is no Current, finding their Reckoning to fall short of the observed latitude, they take it to be an error in their judge­ment in concluding the Ships way by Estimation or guess to be too little.

And secondly, if there be a Current that helps set them forward, that there is a near agreement between the observed and the dead latitude, they conclude there is no such Current.

Or lastly, if they stem the Current, they conclude it to be much swifter then in truth it is, and thus one error commonly begets another, but supposing a conformity to the truth, we shall prescribe four Precepts for correcting a simple or single Course.

Prec. I. First therfore, if a ship sail under the Meridian, if the dif­ference of latitude be less by estimation then it is by observation, the Ships place or Variation onely is to be corrected and enlarged under the Meridian, and the error i [...] to be imputed either to the judgement in guessing at the distance run, in making it too little, or if the said distance be guessed at by a sound and experienced judgement, you may suppose you stem some Current.

So if a Ship saile from A in the latitude of 28d directly South 48, such leagues whereof 20 are a degree, the difference of lati­tude is 2 degrees 24 minutes, each league being 3 minutes, by this estimate the Ship should be at B, but if the observed latitude be but 25 degrees, the reckoning being amended, the Ships place is at the point D, and in this Scheme we have made every degree of latitude to be twice as large as it was in the former Chart, and so the degrees of latitude in that Chart will become a Scale of leagues to this.

But if the difference of latitude be more by Estimation, then it is by observation, either the judgement erres in supposing the distance run to be too much: in this case the distance is to be shortned, and the Ships place corrected, according to the observed [Page 23] latitude under the Meridian; so if a ship sayle South from A in the Latitude of 28d, till she hath varied her latitude 2d 24′ by Estimation, being at the Point B in the latitude of 25d 36′, if the observed latitude be 26d, the Ships place being corrected by this Observation, will be in the Point E, and not at B.

Or if you can presume upon the truth of your judgement, and finde it so to happen, commonly that the distance run is more then you can make it by observation, you may well suppose you cross some Current which sets either Eastward or Westward, but can­not tell which until you come near some Land, to see which way the ripples of Water set, or are informed by the experience of others.

In this Case, supposing the distance and difference of Latitude to be true, you are to conclude the Ship hath made her way good not North or South under the Meridian, but upon some other point of the Compass, either Eastward or Westward: let us sup­pose Westward, the Rumbe it self need not be drawn in the Chart, wherefore in the Chart or Traverse-quadrant, having

[figure]

[Page 24] made A E equal to the observed difference of latitude, with the distance equal to A B, set one foot of the Compasses in E, and with the other cross A W at S, so is A S the Depa [...]ture from the Meridian or Separation required, whereby you may draw the Rumbe line required A C, by finding the Intersections at C; or upon B, with the extent A S, describe an Ark, and draw the line A C [...]ust touching the outward edge therreof, and it shall be the Rumbe required; which being measured by former directions, will be found to be the third point from the Meridian, so that the ships course was South-west and by South, and not South as it seemed to the appearance: In altering the Rumbe, in this case be cau­tious, for a small mistake in the estimating of the distance, will cause a considerable alteration in the Rumbe.

Precept II. But supposing no Current, if the ship sayl upon one of the five Rumbes next the Meridian, if the Dead Latitude dif­fer from the Observed Latitude, the error is in mis-judging the di­stance run, which is either to be enlarged or shortned, as the case requires.

In the former Scheme, suppose a ship sayl from A South-west and by South 48 leagues, being by estimation at C in the latitude of 26d, but if the latitude by observation be but 25d 36′, suppose at B, then a line drawn through B, parallel to A W, crosseth the line of the ships course at M, which is the corrected Point where the ship is, and hereby the Distance is enlarged, the extent A M being 57, 7 leagues, that is 57 leagues, and a little above two mile more.

In like manner if the Ship had sayled about 72 leagues on that course, and were by estimation at the Point G in the latitude of 25d, and by the observation the latitude were found to be 25d 36′, in this case the ships distance is to be shortned, by drawing the aforesaid line B M parallel to A W, which crosseth the line of the ships course at M, which is now the corrected Point of the ships place.

Either of these Instances may be performed on the Chart, by finding out the separation or westwardly distance proper to the corrected latitude without drawing any lines, and that by help of the Traverse-Quadrant, page 13. in which C B there, is made equal to A B the difference of latitude here, then in the said [Page 25] Quadrant either raise a Perpendicular from that point, cutting the third Rumbe, or enter the said extent on the third Rumbe, so that one foot resting therein, as at D, the other turned about will but just touch C W, then the nearest distance from D to C S, is the separation required, which in this Chart is to be placed from A to L, being [...]he separation corrected, whereas the dead separa­tion need not be known or found at all.

But in these cases, if the judgement suppose there is some Cur­rent, and can depend upon the observed difference of Latitude and dead Distance, as both true, then the Departure from the Meridian may be found, as in the last caution of the former Pre­cept, whereby the error will be imputed to the Rumbe, which al­ters by reason of the supposed Current.

Precept III. But in Rumbes near the East or West, if the dead latitude differ from the observed latitude, the error is to be im­puted either wholly to the Rumbe, or partly to the Rumbe, partly to the Distance.

If wholly to the Rumbe, then retain the observed difference of latitude, and the estimated distance, and finde the Separation or Departure from the Meridian, as was done in the last Caution of the first Case or Precept.

But if the judgement would allot the error partly to the Rum­be, partly to the Distance, retain the observed difference of lati­tude; and for the Departure from the Meridian, let it be the same as it was made by the Dead Reckoning.

Example:

So if a ship sayl West and by South half a point Southerly 68, 9 leagues, that is 68 leagues and nine tenths, from the latitude of 28d from A to H, and by the Dead Reckoning should be in the latitude of 27d; if the latitude by observation be 27d 20′, which will happen at the point I: In this case, if the error were wholly imputed to the distance, the line I K being drawn parallel to A W, would cut off and shorten the distance as much as the mea­sure of K H, which is 23 leagues, which because it seems absurd and improbable, is not to be admitted of; wherefore imputing the error to the Rumbe onely, place one foot of the extent A H in I, and with the other cross the line A W at T, and so is A T [Page 26] the Departure from the Meridian required, whereby the Rumbe line, if it were drawn, would be altered to pass through the cross at a.

But according to the last Caution of this Precept, if you judge the error to be partly in the Rumbe, and partly in the Distance, prick the Departure by the Dead Reckoning F H, from A to V, and so by help of the points of Variation I, and Separation V, you may draw a new Rumbe line, and finde the quantity thereof; as also of the shortned distance by the direction for platting a Traverse.

Precept IV. If a Ship sayl directly East or West, and the dead and observed Latitude do both agree, the Reckoning cannot be corrected.

But if they differ, the error is either partly in the Rumbe, and partly in the Distance, in which case retaining the Separation or Westwardly Distance the same, the difference of Latitude is the Variation required, whereby a new Rumbe-line might be drawn if it were needful.

But if by frequent observation you finde the Ship is still carried from the East or West, either Northwards or Southwards, you may conclude some Current to be the cause thereof, in which case re­taining the distance to be the same it was by the Dead Reckoning, and the difference of Latitude to be the same you found it by ob­servation, finde the Departure from the Meridian by former di­rections, whereby the Ships Rumbe or Course might be drawn if it were needful: It is not necessary to press Examples, if what before is written be well understood, especially in this case where all directions are slippery.

Thus in imitation of Maetius a Hollander, though a Latine Au­thor, we have prescribed several rules for the correction of a single Course, which Mr. Phillips in his Geometrical Sea-man makes but one rule, retaining always the same Course, and correcting the di­stance run therein, by drawing a parallel through the observed La­titude, and so for many Courses they are first brought all into one line, and the distance corrected by the same rule.

But concerning it, we must give a double Caution: First, that no three places can be laid down true in their Courses and Di­stances from each other on the Plain Chart, as shall afterwards be [Page 27] handled, however the error in small distances will be incon­siderable.

And secondly admitting they could, the said general Direction is unsound, but the nearer the truth the nearer the Courses are to the Meridian, and when all the Courses do either increase or diminish the Latitude, but very erronious when some Courses in­crease and others lessen the Latitude; in all which Cases it is most safe to allot to the Variation or dead Difference of Latitude, of every Course its proportional share of the whole error between the Dead and Observed Latitude, and then to correct each course by the former directions.

First therefore in the following Chart, let us suppose a Ship to sayl from A in the Latitude of 28d South South-west, almost 65 leagues to B, this Course is set off in the Arch E F, and by the Dead Reckoning she should now be in the Latitude of 25d.

Again, from B she sayls South-west and by West 72 leagues to C, which Course being three points from the West, is set off in the Arch G H, and now by the dead Reckoning she should be in the Latitude of 23 degrees, whereas by a good observation she is found to be in the Latitude of 23d 30′; wherefore to correct this Reckoning draw the line C A, which is the compound Course arising from the two former Courses, and through the parallel of observed Latitude, draw L K parallel to A W, so is the point K the corrected point of the Ships place, according to Mr. Phil­lips, and agreeing with the truth, as we have fitted the Ex­ample.

But now as to the other way of correcting a compound Course, it is to be done by this Proportion.

First finde the Variation or Difference of Latitude proper to each Course, then it holds:

As the sum of all the Variations or Differences of Latitude:

Is to the whole error between the Dead and Observed Latitude

So is each particular Difference of Latitude:

To its proportional share of the whole error

In this case A S is the sum of all the Differences of Latitude, and S L is the whole error between the dead and observed Lati­tude, therewith upon S as a Center, describe an Ark at M, and draw the line A M just touching the outward edge of the said

[Page 28]

Ark, then the nearest distance between E and the said line, is the error in the dead latitude at the first Course.

Then if the differences of Latitude fall all the same way, if the the estimated difference of Latitude be too much, you must abate out of each dead Latitude its proportional error, so in this case the said error is prickt from E to N.

But when the estimated difference of Latitude is too little, the proportional error must be added to each difference of Latitude, then prick the second dead difference of Latitude being equal to E S, from N to O, and place the said extent from A the Center, [Page 29] to Y, and take the nearest distance to M A as before, and prick it from O to L, being the second error: this is needful when there are more Courses then two, but for the last Course not at all necessary, neither is it for this; then through the point N draw the line N F parallel to A W, so is F the corrected Point of the Ships place at the first Course, then draw F K parallel to B C, and where the parallel of Latitude cuts it as at K, is the corrected Point of the Ships place at the second Course, being the same we found it before the other way.

But in stead of the second Course and distance, which was 72 Leagues South-west and by west, let us now suppose the Ship sayls the same distance from the point B North-west and by west, which Course being as much on the other side the west, make G I equal to G H, and draw the Course B I, therein pricking off the for­mer distance to D, so is D the point of the Ships dead reckoning in the Latitude of 27d; and now supposing the observed Latitude to be 27d 30′, the error and difference of Latitude are as much now as they were before; wherefore draw D A the compound rumbe: draw Q T parallel to A W, & where it cuts the compound rumbe as at P, by M [...]. Phillips his reckoning, is the corrected point of the Ships place at the end of the second Course, whereas in truth it should happen at T, and so P bears from A, in this exam­ple 76d 43′ from the Meridian, and is distant from it 43 Leagues and a half, whereas the Ships true Course from A to T, is 83d 32′ from the Meridian, and the distance almost 89 leagues, which is very considerable.

Now for as much as the Sum of the differences of Latitude A E and E f, in this latter example, is equal to A S in the former ex­ample, also the error f Q here, is equal to S L there, therefore the proportional part of each error will be the same as before.

Then if some Courses decrease the Latitude Southwardly, and others increase it North-wardly, if the dead Latitude be too little, as in this example, consider that to place the Ship more North-wardly, so as to allot to each difference of Latitude its proper error, that the South-wardly differences of Latitude must be de­creased or lessened, and the North-wardly increased; wherefore the proportion of the error is placed from E to N, and the Point F found as before.

In like manner, if the dead Latitude were too much to bring the Ship more South-wardly, the Southern differences of Latitude must be increased, and the Northern decreased, now the point T is found by drawing a line from F the corrected point of the first Course, parallel to B D, and so the line F V being equal to B D, is the Ships second Course and distance from the corrected point F, then in regard part of the error in the Latitude is supposed to be committed, as well in the latter as in the former Course, which error being too little, the distance F V is to be enlarged, and where the parallel of observed Latitude cuts it, as at T, is the cor­rected point of the Ships place at the end of the second Course.

And though what we have here performed be done by the draw­ing of many Lines, yet by help of the Traverse-quadrant it may may be inserted into the Chart, without drawing any Lines therein at all, for in each the Course and corrected Difference of Lati­tude is given; and that two things are sufficient to dispatch the work, we have shewed before.

Those that are prompt in Plain Triangles, may exercise their knowledge in calculating the things here required

1. In the Triangle A B E, there is given the Angle at A, and the Side A B, whence finde the Side B E.

2. In the Triangle B D X, there is the like given, to wit, the Angle at B, and the Side B D, whence finde the Side X D.

3. In the Triangle A f D, the Side f D is equal to E B more X D, and the Side A f is given, whence finde the Angle f A D the Rumbe required.

4. In the Triangle Q A P, the Angle will be the same, and the Side Q A is given, whence may be found the Side A P the distance required.

Again:

In the Triangle A N F, finde N F, afterwards in the Triangle F R T there is given F R, and the Angle R F T, whence finde the Side R T; then in the Triangle A Q T, we have the Sides A Q and Q T given, whereby may be found the Angle Q A T the Rumbe desired, and the Side A T the distance sought, the Side Q T being equal to N F more R T.

How to correct the Dead Reckoning, when the Account is kept upon Mercators Chart.

How to keep a reckoning on this Chart, shall afterwards be shewed, and there in stead of the

  • Easterly
  • Westerly

distance, Separation or Departure from the Meridian, we must finde the difference of Longitude, which is not the same with the Departure from the Meridian, but differs as much from it, as any parallel of Latitude doth from the Equinoctial; so in 60d of Latitude 30 true Miles or minutes Departure from the Meridian, alters 60 minutes, or a whole degree difference in Longitude.

In finding out the difference of Longitude, we shall alwayes have the corrcted difference of Latitude, and the Rumbe, either absolutely or consequently given, and how the difference of Lati­tude and Rumbe being given, to finde the difference of Lon­gitude will there be shewed, the difference of Longitude by the dead reckoning in most cases need not be known, or else the rumbe will be consequently given; as namely, when the distance and cor­rected difference of Latitude is given as in the latter part of the first and third Precepts, or when the Departure and difference of Latitude are given, as in the third & fourth Precepts, for these are sufficient to draw it, as we have before handled; but when the Course or Rumbe varies, as in these two Cases, the difference of Latitude and Departure from the Meridian are given, and the difference of Longitude may be found without drawing any new Rumbe line in the Traverse Quadrant, by this Proportion:

As the Variation or difference of Latitude:

Is to the Separation or departure from the Meridian

So are the Meridional parts between both Latitudes:

To the difference of Longitude required

And the same Proportion will serve to finde the difference of Longitude for many short Traverses near the same Rumbe, ma­king the two first tearms the whole Variation and Separation cau­sed by those short Traverses.

Example:

[figure]

In this Scheme let A E be two degrees difference of Lati­tude between 26d and 28d of La­titude, as it was in the Scheme of the first Precept for correcting the Dead Reckoning, and let A S be the Departure from the Me­ridian, here the same as it was there, then if you joyn E S with a right line, it is the distance in the Plain Chart, supposing E A S to be a right Angle: Now to finde the difference of longitude you must take the difference of latitude, being the distance be­tween 26d and 28d out of the Meridian line of Mercators Chart, and prick it from A to M, and draw the line M L parallel to E S, so is A L the difference of longitude required, which is to be increased or diminished by adding or substracting other differences of longitude to it or from it, as was done by the Departure from the Meridian in the Plain Chart, and here M L is the enlarged distance in the Rumbe on Mercators Chart.

To finde the Difference of Longitude, by drawing the Rumbe-Line.

To draw the Rumbe-line, setting one foot in S, with the extent A E, describe an Ark at C: Again, setting one foot in E, with the extent A S, describe another Ark at C, crossing the former, a line drawn through that cross to the Center A, is the Rumbe re­quired; now placing one foot of the extent A M so in the Rumbe-line, that the other turned about may just touch A L, the nearest distance from the resting point at a, being taken to the line A M, is the difference of Longitude required, being equal to the prickt line M a.

Having before shewed the Use of the Plain Chart, it now re­mains to shew how far it is to be trusted to, in regard the Meri­dians therein are all parallel, whereas in the Globe, which it is con­ceived to represent, they all grow narrower and narrower, till they meet in the Pole point.

I shall therefore propose an example of the true Course and distance between Horn Sound in the Island of Spitsberge, Latitude 76d 40′, Longitude 35d 30′, and Fog-bay in Newfound-land, Lat. 50d, Longitude 329d, & so the difference of longitude is 66d 30′, the true Rumbe between these two places, according to Mercators Chart, which we shall demonstrate, is 45d 38′ from the Meridian, and the true distance in the Rumbe 762 Leagues and a half.

1. First therefore, I say that no two places can be laid down true upon the Plain Chart, in respect of Longitude, Latitude, Course, and distance, unless they be under the same Meridian, or under the Equinoctial.

Horn Sound and Fogg bay being laid down true as to the dif­ference of Latitude and Longitude, the Course between them by the Plain Chart is 68d 11′ from the Meridian, and the distance 1424 Leagues.

2. If they be laid down true (as they may be) in their Course, distance, and difference of Latitude, then the difference of Longitude will be false, consequently the difference of Longitude between those two places thus laid down, should be but 27d 17′, whereas in truth it should be much more, to wit, 66d 30′.

3. No two places can be laid down true in these three respects, as to their Course, Distance, and Difference of Longitude, but if you would lay them down true in two of these respects, whereof there are three Cases: First, in their Course and Distance, then the Difference of Latitude will be true, and the Difference of Longi­tude false, as in the second Case. Secondly, in their Course and Difference of Longitude, then will the Distance and Difference of Latitude be much more then it should; the Distance thus found will be 1860 leagues, and the difference of Latitude 65d 3′, and should be but 26d 40′. Thirdly, to lay them down true in their Distance and Difference of Longitude, in many Cases is im­possible, and in this Example; but yet where the Difference of Latitude is more then the Difference of Longitude, this may be [Page 34] done, but then the Difference of Latitude will always be too lit­tle, and the Rumbe too wide from the Meridian.

4. Three places cannot be laid down true, as to their Latitudes, Courses and Distances from each other, though we wave the Lon­gitude, as shall afterwards be shewed; from which premises we may raise these consequences.

1. That in regard three places cannot be laid down true in their Courses, Distances and Latitudes, although we wave and ad­mit the Difference of Longitude to be false, that it is no safe way to make Charts, as generally they are, to be true as to the Lati­tudes of places, and as near the truth as they can as to the Cour­ses and Distances, for out of such a false Chart a true one cannot be made, nor the true rumbe and distance between most places found.

2. That it were best to make these Charts true, as to the Lon­gitudes and Latitudes of all places, in regard the true rumbe and distance may be thence easily found, as we shall shew; and an­other true Chart or Globe graduated from them, and that in stead of putting in such abundance of Compasses and Rumbe-lines, both in the Plain and Mercators Chart, it were better to leave them out, and to put into some spare place the Traverse-quadrant with points and half points, and a Limbe divided into degrees, with a Line of Sines, or else the Sines of the points, halfs, and quarters onely.

3. That being so made near the Equinoctial, they are very near the truth, and may there very well serve, as also under the Meridian, and for short Distances or Voyages: and how to take away the Error of the Chart, and make them serve for long and remote Voyages shall be handled; in order whereto the first Pro­position in the use of the Plain Chart must be repeated.

Propos. I. The Longitudes and Latitudes of any two places being given, to finde the true Course or Rumbe between those places, and the Distance in the Rumbe.

This, of all other Propositions in Navigation, is the most use­ful, and withal the most difficult, and hath, as learned Snellius well observes, been often attempted by the Learned, but in vain; and to give our own Nation its due repute, was never generally [Page 35] and satisfactorily performed by any man, till our late famous Countrey-man Mr. Edward Wright invented that excellent Chart, called Mercators Chart, but ought more properly to be called Wrights Chart, the Meridian-line whereof requires a Table to be made by the perpetual Addition of Secants, without which Table as yet there are no Proportions known that will serve to calculate the Rumbe generally between any two places, by help of the Na­tural Tables of Sines, Tangents, and Secants onely, and what­soever may be done by those Tables, may be also done geometri­cally by Schemes: True it is, this Proposition may be performed by the differences of the Logarithmical Tangents, having a Table of them, as in Mr. Norwoods Epitome, without the help of a Ta­ble of the Meridian-line, but as yet we have no geometrical way known for making the Logarithmical-lines of Tangents, nor Sines and numbers.

Before I proceed any further, it may be objected, That we have Proportions in our English Books, delivered for calculating the Rumbe between two places, which Proportions may be perform­ed by the Natural Tables of Sines and Tangents onely; as name­ly, in Mr. Gunters Works, both in the former and latter Editions: in the third Edition in page 90.

As the difference of Latitude:

Is to the Cosine of the middle Latitude

So is the difference of Longitude:

To the Tangent of the Rumbe from the Meridian:

A precious Proportion if it were true: the true Proportion is,

As the Meridional parts between both Latitudes:

Is to the Radius

So is the difference of Longitude:

To the Tangent of the Rumbe

The Meridional parts are to be taken out of a Table of the Meridian-line, by substracting the Meridional parts of the lesser Latitude, from the Meridional parts of the greater Latitude; by comparing these two Proportions together, because the third and fourth tearm are alike in each; it would follow that we might cal­culate the Meridional parts required, without the perpetual ad­dition of Secants by this Proportion, raised out of the two former tearms of each Proportion:

As the Cosine of the middle Latitude:

Is to the difference of Latitude, if in one Hemisphere, or the sum of both Latitudes if in different Hemispheres

So is the Radius: To the Meridional parts

And so by this Proportion the Meridional parts answering to the

Latitude of 50dshould be55d, 157but are in truth57d, 909.
70d85d, 459by the Table99d, 431.
   Difference41, 522.
   Sum157,340.

which sufficiently refutes the truth of Mr. Gunters Proportion, in calculating a Rumbe from the Equinoctial.

But now, as for finding the Meridional parts between the two former Latitudes, in one or both Hemispheres, the middle Lati­tude in one Hemisphere will be 60d, and the Meridional parts 40d, 00, and in both Hemispheres if found at once by the middle Latitude, which is 10d, is 121d, 85; or if found severally at twice, 140d, 616, which varying from the truth, as above ex­pressed in the Sum and Difference, we may conclude, that the Proportion is very unsound and intolerable for any great differ­ence of Latitude, but Mr. Gunters Works deliver no Caution a­bout it: Before we can finde the distance, the Rumbe must be calculated, and if that be false, a small error therein may cause a considerable error in the distance.

Where the difference of Latitude is not above five degrees, it may serve very well near the truth from the Equinoctial to 60d of Latitude, and afterwards to 80d; it will not serve for three de­grees difference of Latitude, and in all Cases the Cosine of the middle Latitude is a tearm too great, the middle Latitude being too small, and I think no certain Rule can be given to correct it.

From what hath been said, the Reader may take due Caution how far to depend upon such Proportions, whereof one tearm is the middle Latitude: such are,

As the Cosine of the middle Latitude: To the Radius

Or, As the Radius: Is to the Secant of the middle Latitude

So is the Departure from the Meridian:

To the Difference of Longitude:

And to this Proportion Mr. Phillips his late Table of Secants [Page 37] are fitted, in the use whereof the middle Latitude must always be taken to be a whole degree, unless you will by proportion finde the difference required.

And I taking it to be what it truly happened, did cast up the Courses and Distances Mr. Norwood expresses in his Trigonometry, home from the Bermudas to the Lizard, by his Tables in the said Book, and found I had gotten almost half a degree of Longitude in the whole too much, by reason the Proportion is not sound, of which Mr. Norwood makes no use: those Courses and Distances are truly expressed in Mr. Phillips his Geometrical Sea-man, pag. 31. whereas in the last Impression of Mr. Norwoods Book they are mis-printed.

Another Proportion of this kinde, is:

As the Cosine of the middle Latitude:

Is to the Sine of the Rumbe from the Meridian

So is the Distance sayled:

To the Difference of Longitude

So also there may be two Proportions for finding the enlarged Distance:

As to the Radius:

To the Secant of the middle Latitude

So is the distance run:

To the enlarged distance on Mercators Chart ∷

Otherwise,

As the Sine of the Rumbe from the Meridian:

Is to the Secant of the middle Latitude

So is the Departure from the Meridian:

To the enlarged Distance

Note when these Proportions are used, the measure of the en­larged distance must be taken from the degrees of Longitude in Mercators Chart.

Another Proportion for finding the Rumbe, may be gathered from Mr. Hansons Additions to Pitiscus his Trigonometry, and is:

As the difference of Latitude:

Is to the half Sum of the Cosines of both Latitudes

So is the difference of Longitude:

To the Tangent of the Rumbe

This he doth not insist upon as absolutely true, but yet leaves it uncertain when to use it, and when not, the half Sum of the Cosines is a tearm somewhat near in many Cases to the Cosine of the middle Latitude, and by the like reason this Proportion may be refuted, as that was; the half sum of the Cosines is a tearm that may very well serve near the truth for 10 degrees difference of Latitude, or more between the Latitudes of 20d and 60d, near the Poles it is too great, in which case the geometrical mean is truer, near the Equinoctial, and generally in both Hemi­spheres it is too small; and this I thought fit to adde, that those that use geometrical Schemes derived from these Proportions, may not be mis-led, and after a troublesome manner the Course and distance in the Seamans Calendar is laid down between two places, in effect from this latter Propo [...]tion: and for the performance of what is there done, the Scale of Longitudes was formerly added to the Plain Scale, that thereby we might finde how many miles in every Latitude would answer to one degree of Longitude, and thence by Proportion obtain the distance between two places that differ onely in Longitude, which way is tedious. And for finding how many miles in any Latitude vary one degree of Longitude (if it were needful) is easily performed by the Plain Scale, as I have now contrived it; take the Complement of the Latitude from the greater Scale of Sines, and measure it in the greater Scale of leagues or equal parts.

Example.

So if the Latitude were 52d, the Complement thereof is 38d, and the Sine thereof measured in the greater Scale makes 37, and so many miles or minutes in that Latitude alter one degree of Longitude, which on the other Scale of equal parts, shewes 61 Centesmes of a degree.

And before I apply my self to small Distances, I think it not amiss to express how these Proportions finde the Rumbe between Horn Sound and Fog Bay.

By the Cosine of the middle Latitude, the Rumbe is 48d 14′ from the Meridian, and the Distance 800 leagues. In one Hemis­phere the middle Latitude is the half sum of both Latitudes.

By the half sum of the Cosines of both Latitudes, the Rumbe is 47d 28′ from the Meridian, and the Distance about 789 leagues.

But supposing these places to be in different Hemispheres, the middle Latitude will be the half difference of both Latitudes: And by the Cosine of the middle Latitude, the Rumbe is 27 de­grees 2 minutes. and the Distance is 2842 leagues.

By the half sum of the Cosines of both Latitudes, the Rumbe is 12 degrees 54 minutes, and the Distance 2598 leagues, whereas in this latter Case the truth by Mercators Chart is 20 degrees 11 minutes from the Meridian for the Rumbe, and 2699 leagues for the Distance.

And the Distance between those places in the Arch of a great Circle, is near 729 leagues, and supposing them in different He­mispheres, it is 2667 leagues.

Now to the Proposition for finding the Rumbe geometrically, as far as the former Proportions hold true.

Each of the former Proportions may be made two, as in the first Part, by bringing in the Radius, whereof we need onely work one, and that will be in the first Proportion:

As the Radius: Is to the Cosine of the middle Latitude

So is the difference of Longitude:

To the whole Departure from the Meridian, in the Course between the two places proposed

And in the second Proportion:

As the Radius: Is to the half sum of the Cosines of both Latitudes

Or rather for Geometrical Schemes.

As the Diameter: Is to the sum of the Cosines of both Latitudes

So is the difference of Longitude: To the Departure from the Me­ridian, in the Course between the two places

The latter Proportion of this Division, of which we make no use, is:

As the difference of Latitude:

Is to the aforesaid Departure from the Meridian

So is the Radius: To the Tangent of the Rumbe

An Example of the former Proportion.

Let the Rumbe be required between Cape Finisterrae, Latitude 43 degrees, Longitude 7 degrees 20 minutes, and St. Nicholas Isle, Latitude 38 degrees, Longitude 352 degrees, the middle Latitude is 40d 30′, the complement is 49 degrees 30 minutes, and the difference of Longitude is 15d 20′, or 33 Centesms.

[figure]

Out of the lesser equal parts, prick down 15d, 33 Centesmes from C to L, and describe the Arch B D with 60d of the Chords, and make it equal to 49d 30′, and draw C D continued further to A, from L take the nearest distance to A C, which is equal to L M, and make it one Leg of a right angled Triangle: Make the other Leg the difference of Latitude 5d, which prick from the equal parts from L to F, then the extent M F measured on the said parts, sheweth the distance to be 13d 39 Centesmes, which allowing 20 Leagues to a degree, is almost 268 Leagues: with the Radius C B setting one foot at M, cross the Rumbe Triangle at G and H, which extent measured on the greater Chord is almost 22d, the Complement whereof is 68d, and so much is the Rumbe from the Meridian between these two places, which is 6 points and about 30 minutes more, wherefore St. Michaels Isle bears from Cape Finister west south west, half a degree more westwardly.

If two places had been both in the Latitude of 40d 30′, having the same difference of Longitude, to wit, 15d 20′, then had the [Page 41] extent L M been their distance, to wit, 11d 68 Centesmes, at 20 Leagues to a degree, is 233 Leagues and a half, and thus we sup­ply the want of the Scale of Longitudes in finding the distance of Places that beare East and West, as those that are in the same Latitude must need do.

An Example of the latter Proportion.

Let it be required to finde the true Rumbe and distance be­tween the Lizard and the Bermudas, Mr. Norwood in his Sea­mans Practise page 110, maketh the Latitude of the Lizard to be 50d, and of the Bermudas 32d 25′, or 32d, 41 Centesmes, and the difference of Longitude between these places to be 55d.

[figure]

Draw the lines A C and C D at right angles, now for want of room I use the lesser Chord, and with 60d thereof I describe the Quadrant H I, and prick the Radius from I to D, so is C D the Diameter, then count both Latitudes from H to F and G, the nearest distance from F to C I, is the Cosine of Bermudas Latitude, which prick from C to E: Again, the nearest distance from G to C I, is the Cosine of the Lizards Latitude, which place from F to S, so is C S the Sum of both Cosines; draw D S and prick down 55d the difference of Longitude from C to V, out of the [Page 42] greater equal parts, and draw V B parallel to D S, so is C B the Departure from the Meridian in the Course between both places, then making that one Leg of a right angled Triangle, prick down 17d, 59 Centesmes, the difference of Latitude between those places out of the same equal parts from C to L, and draw B L which represents the Course and distance truly between the Liz­ard & Bermudas, and the extent L B measured on the same equal parts, shewes the distance to be 44d 31 Centesmes, which allowing twenty Leagues to a degree, is 886 Leagues.

Then to finde the Course with 60d of the Chords, setting one foot in L, with the other make a mark at Y and Z, then the ex­tent Z Y measured on the Chords, sheweth the Rumbe to be 66d 37′ from the Meridian, which is almost 6 points, and in this exam­ple the Proportion doth not erre any thing from the truth, accord­ing to Mercators Chart, whereas if you use the former Proportion by the middle Latitude, the Rumbe would have been 67d 2′ from the Meridian, and the distance 902 leagues, if you make C A equal to C V, then a line joyning L A should be the course and distance according to the same Longitudes and Latitudes laid down on the Plain Chart, and thereby the Course should be 72d 17′ from the Me [...]idian, and the distance 1155 leagues, however when two places are laid down true at first in their Rumbe, distance and Latitudes on the Plain Chart if you sayl home, in, or near the same Rumbe, the Plain Chart will very well serve to keep the reckon­ing upon, and to sayl by in the greatest Voyage.

How Geometrically to supply the Meridian-line of Mercators Chart generally.

That the finding of the true Rumbe between two places, might not be a Proposition out of the reach of Geometry, or not to be per­formed by Scale and Compasses, the supply thereof became the Contemplation of the late learned Mr. Samuel Forster Professor of Astronomie in Gresham Colledge, who in his Treatise of a ruler, Entituled, Posthuma Fosteri, makes a Meridian-line out of a Scale of Secants: this we shall be brief in, and shew how near it comes to the truth. Let it be required to make a Meridian-line of such a scantling, that one degree of Longitude may be half an inch, which is of the same size with the Print thereof at the end of the Book.

[figure]

Make a quadrant as A C B, wherein prick down half an inch from C to D, and raise the Perpendicular D E: Sup­pose I would take out the Se­cant of 43d 30′ to that Ra­dius, prick this arch down from B in the Limbe towards E, and lay a ruler over it, and it will cut the Line D E at F, then is D F the Tangent of that Arch to half an inch Ra­dius, and C F the Secant thereof. After this manner the Secant of any Arch is to be taken out, I say then that the Secant of 30′ thus taken out, shall be the length of the first degree of the Meridian-line, and the Secant of 1d 30′ so taken out, shall reach from the first to the second degree of the Meridian-line, and the Secant of 2d 30′ shall be the distance between the second and third degree of the Meri­dian-line, and so on successively through every degree to 80d or 85d, and further we do not need it.

And so if it were required to make the Meridian-line from 43d to 50d of Latitude, the former extent C F out of the quadrant shall reach in this line F L from 43d to 44, in like manner the Secant of 44d 30′ so taken out, shall reach from 44d to 45.

And thus may the whole degrees be taken out, now for dividing them into Centesmes, they may be equal divisions, and yet very near the truth; or rather first divide the half degrees true by the middle Secant, thus: the half of the Se­cant of 49d 15′, shall reach from 49d to 49d and a half, and instead of halfing the Secant, it may be taken out to half the Radius, and afterwards the parts of each half degree may be divided equally, and so if you would divide a degree in­to ten parts, each part will be 6 minutes; and if it were required to finde the true length of the Meridian-line from 49 degrees to 49 degrees 6 minutes, the tenth part of the middle Secant, to wit, of 49 degrees 3 minutes, shall be the [Page 44] length required, and so on successively. And so if it were requi­red to finde the length of 49d 7 tenths, or 42′, I say that 7/10 of the middle Secant, to wit, of the Secant of 49 35 Centesms, or 49d 21′, is the length required.

Now it may be doubted that the making of the Meridian-line by whole degrees, is not near enough the truth, in regard the Ta­bles at first were made by the adding of the Secants of every mi­nute successively together; and the learned Mr. Oughtred in stead of adding the Secants of every minute, would have a minute divi­ded into a hundred, a thousand, ten thousand, or rather a million of parts, and the Secants of every one of those parts added to­gether.

To this I answer, That the making of the Meridian-line by whole degrees, and in the whole, doth not breed any error at all to be regarded, compared with the making of it up successively by every minute, and for each particular degree it doth not breed any sensible error, compared with the best Tables.

To the end of this Book we have added a Table of the Meri­dian-line to every second Centesm, wherein we have supplied the vacuity that is in Mr. Gunters Table, by which Table it doth ap­pear that the Meridional parts between the Latitudes of 50 de­grees and 60 degrees, are 17d ⌊542, which other Tables make more; and by the adding up of the Secants of 51 degrees 30 minutes, 52 degrees 30 minutes, and so successively to 59 degrees 30 minutes they will amount to 17d, 547, the difference being onely in the thousandth parts of a degree; and I suppose there are no Merca­tors Charts made, wherein a degree of Longitude is an inch, the biggest, I have seen is but half an inch, and if they were an inch it could scarcely be divided into one hundred parts, much less in­to a thousand, and so in every part of the Meridian-line as far as it can be used, the difference will be inconsiderable, and so also in the whole.

 Deg. Parts
The Meridional parts for 70d of Latitude, by our Tables and Mr. Gunters, are99, 431.
By adding up the Secants of 30′, then of 1d 30′, 2d 30′, successively to 69d 30′, they are99, 426.
By Mr. Wrights Table reduced to degrees99, 444.
Calculated by the Logarithmical Tangents, are99, 436.
By the Forreign Tables of Maetius and Snellius, which are not extended to 80d99, 416.

And for the latter part of the Objection, I hear Mr. Oughtred was making a New Table of them, according to his own minde, wherein it is probable he attained the manner of adding up those Secants by some new Proposition, in regard it would be extreamly tedious to make a Table of Natural Secants to all those parts and then adde them up, wherein he long since desisted upon this consideration, that the decrease would happen in the decimal parts remote from the degrees; for it must be conceived that a Table of the Meridian-line consists of the sum of all the Secants divided by Radius; and thus the Meridional number for the first thousand Centesms, or ten degrees, added up from a Table whose Radius is 1000, amounts to 1005079, and divided by the Radius is 1005, 079, then because we would have a Table to express the Meridian-line in degrees, allowing 100 centesms to a degree, we must divide the former Number by 100, and the Quotient is 10, 05079, which is the very Number in our Tables, saving that our Table is not continued so far by two places; and for the last two figures which are omitted, we added in an Unit in the third place of Decimals, and so when a minute is divided into 100 parts, there will be ten thousand of them in a degree, and the sum of those Secants divided by Radius, must be again divided by ten thousand, so that the decrease, as I said before, will be in the re­mote, and in a manner useless Decimal parts: for it is to be no­ted, that a Table added up from whole minutes of Secants, as was Mr. Wrights, makes the Meridional parts somewhat too great, as himself grants.

Now in regard the former way of making the Meridian-line, though true enough, may seem to be tedious, as not to be perfor­med to 80 degrees, without 80 several additions of those porti­ons or pieces by the Compasses, I thought fit to supply 8 points on the Scale of equal parts in the Frontispiece, which have onely pricks or full points set to them, being indeed the Meridian-line for every 10d from 0 to 80d; and thus the Reader may supply them, making 10d of those lesser parts to be Radius, the distances of these Points from 10d to 60, are the Secants of the middle La­titudes between them encreased by 15′.

From 10 to 60, adde to the middle Latitude 15 minutes.

For70d25′, or rather 21′.
For80d35′
For the first 10d45′

which the Reader may easily lay up in memory, then for the in­termediate or middle degrees between every ten degrees, they may be supplied by a single proportion. We shall give an Exam­ple of both.

[figure]

To supply these 8 Points, draw the Quadrant C A B, and prick off 10 out of the lesser equal parts from C to R, and raise the Per­pendicular R D, then prick off from A towards B in the Limbe,

5d45′

which Arks are numbred with the Figures 1, 2, 3, &c. and laying a Ruler over every one of those Divisions and the Center, mark the line C R with 1, 2, 3, and so to 8, and you are prepared to prick down these Points: Here note, that the Secant of a great Arch may be more certainly found in lines, by working this Proportion:

As the Cosine of that Ark: Is to the Radius

So is the Radius: To the Secant

1515
2515
3515
4515
5515
6521
7535

withal in lines multiplying or increasing the first and third tearms as often as is convenient.

Take the distances in the line R D, from 1 to the Center C, and prick it in the single A B from A to 1, also take the distance 2 C, and prick it in the single line from 1 to 2, and so for all the [Page 47] rest; and thus may those Points be put upon any Plain Scale on which they are wanting: and thus, or from the Tables they were put upon the Plain Scale in the Frontispiece of this Book, and though they be but small, yet they may thereby be made to a great scantling.

An Example of their Use.

Let it be required to finde the Rumbe between the Lizard and the Berbadoes, in North Latitude 13d 20′, Longitude 315d 40′.

Lizard. Latitude 50d, Longitude 11d, 00.

The difference of Latitude is 36d 40′, or 36d, 66 Centesms.

The difference of Longitude is 55d 20′, or 55d, 33 Centesms.

[figure]

Here I take the Distance between the first and fifth point, being in effect the Meridional parts between 10 degrees and 50 degrees of Latitude, and prick them down from L to A, and then because the Latitude of the Berbadoes is 30 de­grees 20 minutes, or 33 Centesmes more North­wardly then 10 degrees, we must by Proportion finde the Meri­dional parts between 10 degrees and 13 degrees 20 minutes of Latitude, thus:

As the Cosine of the middle Latitude: Is to the Radius

So is the difference of Latitude: To the Meridional parts

The middle Latitude is 11d 40′, and the Complement there­of 78d 20′.

With 60 degrees of the Chords draw the Arch C D, making it to be 78 degrees 20 minutes, and draw lines from C and D into the Center at A, then taking 3 degrees 33 Centesms out of the former equal parts, enter it so that one foot resting on A C, the other turned about may but just touch A D, the foot of the Compasses will rest at B, and make A I in the line before equal [Page 48] to A B, here so is L I the true Meridional parts between the Latitude of the Berbadoes and the Lizard: upon the Point I raise a Perpendicular, and therein prick down the difference of Lon­gitude 55 Degrees 33 Centesms out of the former equal parts from I to B, and draw the line L B, which shall truly represent the Rumbe required, which measured as we did, in the Bermudas Example, is 51 degrees 13 minutes from the Meridian.

To measure the Distance.

Prick down 36 Degrees 67 Centesms, the difference of Lati­tude out of the lesser equal parts from L to V, and draw V D parallel to I B, so is D L measured on the same equal parts, is 58d 54′ at 20 leagues to a degree, is 1171 leagues.

When two places are on different sides of the Equinoctial, that is, in different Hemispheres, the Meridian-line A B must be conceived to be the same on the other side A, on the left hand towards the South Pole, as it was on this side towards the North Pole.

Thus we may put the Meridian-line both into our memory and power, if there be none graduated, nor any Tables thereof at hand; and thus by the Natural Tables of Sines onely (for Tangents and Secants may be made out of them) the Rumbe may be calculated very near the truth in all necessary Cases.

And for Varieties sake the rather, in regard wee have no Geometrical Way yet knowne for making the Logarith­mical Tangents, I have endeavoured to force the Meridian-line so, as to divide it off from the equal degrees of a Quadrants Limbe near the truth, behold the Scheme in which the several lines B, C, D, E, F, contain the Divisions of the Meridian-line of Merca­tors Chart from 0 to 48d, divided from the equal degrees of an Arch of a Circle G H, being 25 degrees of a Quadrant, as com­monly divided into 90 degrees; and the Radius of this Arch A G is five times the Radius of the lesser Chord on the Scale, equal to A I, for the bigger the better; and the degrees of Longitude to which this Meridian-line is thus divided, are the equal parts of the greater Scale, which are here also divided on the line A H.

[figure]

The Distances of these leaning Lines from the Center at A, taken out of the same Scale of equal parts, with the Angle they make with the Sine A G, are:

Distance.Angle.On which the Meridian-line is divided.
B 57,90dfrom 0d to 10d.
C 58, 589, 15′from 10 to 30.
D 65, 377, 40from 30 to 55.
E 77, 251, 45from 55 to 75.
F 92, 625,from 75 to 84 or 85d.

The first line B is Perpendicular, and the rest all lean outward, and these Angles and Distances the Reader will finde the same as we have above expressed, if he goes about to measure them.

The manner of forcing the Meridian-line was thus: Mr. Sutton Mathematical Instrument-maker, having one well made, and di­vided on the edge of a square rod, fitted to half an inch Radius, that is, every degree of Longitude was half an inch, and a larger then that he never made (a Chart made thereto from the Equi­noctial to 80 degrees of Latitude towards one of the Poles, will require five foot and above nine inches breadth.)

I desired him to paste white Paper over a large Table, and to divide the Degrees of a Quadrant thereon, drawing lines into the Center, which he accordingly did, and then moving the Me­ridian-line rod too and again till we found it would fit, it seemed to both our judgements, that it might very well be divided from the degrees of the said Quadrant, according to the Distances and Angles here set down, if carefully performed; and though this be not Geometrical, yet it may very well serve for Sea-mens use; and those that may doubt of the truth hereof till they have tried, having one already made, may make another carefully after this manner upon Paper, and then folding the Paper backwards in the lines B, C, D, E, F, lay the folded edges to their graduated line, and finde a good agreement, if performed well.

The Meridian-line is of such general use in Navigation, that indeed without it, or a Table thereof, the true Rumbe between two places cannot be known, a good Reckoning cannot bee kept, and thereby as Maetius well observes, the Navigator is in a capacity to sail unto all the coasts or corners of the earth, where­fore [Page 51] that the Reader might be every way supplyed therewith, we have not onely added in a Table thereof, made to every second Centesm, but likewise a Print from a Brass Plate of a Meridian-line, made to half an inch Radius, so that by doubling or folding that Print (which is made to lye without the Book) upon a Paper or Blank, the Reader may by his Pen easily, without the use of Compasses, graduate the Meridian-line of a Chart for any Voy­age: And supposing that Seamen will not go to Sea without it, that it may not be cumbersome, they may have it put upon the edges of a square rod of a foot length to put in their pockets, upon which the other Scales of the Plain Scale may be likewise gradua­ted; or if the Reader would graduate a Meridian-line of a lesser size on his Chart, he may prepare himself a line of equal parts on the sloap edge of a thin Ruler, and laying it by the line in his Chart, on which he would graduate the Meridional Divisions, ea­sily and conveniently perform it by his Pen, without Compasses, by help of the Meridional Table.

An Example for finding the Rumbe by the forced Meridian-Line.

Let it be required to finde the Rumbe between the Isle of St. Helens, Latitude 16d South, Longitude 14d, and the Berbadoes, Latitude 13d 20′ North, Longitude 315d 40′.

The Meridional parts may be pricked down at thrice, first set 10d out of the Meridian-line B from AE in the following Scheme, both upwards and downwards, then take from the Meridian-line C to 13d 20′, and prick from 10 upwards to B in the former Triangle, also take from C in the Meridian Scheme to 16d, and prick it beneath from 10 to S downwards, then raise S H perpen­dicular to S B, and make S H equal to 58d 20′, or 33 Centesms taken out of the line A H of the former Scheme, and draw B H, and it shall be the Rumbe required from the Berbadoes to St. He­lens, to wit, the Angle B 63d 3′ from the Meridian, if measured by former directions, the sum of both Latitudes is 29d 33 Cen­tesms, which prick from the same equal parts from B to L, and draw L K parallel to S H, and the extent B K measured on those equal parts, is 64d, 7 the distance required, which in leagues allowing 20 to a degree, is 1294 leagues; or without drawing [Page 52] the line L K, if you enter the extent B L so that one foot resting in the line B K, as at M, while the other turned about will but just touch S H, then shall H M be the distance as before.

Thus when places are in both Hemispheres, the sum of the Me­ridional parts in both Latitudes, is the Meridional Leg; but when in the same Hemisphere, the difference of the Meridional parts is the Meridional Leg, and the difference of Longitude in both Ca­ses the other Leg. The reason of this manner of measuring a Di­stance in Mercators Chart, both in this and the former Example, shall afterwards be handled: And note, if you prick down the difference of Latitude in the Meridian in leagues or miles, and draw a Parallel through it, cutting the Rumbe continued, when need requires, you will then finde the measure of the Distance in leagues or miles accordingly.

Another Example, serving to explain the Use of the Table of the Meridian-line, in finding the true Rumbe by any Scale of equal Parts.

Lizard, Latitude 50d. St. Michaels Isle, Latitude 38d 00, the difference of Latitude is 12d, and the difference of Longitude 19 degrees.

Whether this be the true difference of Longitude and Latitude or no, between these places, is not material, as to the explaining of what I am about to say: Let us then suppose these places to be laid down true on a Plain Chart, as to their Latitudes, Course, and Distance, the difference of Latitude is 12d, and the Distance 18d, 12, that is about 362 leagues and a half.

Out of any equal parts prick down 12d, the difference of Lati­tude from L to M, and raise the Perpendicular M I, and take 18d 12 Centesms, the Distance out of the same equal Parts, and set­ting one foot in L, cross the Perpendicular at I, and draw I L, so are these places laid down true in their Distance on a Plain Chart or Blank, as also in their Rumbe the Angle at L, which is 48d 34′ from the Meridian.

Now let us suppose a Ship to sayl from I to A 151 leagues and a half N N E, and by this reckoning is in the Latitude of 45d, and now desires to know how the Lizard bears, and how far it is di­stant from the Ship, I say the prickt line A L doth not represent

[Page 53]

truly neither the Course nor Distance from the Ship to the Li­zard: Again, suppose the Ship to sayl from A to B East South-East 114 leagues and a half, and is now by this Account in the Latitude of 43d, I say a line drawn from B to I, shall not shew the true Course and Distance from the Ship back to St. Mi­chaels, neither shall a line drawn from B to L, shew the true [Page 54] Course and Distance from the Ship to the Lizard: And now he that would remove the Error that is thus committed by reason of the Chart, must for every Course and Distance finde the Differ­ence of longitude as well as of latitude, as shall follow, and then by having the Meridian line, or a Table thereof, he may remove the Error of the Chart when he pleaseth after the same maner, and as easily as to finde the Rumbe and Distance between the two places at the first.

The Ship at A hath made 3d 88 Centesems, the difference of Longitude in that Course, which taken out of 19d, the whole dif­ference of Longitude there, rests 15d 12 Centesms.

 Deg. Parts
The Latitude of the Lizard is 50d, Meridional parts57, 909.
The Latitude of the Ship is 45d, Meridional parts40, 499.
The Difference is7d, 410.

Take 7d, 41 Centesmes out of the Scale L C, and prick them from L to C, and draw C D parallel to M I, and therein out of the same equal parts, prick down 15d 12 Centesmes from C to D, through the point A draw the parallel A E, and from D draw a line to L, so doth the line O L truly represent the Ships Course and Distance to the Lizard; hereby the Lizard will be found to bear from the Ship 63d 53′ from the Meridian, and is distant from it 227 leagues, whereas in the Chart from the point A, the Lizard bears 64d 57′, and is distant from it 236 leagues: Thus the Chart in so short a run as 151 leagues, about 2¼ points out of the direct Course, begets 1d 4′ error in the Rumbe, and 9 leagues error in the Distance, which in a long run, as between the Ber­mudas and the Lizard, may very well amount to 160 leagues er­ror, as Mr. Norwood sheweth, notwithstanding those places were laid down true at first, as to their Latitudes Rumbe, and Distance.

What is here accomplished by the Tables, may readily be per­formed by a Meridian-line, out of which with Compasses take the distance between both Latitudes, and prick it from L to­wards M, at the end whereof raise a Perpendicular, and therein prick down out of the Equinoctial degrees or equal parts, the dif­ference of Longitude, drawing a line from it to L, which shall pass through the former point O, whatsoever be the Radius where­to the Meridian-line is fitted; and after the same manner the er­ror [Page 55] of the Plain Chart is to be removed, when places are at first laid down in it, according to their Longitudes and Latitudes, which is most easily and suddenly done, especially if a Meridian-line on a rod fitted to the degrees of Longitude on the Plain Chart, and the maner of measuring a westwardly distance will be the same as in Mercators Chart.

Before we proceed to the Demonstration of Mercators Chart, it will be necessary to search into the Nature of the Rumbe-line, on the Globe, and to collect what we finde observeable in Forreign Authors to this purpose:

1. They define it to be such a Line that makes the same Angles with every Meridian, through which it passeth, and therefore can be no Arch of a great Circle; for suppose such a Circle to pass through the Zenith of some place not under the Equinoctial, making an oblique Angle with the Meridian, then shall it make a greater Angle with all other Meridians then with that through which it at first passeth, therefore the Rumbe which maketh the same Angles with every Meridian, must needs be a Line curving and bending, which some call a Helix-Line, and others, because it is supposed to be on the Surface of the Sphere, a Helispherical-line.

2. Another Property of the Rumbe-line, is, that it leads nearer and nearer unto one of the Poles, but never falleth into it, and near the Pole it turneth often round the same, in many Spires and turnings.

If by any Rumbe (but not under the Meridian) it were suppo­sed possible to sayl directly under the Pole point, it would follow that the Meridian-line of Mercators Chart should be finite, and not infinite, and that one and the same line should cut infinite o­ther Lines as such, at equal Angles in a meer point, which is against the nature and definition of a line, and then seeing that the Rumbe derives its definition from the Angle, it makes with the Meridian: the nature and use of a Meridia [...] under the Pole ceaseth, and con­sequently the Rumbe ceaseth, for under the Poles no star or other immoveable point of the heavens, doth either rise or set, in refer­ence whereto the word Meridian hath its original, being used to signifie the Mid-day time, or high noon of the Sun, or Star, rela­ting to their proper Motion; moreover under the Pole point the sides of the Rumbe-triangles in the Sphere cease, wherefo [...]e the An­gles must needs do so too.

Of the Nature of the Triangles made upon the Globe by the Rumbe-Line.

The Rumbe of it self is a curved or bending Line, and therefore how smal a portion soever thereof we assume to be a right Line, in its own nature differs something therefrom, and can by no arti­fice be precisely reduced thereto, yet the smaller the Portion be thereof, the nearer as to use, it doth approach to a right Line: Let us therefore on the Globe suppose Circles that are parallel to the Equinoctial to pass through every minute of the Meridian, as in the following figure, wherein P may represent the Pole, and all Lines drawn from thence to AE Q, may signifie Meridians, and the Arks a b, c d, e f, &c. may represent the Parallels supposed: Then suppose a Rumbe to be traced from the Equinoctial at AE towards

[figure]

the Pole, being the prickt curved Line, and through the Points where this Line crosseth the former Parallels, as at AE, b, d, f, h, k, m, draw Meridians from the Pole to the Equator AE Q, and there will be divers small Triangles represented to the fancy; for Example, the Triangle AE a b right angled at [...], in which the [Page 57] side AE b is the distance in the Rumbe, AE a is the difference of Latitude supposed one minute, and a b the Departure from the Meridian, which Triangle we take to be a right lined, not a Sphae­rical Triangle, supposing the sides thereof to be extended into right lines.

And in the whole Rumbe-triangle AE t m, the whole distance is AE m, the whole difference of Latitude is AE t, but the whole Departure from the Meridian is not given in any one Triangle, but in divers Triangles, and is by supposition as much in one Tri­angle as another, to wit, the whole Departure from the Meridian is the sum of

  • a b
  • c d
  • e f
  • g h
  • i k
  • l m

each of which Portions are supposed to be equal each to other, and the whole difference of Longitude is the Arch AE Q, the Segments whereof Q L, Q s, s r, cannot be equal to each other, because the Arks or Departures l m, i k, &c. are supposed to be equal each to other, not in the same, but in dif­ferent Parallels of Latitude.

Now then for all uses in Navigation, we suppose the Segments of the Rumbe m k, k h, and the rest, to be a right Line, and if we give the Rumbe, to wit, the Angle l k m, and the Side k l, we may by the Doctrine of Plain Triangles finde the Side k m, the distance by the common Proportion:

As the Cosine of the Rumbe from the Meridian: Is to the Radius

So is the difference of Latitude: To the distance

And from hence we may observe another property in the Rum­be, as namely, that the Segments or Pieces thereof contained be­tween two Parallels, having the like difference of Latitude, are also equal to each other, so that the like distance being sayled in the same Rumbe in several parts of the earth, shall cause the like difference or alteration of Latitude in each of those parts.

For Example: If a Ship sayl from the Latitude of 10d North-East, till she be in the Latitude of 30d, and then sayl from thence on the same Rumbe till she be in the Latitude of 50d, the latter distance shall be equal to the former distance, and the like shall [Page 58] hold from thence to 70d, and the same also should hold from 70d to the Pole, if it were possible to sayl thither by any Rumbe, and the reason is, because in the Triangle k l m the Angles at k and l, with the Side l k, are equal by construction to the Angles at h and i, and the Side i h in the Triangle i h k, and the like in any other Triangle, wherefore if these were given to finde the Side m k or k h, it must needs be found the same in both.

Again, if in the former Triangle we should give the Rumbe, to wit, the Angle l k m, and the difference of Latitude l k, we might finde the Departure from the Maridian l m by this Pro­portion:

As the Radius: Is to the Tangent of the Rumbe, viz. Tang. l k m:

So is the difference of Latitude, 1 minute, to wit, k l:

To the Departure from the Meridian l m ∷

Now because the Unit in the third place doth neither multiply nor divide, it follows that if you divide the Tangent of the Rumbe by the Radius, the Quotient is the Departure from the Meridian, or without such division it may be expressed like a Fraction, thus: Tang. Rumbe / R, which signifies that the Tangent of the Rumbe is to be divided by the Radius; and now having the Departure from the Meridian given in any Parallel, we may by another Proportion finde the difference of Longitude agree­able thereto, and if the same Departure be often scattered amongst many Parallels, as we have before supposed, we may by compoun­ding that Proportion, finde the sum of all the differences of Lon­gitude proper to each Parallel, which is the whole difference of

[figure]

Longitude required, and must be sup­posed to be added into one sum before the fancy apprehends by what Legs ei­ther the common Rumbe to all those Triangles, and the Hipotenusal or Di­stance AE m is subtended.

Now such Proportion as one Circle hath to another such Proportion, have their Degrees, Semi-diameters, and Sines of like Arches one unto ano­ther.

As in the former Scheme, A C is the Radius of the Equino­ctial, and E D is the Radius of a Parallel or lesser Circle, whose Latitude from the Equinoctial is A E, but E D is the Sine of the Ark E B, which is the complement of the Latitude A E.

It therefore holds:

As the Cosine of the Latitude: Is to the Radius

Or rather with other tearmes in the same Proportion.

As the Radius: Is to the Secant of the Latitude

So is a Mile or any part thereof, or number of Miles:

To the difference of Longitude answering thereto

And because the two first tearms of the Proportion vary not, it will hold after the manner of the Compound rule of three.

As the Radius: Is to the Sum of the Secants of all the parallels or Latitude between any two places: (and we allow a parallel to pass through every minute or Centesme of a degree)

So is a Mile or any number or part thereof allotted to every Parallel:

To the whole difference of Longitude, that is, to the Sum of all the differences of Longitude proper to each Parallel

Now as we shewed before, the Departure from the Meridian is equally scattered or shared, and allotted the like portion there­of to every parallel, wherefore in stead of the third tearm above which is the distributed part, we may take in a tearm equivalent thereto that findes it Tang. Rumbe / Radius, as we shewed before, then in working the rule of three in mixt Numbers, where the second or third tearm stand in form of a Fraction, the other tearms not being mixt, the Product of the first tearm and Denominator, is the Di­visor or fi [...]st tearm in another Proportion, and the Numerator and other tearm are the second and third tearms, or their product the Dividend, wherefore by this Composition it followes:

As the Square of the Radius:

Is to the Sum of the Secants of all the Parallels between both La­titudes

So is the Tangent of the Rumbe: To the difference of Longitude

And in stead of the two first tearms, we may say:

As the Radius: Is to the sum of all the Secants between both La­titudes divided by the Radius: (which as I have shewed is the very tearm given by the Meridional Table)

So is the Tangent of the Rumbe from the Meridian:

To the difference of Longitude

The four tearms of this Proportion being all of a different kinde, may be so inverted in their order, that any three of them being given, the fourth may be found, and so if it were required to finde the Rumbe, the difference of Longitude and Latitude being given, it will hold backward:

As the Meridional parts between both Latitudes:

Is to the difference of Longitude

So is the Radius: To the Tangent of the Rumhe

Wherefore if we make the Meridional parts one Leg of a right angled Triangle, and the difference of Longitude the other, the Meridional parts being assumed or made Radius, the difference of Longitude becomes the Tangent of the Rumbe, and consequent­ly the Angle between the Meridian and Rumbe-Line, or Hipote­nusal, measureth the quantity of the Rumbe from the Meridian; and this is the very case and thing done in Mercators Chart be­tween all places, wherefore the truth of that Chart is as much in every respect above all contradiction, as the best Calculation that is as every was published, and we may very well conclude with Mr. Norwood in his Trigonometry, page 119. that all or any parts of the world may be set down therein according to their Longi­tudes, Latitudes, Courses and Distances, as truly and far more conveniently for the Mariners use, then upon the Globe it self, with the which elsewhere he saith it agrees without sensible error; And in the words of its renowned Author Mr. Wright, we may say it agrees therewith without sensible or considerable error.

Now let us see what can be objected against it: Mr. Speidel in his Brief Treatise of Sphaerical Triangles, page 48 saith, That by Mercators Chart in the bearing of two places, there will appear a ma­nifest error of whole degrees, being compared with the Globe.

And I adde, if this were true, there would also arise a great error in the distance, seeing we have nothing but his bare word for it, it is as easily here denyed, as there affirmed, and it were to be wished he had left us his minde concerning it; if by compa­ring with the Globe he means it should be the same with the angle of Position, this we deny; for the Rumbe makes the same Angles with both the Meridians of the places between which it is extend­ed, [Page 61] whereas the Angle of Position at one of the places differs from what it is at the other place: And here note, that a Course sayled under the Meridian, or in a Parallel, is not properly called a Rumbe, for under the former the Ships motion describes a great Circle, and in a parallel a lesser Circle, whereas a Rumbe is no Circle at all, but rather resembles a Spiral-line.

Another Objection may be raised from learned Mr. Oughtreds Treatise of Navigation, page 38. at the end of his Circles of Pro­portion, wherein he makes this one property of the Rumbe, that a Ship sayling therein from one place to another, cannot return back to the first place by the opposite Rumbe: behold the former Scheme wherein in the Triangle k l m, suppose a Ship to sayl from k to m, then is l k m the Angle of the Rumbe first kept, be­ing subtended by the Side l m; now if she would sayl back again from m to k, the Angle of the Rumbe will be n m k, a bigger An­gle then the former, because the Side k n that subtends it, is a big­ger Side, and so that if the Ship should sayl back by the very op­posite Angle, the Ship would not arrive at k, but fall wide of it nearer unto n.

To which I answer, That this is true in nicety of speculation, for in the right angled Triangle k l m, if I give the Side k l the difference of Latitude, and the Side l m the difference of Lon­gitude, reduced to the measure of that Parallel, I may by these finde the Distance k m, and the Angle of the Rumbe l k m. In like manner in the Triangle m n k, the Side m n is equal to l k, but the Side k n is greater then l m, and is the difference of Lon­gitude in the given Parallel, whereby we may finde m k greater then it was found before, and the Angle of the Rumbe n m k grea­ter then the Angle l k m; And so in the whole number of Rum­be-Triangles in finding the Rumbe, get the Meridional parts be­tween both Latitudes, by substracting the less from the greater, and thereby finde the Rumbe, this findes the lesser Angle, and includes the most Northwardly, and excludes the most Southward­ly Parallel.

Again, substract a Centesm or Minute from each Latitude, and then finde the Meridional parts, whereby calculate the Rumbe: this findes the bigger Angle, and excludes the most Northwardly, and includes the most Southwardly Parallel; and thus we may [Page 62] finde how much the inward Angle of the Rumbe differs from the outward, between both which the true Rumbe is a mean; but if the case be put in different Hemispheres, the sum of the Meridio­nal parts in both Latitudes will finde the lesser Angle, then sub­stract a minute from the greater, and adde a minute to the lesser Latitude, and with the sum of the Meridional parts proper to both Latitudes thus altered, you may also finde the greater Angle.

The Meridional parts thus found, either way will be so incon­siderably different, that there will scarce be any sensible differ­ence between the Rumbe found by each operation, and therefore though the Objection be true in speculation, yet cannot be sensi­ble in practice, and what difference may thus arise, may be remo­ved to all possible nearness, if in stead of making a Rumbe trian­gle to every minute, we should divide a Minute or Centesm into a hundred, a thousand, ten thousand, or a million of Triangles, and adde up the Secants of them according to Mr. Oughtreds opi­nion; but we may say with Mr. Wright, page 114. that this were a matter more curious then necessary, a Table made to every Mi­nute or Centesm being so near the truth, that it is not possible by any Rules or Instruments of Navigation to discover any sensible error in the Sea Chart, so far forth as it shall be made according thereto: Secondly, were the Objection more considerable then it is, yet to me it seems a gross absurdity in practice, to affirm that a Ship cannot return by the opposite Rumbe.

Admit a Ship sayl 1000 leagues up a River all the way North-East, he were no less then frantick that should deny that she could return down the same River back again, and then by supposition the Compass did truly point all the way up North-East, how can it be conceived that the other end of the Rumbe-line on the Com­pass, if we make it a streight line so as to agree with the opposite Coasts of the Horizon, did point at the same time other ways then South-West? or can it be apprehended that the meer winding or tacking about of the Ship to return, should all the way back cause the Compass to point otherwise then it did all the way up? and notwithstanding the Objection, Mr. Oughtred grants, and pleads as much for the truth of Mercators Chart, as he doth for the truth of the Calculation delivered by himself and others. Now having shewed the making, and confirmed the truth of that Chart, we [Page 63]

[figure]

[Page 64] proceed to the Uses thereof, and the manner of keeping a Rec­koning thereon.

Suppose therefore that a Voyage were to be performed from Tenariff, Latitude 28d, Longitude 0, to St. Nicholas Isle, Lati­tude 17d, Longitude 352d, the difference of Longitude being 8d, this Example being the same we used in the Plain Chart, we here retain it with the same Courses and Distances, that the Reader comparing both together, may see how much error is committed by the Plain Chart; to fit a particular Chart hereto, I draw the line T W, and divide it into 8 equal parts or degrees, being in this Chart half an inch each, and then divide every one of those de­grees into ten lesser parts, then draw the line T S perpendicular, and by folding the printed Cut of the Meridian-line thereto, I graduate the same with a Pen from 28 to 17d of Latitude; and now to shun the turning of leagues into degrees and Centesms, I divide another line of equal parts W N, making each degree therein twice as large as a degree of Longitude, and so that line becomes a line of inches, and may be made on a loose Ruler; each degree thereof is divided into ten parts, and numbred with as many degrees of Latitude of the Meridian-line, as the Chart would suffer for want of room.

Draw a line from T to N, to represent a Ruler laid over the two places Tenariff and Nicholas Island, for when we have a Ruler that line need not be drawn.

To finde the Rumbe.

And now let it be required to finde the Rumbe or Course be­tween Tenariff and St. Nicholas Island without drawing any lines in the Chart.

Example:

Prick 60d of the Chords from T to o, and also prick it down by the edge of the Ruler from T to R, and take the distance R o, which measured in the greater Scale of Chords is 33d 49′, and so much doth St. Nicholas Isle bear from Tenariff to the Westward of the South, which measured on the Scale of Rumbes, is 3 points (and 4 minutes more) and the Rumbe is South-west and by South; Also the nearest distance from R to the Ruler T X, measured on the Sines, sheweth the same Arch as before, to wit, 33 degrees 49 minutes.

Another Example.

Let us suppose two Islands in the Sea, the one scituated in this Chart at f, the other at d, and let it be required to finde the Rumbe or true Course between them.

To perform this, in regard we suppose the Chart to be made without any Compasses, Winds, or Rumbes drawn, it will be ne­cessary to have some few Meridians and Parallels drawn therein, here we have drawn one through 20d of Latitude, and another through 25d, lay a ruler over f and d, and it cuts the line r B at E, then place the extent T R from E to r, the nearest distance from r to f d, which resembles the edge of the ruler measured on the greater Line of Sines, is 11d 55′, and so much to the Southwards of the East, doth the Island f bear from the Island d, which is East and by South, and 40′ Southwardly.

The ruler must cut some Meridian or Parallel in the Chart, and if it should so happen that it cuts none, then some Meridian or Parallel must be drawn that it may cut.

To Measure the Distance between any two Places in Mercators Chart.

Herein also we shall forsake the common Road, and make no use of the Meridian-line at all, which as it is not used to this pur­pose in Calculation, so neither need it in any operation upon the Chart, on which we shall observe those Proportions that are used in Calculation, which are but two.

Case 1. When places differ both in Longitude and Latitude.

As the Cosine of the Rumbe: Is to the difference of Latitude

So is the Radius: To the Distance

Suppose the points R & Q in the Chart were two Islands, where­of I would measure the distance, supposing these places to be truly placed in the Chart according to their Latitudes and Longitudes, it is necessary to find in what Latitudes both places are: thus, if you take the nearest distance from Q to some Parallel, to wit, K L, and place it in the Meridian-line T S, the right way from that Pa­rallel you will find that place to be in the latitude of 22d 5 tenths, and the point R will be found to be in the latitude of 24d 42 cen­tesms, get the difference of Latitude, which is one degree and 92 Centesms, which take out of the Scale of Inches, to wit, one inch, [Page 66] and 92 hundred parts of another, and lay a Ruler over the two places R Q, and it will cross the Parallels at the Points K and X, then enter the former extent so by the edge of the Ruler, that one foot resting by it, the other turned about may but just touch some one of the Parallels in the Chart; thus one foot of the Compasses will rest at Y, and the other being turned about will just touch K L, then is the extent K Y the distance in degrees, if measu­red in the Scale of Inches, to wit, 2d 31 Centesms; and if you measure the said extent in the line T W, it gives you the distance in leagues, to wit, 46 leagues and a quarter.

And if you have the Scale of leagues graduated on the sloap edge of your Ruler, you may see the distance without measuring any extent; and if the Line of Inches were wanting, you might double the difference of Latitude, and take it out of the Scale T W, and finde the distance the same.

In like manner, if the former extent were so entred, that one foot turned about should just touch r X, the Compasses would rest at Z, and the extent Z X would be the same distance as before.

We would have measured the whole Distance between Tenariff at T, and Nicholas Island at N, but that we are confined to a nar­row room, and therefore will onely measure one tenth part there­of: The whole difference of Latitude is 11d, whereof a tenth part is one degree and a tenth, take one inch and a tenth out of the Scale of Inches, and entring it so that one foot resting by the edge of the Ruler T N, the other turned about may just touch T W, the resting foot will happen at P, and the extent T P mea­sured on the Scale T W, is 26 leagues and a half, wherefore the whole distance is ten times as much, namely, 265 leagues.

Demonstration.

The Angle that the edge of a ruler (or right Line) laid over two places, makes with any Parallel in the Chart, is the Complement of the Rumbe between those places, so the Angle Q K L mea­sureth the bearing of the Ports R Q from the West, and the An­gle Q X r measureth the same thing from the East, and the en­tring of the difference of Latitude taken out of some Scale of equal parts, as above, makes it to become the Cosine of the Rumbe, wherefore the Radius thereto K Y, or X Z becomes the distance [Page 67] in the same measure wherein the difference of Latitude was ta­ken, and so the Proportion before delivered is observed.

Case 2. The second Case is when two places are both in the same Latitude, and differ onely in Longitude, the Propor­tion holds:

As the Radius: Is to the Cosine of the Latitude

So is the difference of Longitude: To the Distance

I said before that we might very well spare the Points of the Compass and Rumbes, wherewith most Chards are filled, and that the Limbe of a Quadrant in some spare place of the Chard would be of good use, in particular for the resolving of this Pro­position, yet the defect thereof we thus supply.

Prick down 60d of the Chords from T to H, which Point may be alwayes in a readiness, and now let it be required to measure the distance r X in the Latitude of 20d, the Complement whereof is 70d, with the Chord of 70d draw an Arch at g, and setting one foot in T, with the Radius T H cross the former Ark at g, over which and the point T, lay the edge of a Ruler, then take the ex­tent r X, and place it from T towards W, it reaches to G, the nearest distance from G to the edge of the Ruler, is the distance sought, if measured in the line T W, to wit, 3d 45 Centesms, where turning it twice over (making every degree to be ten leagues) I shall finde it to be 69 leagues.

Otherwise:

Suppose G to be a place in the Latitude of 28d, and it were re­quired to measure the distance thereof from T, with the Sine of 28d upon o as a Center, describe the Ark q, and lay the edge of the Ruler so as it may lye over the outward edge of that Ark and T, then take the nearest distance from G to the edge of the Ruler, which being turned twice over in the line T W, you will finde the distance sought to be 65 leagues.

Now we may apprehend how to lay the Ruler without drawing the Ark q, so as the Compasses turned about may just touch the edge thereof, and then setting down one foot of the Compasses by the said edge, turn the Ruler about that the edge may be to­wards G, and take the nearest distance as aforesaid to it, and in Latitudes above 40d or 45d, the trouble of turning about the Ruler [Page 68] may be best spared in that Case, with the Sine of the Latitudes Complement, setting one foot at H, lay the ruler over T, so that the other foot turned about may touch the thin sloap edge thereof, and then take the nearest distance thereto, as before.

For places that differ both in Longitude and Latitude, if they bear one from another East or West within a quarter or half a point, it may be truly alledged, that the way of measuring delive­red in the first Case will be very uncertain, because the Compas­ses will run along almost in a Parallel to the edge of the ruler, and so cut it very obliquely.

As in Page 6 of the first Part, Prop. 5. where C I may rep [...]esent a Westwardly Course and Distance, and C A the difference of Latitude, then doth the Perpendicular A I cut the line C I in the Point I very obliquely, and with uncertainty; for the finding of which with more certainty, the e [...]tent C A was tripled to F, and the extent D B was tripled to G, as was declared in that Scheme.

To which I answer, The distance may be also found as here in the second Case, by the Cosine of the middle Latitude between both places.

And thus if it were required to finde the distance between the points d and f in the former Chart, by this rule it would be found to be 2d 98 Centesms, which turned twice over in the Scale T W, is 59 leagues 7 tenths, which is not the true distance, because the Rumbe between these places is above a Point from the East or West, whereas the true distance is 60 leagues 9 tenths; and in this Example the difference of Latitude is 63 Centesms, and though it were four degrees or more, we might first finde the di­stance by the Cosine of the middle Latitude, and then enlarge it by entring it so by the edge of the ruler laid over the two places, that one foot resting by the sloap edge, the other turned about might but just touch some Meridian, in stead of a Parallel in the former way.

Thus a ruler laid over d and f cuts the Meridian-line at u, and the former extent so entred, one foot of it will rest at m, while the other turned about will but just touch T S, then the extent m u turned twice over and measured in the line T W, will be 60 leagues 9 tenths the Distance required, the enlargement thus found being but very small as to matter of extent.

Now we may take a view of what Rules have been formerly delivered for the Measuring of Distances, here we need not recite Mr. Gunters way, which is not onely troublesom, as not to be per­formed without two Pair of Compasses, but also uncertain, if the Distance be great.

The Way in use amongst Seamen is to take half of the whole extent between any two places in the Chart, and either to set one foot of the Compasses down in the Meridian-line, at the middle Arch, which is the middle Latitude between both places, or at the middle space or just half between the Latitudes of both places, which always falls somewhat nearer the Pole then the middle La­titude, and then turn the other foot of the Compasses both up­wards and downwards, and minde what Arks it crosseth in the Meridian-line, then they count the whole Arch contained be­tween the places where the moveable foot so crossed, and take that for the whole distance sought.

Example:

Latitude 13d, 33 Centesms North.
16, South.

Difference of Longitude is 180d, the extent in the Chart be­tween two places so scituated, is 182d 42, the half whereof is 91d 21, which measured in the Meridian-line from the middle Lati­tude or Arch, which is 1d 33, being half the difference of both La­titudes, and counted towards the greater Latitude, reacheth Northward to 66d 15 one way, and Southward to 67d 32 the other way, and so by this reckoning the distance between these places should be 133d, 47 by the middle Latitude, and 133d, 98 by the middle space, whereas in truth by Calculation the distance in the Rumbe is much more, to wit, 180d, 54.

But supposing two places to be in the same Latitude, and to have but 58d, 33 Centesms difference of Longitude, the example will be the same with one of those before put between the Berba­does and St. Helens, and the distance found by the middle Arch or Latitude, is 62d, 00, and the same by the middle space 61d 38 cen­tesms, but should be in truth 64d, 7.

Also in the former Example between the Berbadoes and the Lizard, the true distance is 58d, 54, and by the middle Latitude [Page 70] or Arch is 58d, 7, but by the middle space it is 57d, 66.

Also in the Example between the Bermudas and the Lizard, the true distance was found to be 44d, 31 Centesms, by the mid­dle Arch or Latitude it is 45d, 13 Centesms, and by the middle space it is 44d, 97 Centesms.

Where places are in the same Latitude or Parallel, the Com­passes must be set down in the Meridian-line at the Latitude gi­ven, and the half extent applyed both upwards and downwards, as before; and if the distance be large, the measure thereof will be much more erronious then when the Rumbe lyes nearer the Meridian.

Some Examples of a parallel Distance.

Let there be two places in the Latitude of 35d.

  True Distance.Distance by the Meridian-line.
Difference of Longitude180d147d, 45123d, 93.
1814, 7413, 98.

Another Example of two places in the Latitude of 50d.

  True Distance.Distance by the Meridian-line.
Difference of Longitude180d115d, 8111d, 87.
1811, 5811, 59.

A third Example of two places in the Latitude of 70d.

  True Distance.Distance by the Meridian-line.
Difference of Longitude180d61d, 5776d, 41.
186, 156, 18.

From which Examples we may observe, that a large Distance cannot be so certainly measured in the Meridian-line as a small one, whereof Mr. Wr [...]ght was very sensible, and therefore pre­scribes Rules for the measuring of a small part of the Distance at a time, and argues for the truth thereof; but where the whole ex­tent between two places is not above ten of the degrees of Lon­gitude, I see nothing to the contrary, but that it may well enough be measured in the Meridian-line; and so for a great distance we may measure a tenth, or a twentieth part of the whole, and by multiplying the known part, finde the whole; for the ready per­forming whereof another Scale of equal parts, whereof the de­grees [Page 71] are twice as large as those in the Scale of Longitude, will be of much conveniency and ease.

Example: Suppose it were required to measure the distance be­tween the Points f and d in the former Chart, take the same di­stance, and measuring it in the inches, finde how much it is, to wit, 1 Inch 61 Centesm [...], then take the same number out of the Scale of Longitude, and setting one foot at the middle Latitude, to wit, 19d 18 Centesms, the other will reach Northwards to 20d 69 Centesms, and Southwards to 17d 64 Centesms, the difference of which two Arks is 3d, 05 the distance sought, which allowing 20 leagues to a degree, is 61 leagues, as before, and this is more easily done, then to take the half of any extent, and by the same reason you may finde the middle space between both Latitudes. So also when you would measure the tenth part of a great distance, measure the whole extent in the Scale of Longitudes, and take the twentieth part found by the pen or memory, out of the said Scale, and set it at the middle Latitude, or middle Space, turning the other foot in the Meridian-line, both upwards and downwards, and the degrees so intercepted, will be the tenth part of the whole di­stance. Now the taking of the twentieth or fortieth part of an Extent is easily done, by help of these two Scales of equal parts; Suppose I would finde the twentieth part of 3 inches or degrees in the greater Scale, I say 3 of the small parts in the lesser Scale is the length required, and so the twentieth part of 3 inches 5 tenths is three and a half of the smaller parts in the lesser Scale, and the half of that is the fortieth part of the whole. I need not insist fur­ther upon these ways of measuring, seeing I have before delivered others, which as they are more ready in the practise, so also they are built upon better foundations.

To keep a Reckoning on the true Chart.

Here I shall insist upon a new Method never before published, which will render this Chart very easie and acceptable to Seamen, and having made our Example, that before laid down being the same with that in the Plain Chart, we shall here also retain the same Traverses.

The first Operation is to finde the Latitude.

The first Course the Ship sayls is South South-west, 60 leagues from Tenariff, to protract this Traverse I shall make use of another [Page 72] Traverse-quadrant bigger then that, which was used before, which may be made upon state: Take 60 leagues out of the Scale of Longitudes T W, and enter it in the Traverse-quadrant on the second point from C to A, the nearest distance from A to C W prick in the Scale of Inches from W to A +, and it shews me now that the Ship is in the Latitude of 25d, 23 Centesms, in the Meri­dian-line T S set the figure 1 to this Latitude.

Secondly, to finde the difference of Longitude.

Take the extent T 1 in the Meridian-line, and enter it so in the Traverse-quadrant on the second Rumbe, that one foot resting thereon as at a, the other turned about may but just touch C W, then is the nearest distance from a to C S, the difference of Lon­gitude required, to wit, 1d 24 Centesms, which prick in the Scale of Longitude from T towards W, and set the figure 1 at it.

Thirdly, to plot the Traverse Point.

Set one foot of the said extent at 1 in the South line of the Chart, and with the other draw a small Ark at a, then take the extent T 1 out of the South line, and setting one foot at 1 in the West line, with the other cross the former Ark at a, and there is the point where the Ship is at the end of this first Traverse.

Demonstration.

The Proportion for finding the difference of Latitude, we have before handled, the Proportion for finding the difference of Lon­gitude is:

As the Radius: Is to the Meridional parts between any two Lati­tudes

So is the Tangent of the Rumbe:

To the difference of Longitude

The extent T 1 being taken out of the South line, is the parts of the Meridian-line between the Latitude of 28d, and the Lati­tude of the Ships place, namely, 25d 23 Centesms, which being entred as before, in the Traverse-quadrant at a, becomes the Ra­dius to the Tangent of that Rumbe, and so the Tangent of the said Rumbe to that Radius, being the nearest distance from a to C S becomes the difference of Longitude required, the Propor­tion for finding it being duly observed.

[figure]
[figure]

The Ships second Traverse is 80 Leagues West South West, which I take out of the West line T W on the Chart, and place it in the Traverse-quadrant from C to B upon the sixth Point, the nearest distance from B to C W, I place in the line of Inches from the Point A to the Point B, and thereby I see that the Ships Latitude now is 23d, 7, at which in the South Meridian I set the figure 2, and take the distance in the said line between it and the figure 1, and enter this extent so upon the sixth Point in the Tra­verse-quadrant at b, that the Compasses turned about will but just touch C W, and the nearest distance from b to C S, is the differ­ence of Longitude required, which I prick in the West line from 1 to 2, and upon the point 2 in the South line, with the extent T 2 taken out of the West line, draw a small Ark near b, and then taking the extent T 2 out of the South line, setting one foot upon 2 in the West line, with the other I cross the former Ark at b, and there is the point of the Ships second Traverse.

The third Traverse is South and by East, half a point Eastward­ly 53 leagues, this distance I take out of the West line Scale, and enter it in the Traverse-quadrant from C to D, on a point and a half from the Meridian, the nearest distance from D to C W, I should prick in the Scale of Inches from B to C, but because I have not room, I have continued the said Scale of Inches apart by it self, in page 73. and this extent reaches from B to C, and now I see I am in latitude 21d 17 centesms, at which I set the figure 3 in the South line of the Chart T S, and having taken the distance be­tween it and the figure 2, I enter it so in the Traverse-quadrant on the Rumbe sayled, that one foot resting thereon as at d, the other turned about will but just touch C W, then the nearest di­stance from d to C S, is the difference of Longitude required, which I prick in the West line T W from 2 to 3 Eastwardly, because the Course run Eastwardly; with T 3 of the West line, setting one foot at 3 in the South line, I draw an Ark at c: again, wi [...]h T 3 of the South line, setting one foot at 3 in the West line, I cross the former Ark at c, and there is the point of the Ships place from which it is desired to know how St. Nicholas Island bears, which by former directions is 38d 37′ to the Westward of the South, and the Distance thither will be 106 leagues and 6 tenths.

Now it is desired to know what Course and Distan [...]e must be [Page 76] steered to bring the Ship 23 Leagues East from St. Nicholas Island; The Latitude of that Island is 17d, and the Complement of it is 73d, lay the Ruler over N so as to make such an Angle with the Line N S, which it will do if it be laid over the point N, and the cross p found in the same manner as it was at g, the former di­stance turned into degrees, is 1 degree 15 Centesmes, which I take out of the West Scale T W, being the very half of the leagues there accounted, which I enter so by the edge of the ruler, that one foot resting on the Line N S, the other turned about may just touch the ruler; in this manner it will rest at the point e, which is the point of such distance sought, being but the Converse of find­ing a distance between two places in the same Latitude; then find the Course and distance between the point c and e, by former dire­ction, and you answer the question propounded.

The Course will be found to be 29d 23′ to the Westwards of the South.

And the distance about 95 Leagues 74 Centesmes more.

From the point c, the Ship sailes directly South 33 Leagues 4 Tenths, which I take out of the west-line, and prick in the loose Scale of Inches from C to D, whereby I see the Ship is now in the Latitude of 19d and a half, or 5 tenths, at which in the Meridian line of the Chart, I set the figure 4, and because the Longitude is not altered, I write 4 in the West-line also over the figure 3, and by help of these two Points plat the point d, as was done before.

And now lastly, it is desired to know what Course and Distance I should steere to bring the Ship to beare from the Point S in the Chart, 45 Leagues North-west and by North.

To perform this, we must finde a point in the Chart that shall have the bearing and distance required, the Course assigned is 3 Points from the Meridian, wherefore take 45 Leagues out of the West Scale, and enter it in the third Point of the Traverse-qua­drant from C to F, and the nearest distance from F to C W mea­sured on the Scale of Inches, shews that the difference of Lati­tude is 1d 87 Centesms, which I count in the South or Meridian-line from S Northward, and set the figure 5 thereto, from which take the distance to S, and enter it in the Traverse-quadrant on the thi [...]d point, that one foot resting thereon as at f, the other tur­ned about may but just touch C W, and the nearest distance [Page 77] from f to C S, is the difference of Longitude, which prick in the line S N from S to 5, and with it upon 5 in the South line, de­scribe an Ark at f: again, with S 5 from the South line, setting one foot at 5 in the line S N, describe another Ark at f crossing the former, and there is the point which hath the bearing and di­stance required, and that which is to be done is to finde the Course and Distance between d and f, which we have perfo [...]med before, the Course was 11d 55′ to the Southwards of the East, and the Distance about 61 leagues, and the greater Scale of equal parts might as easily have been shunned in this Chart, as in the Plain Chart, but then the Scale of Longitudes, or West Scale, must have sup [...]lied both, and the Latitude would have been transferred from the lesser to the greater, which is uncertain.

The maner of finding the difference of Longitude for a Course that lies East or West, was instanced in finding the point e, or it may be found with more certainty for Courses near the East or West, after the manner shewed in Page 32. Or having found the Departure from the Meridian first, make use of the Cosine of the middle Latitude, and with the Departure finde the difference of Longitude required, as you found the point e, or do it by the pen, as we shall afterwards shew, and then prick it down; or lastly it may be done in a Scheme apart, by this Proportion:

As the Secant of the Rumbe from the East or West:

Is to the Distance run

So is the Secant of the middle Latitude:

To the difference of Longitude

Admit a Ship sayl West and by South 3 degrees or 60 leagues from Latitude 41d, now by the dead reckoning she is in Latitude 38d 6 Centesms, the middle Latitude is 39d 53 Centesms: And let it be required to finde the difference of Longitude proper to this Course.

This we insist upon, because when a Course lyes nearer the East or West then a point, it cannot be so certainly found by the Tra­verse-quadrant, because the Compasses will cross that Rumbe very obliquely, having drawn the Quadrant A B C, prick the Course 11d 15′ from B to H, and draw C H, on it prick down 3d out of the West Scale in the Chart from C to F, and draw F D parallel to C A, then count the middle Latitude 39d 53 Cen­tesms, [Page 78] or 31′, from B to E, and draw C E, then is the extent C G the difference of Longitude required, to wit, if measured in the former Scale 3d 81 Centesms, and when the line C E falls above D, continue I D far enough.

[figure]

Illustration.

C I being Radius, C F is the Secant of the Rumbe from the East or West to that Radius, and it is also the Distance run, then also by the proportion of equality, C G being the Secant of the middle Latitude, it is also the difference of Longitude required; So also the Course being East or West, if C I being the distance be made Radius, then is C G the Secant of the Latitude to that Radius, the difference of Longitude required, but in this Scheme C I is the Departure from the Meridian in the former Course, which being given, neither the Rumbe nor Distance (both placed in the line C H) are necessarily required. And this I think suf­ficient to explain the Use of Mr. Wrights excellent Sea-Chart, commonly called Mercators, because Mercator a Dutchman, ha­ving obtained the making of the Chart from Mr. Wright, was the first that made Maps of the World upon that kinde of Projection.

We have hitherto kept a Reckoning upon both Charts, which might as well have been done upon some fitted Traverse-board, and thence removed into the Chart, as oft as it should be thought needful; And for the Preservation of the Chart it may also be noted, that a Course and Distance on either Chart may be measu­red without the use of Compasses, by the joynt help of a Ruler, having equal parts on the edge, of the same size as those we use for a Scale of Leagues, and also of a Semicircle (or Quadrant) of the Compass, printed in page 6, being cut through the Center, and near to the outward Divisions of the Limbe, fo [...] then laying the Ruler over any two places in the Chart, bring the Diameter of the Semicircle to lye along by the edge of the Ruler, so that the Center thereof may lye upon some Meridian, and the said Meri­dian passing under the Semicircle, it will be easily seen by view what Arch of the Semicircle is contained between the edge of the Ruler and that Meridian, which measureth the quantity of the Rumbe.

Then for the Distance count the difference of Latitude in some Meridian, suppose W N of the latter Chart above some Parallel drawn therein, as namely, above r B, suppose it ends at N, there set the Center of the Semicircle, so that the same degree of the Limbe thereof may lye over the Meridian underneath, as it did before in measuring the Rumbe, then lay the Ruler along by the Radius of the Semicircle, so that the beginning of the Rulers di­visions may be at the Center, and the distance from the Center of the Ruler to the Parallel (r B) above which the difference of La­titude was counted, being measured by view on the Ruler, sheweth the Distance required.

For East or West Distances.

Lay the edge of a cut sheet of Paper, Paste-board, &c. over the Center of a Quadrant, drawn in some corner or spare place of the Chart, and also over the complement of the Latitude counted from the East or West, and holding it so, count from the Center of the said Quadrant in the parallel the difference of Longitude, and laying the edge of the graduated Ruler to it, slide it so that the Ruler may lye over the difference of Longitude in the Paral­lel, and that the graduated beginning of it may make right Angles, or be perpendicular to the streight edge of the sheet of Paper be­fore [Page 80] laid over the Colatitude, and where the parallel in which the difference of Longitude was counted cuts the Ruler, it shews the Distance required; and the converse of this manner of work will also finde the Distance for any other Course, if you lay the cut Paper to the Rumbe from the Meridian, and place the difference of Latitude upon the sliding Ruler, and the Distance will be found in the Parallel, in which the Difference of Longitude was counted.

OF Sayling by the Arch of a GREAT CIRCLE.

THE foundation of this kinde of sayling supposeth a great Cir­cle, whose Center is the same with the Center of the Sphere, to pass through any two places propounded, the Arch of which great Circle on the Surface of the Sphere, is always somewhat less then the distance between the two places in the direct Rumbe that leads from the one to the other: Moreover, this great Arch makes several and different Angles with every Meridian, whereas the Rumbe always maketh the same Angle. Now the chief benefit of this kinde of sayling, is, that in an Eastwardly or Westwardly Course we may often shift the Latitude with good advantage, both in respect of time and way, and thereby be the better enabled to correct the Dead Reckoning: Now as he that on a Globe or a true Projection of the Sphere, would draw a line resembling the Rumb that passeth between any two places, must finde the Longitudes and Latitudes of many points through which it passeth, and then by the best diligence he can draw a bending line through all those Points, so also they that would draw a line in Mercators Chart re­sembling the great Arch which passeth between any two places, must finde the Longitudes and Latitudes of many Points through which it passeth, and then through all those Points in the Chart draw a curved line, which shall represent the great Arch, and being drawn, are to sayl as near it as they can, finding the respective [Page 81] Courses and Distances by which they are to sayl before the Rumb, doth vary considerably, whereas in truth it doth vary continually, though not very much in a reasonable run.

Now as Mercators Chart doth give all the Longitudes and La­titudes through which the Rumbe between any two places laid down thereon doth pass, which may also be found by this Pro­portion:

As the Meridional parts between both Latitudes:

Is to the whole difference of Longitude

So are the Meridional parts be [...]ween one of the Latitudes first gi­ven, and any other Latitude between both places:

To the difference of Longitude answering to the assigned interme­diate Latitude

And by altering the order of the Proportion, if the difference of Longitude were given, we might finde the Latitude answerable thereto; So likewise there are Projections of the Sphere which will give the Longitudes and Latitudes through which the great Arch doth pass, and from whence also we may raise Proportions for finding the same exactly by Calculation or Instruments, if the Geometrical performance be thought either troublesom, or not exact enough.

Because the Stereographick Projection doth very plainly repre­sent the Triangles on the Sphere, we shall therefore put one in­stance upon that Projection.

Let there be two places, the one is 50d North Latitude, as is the Lizard, the other in 36d 00′ South Latitude, and let the dif­ference of Longitude between them be 68d 30′.

First it is required to draw the great Arch in that Projection, and then to finde the greatest Latitude or Obliquity thereof, and the Distance in the said Arch, and thirdly to finde what Latitude it passeth through at 10d difference of Longitude from the place in South Latitude.

First with 60d of the lesser Chord in the following Scheme, de­scribe the outward Circle, and draw P S the Axis, and AE Q the Equinoctial, at right Angles; Prick off the South Latitude 36d from AE to T, and from Q to A. Prick 68d 30′, the difference of Longitude twice from S to D, a ruler over P and D, cuts the ex­tended Equator at the Center of the Meridian of the Lizard,

[Page 82]

whereon describe it, namely, the Arch P L S, then prick 40d the complement of the Lizards Latitude from P to Z, and twice from Q to F, over which and AE, a ruler will cut the Axis at I, with C I setting one foot in Z, cross the extended Axis at G, and there re­sting one foot, with the other describe Z L, then draw a Circle passing through the three points T L A, and it shall be the great Arch required.

Now to measure the greatest Latitude of it, a Perpendicular must be let fall from the Pole upon it, therefore where this Arch crosseth the Equinoctial as at H, is the Pole of the said Perpendi­cular: now to finde the Center wherewith to draw it, lay a ruler over P and H, and it cuts the Limbe at K, prick S K upward from K to a, and a ruler over P and a, will cut the Equator, being con­tinued at the Center of the said Perpendicular, where setting one foot, with the other describe the prickt Ark P e S.

1. A ruler over H and e, cuts the Limbe at O, and the Arch Q O being 59d 56′, is the greatest Latitude of the Arch, being the obliquity required.

2. From the Center of the great Arch, which happened at V, draw a line to C, and where it crosseth the Perpendicular as at r, [Page 83] is the Pole of the great Arch, a ruler over r and L cuts the Limbe at t, and the Arch T t being 105d 53′, is the Distance in the Arch required.

3. Prick 10d from S to n, and again to u, a ruler from P laid over n, and u, cuts the Equator at x the Pole, and z the Center of the Meridian to be drawn, upon which describe it, namely, the Arch S f P.

A ruler over x and f cuts the Limbe at m, and the Arch AE m being 22d 8′, is the Latitude of the great Arch required, to the difference of Longitude assigned.

Some Observations from the former Scheme.

1. That if those places be supposed to be both in one Hemi­sphere, and to have the Complement of the former difference of Longitude to a Semicircle, one & the same great Arch is still com­mon, and the distance is the Complement of the former distance to a Semicircle, as is evident in the Triangle P L A, in which the Angle L P A is the Complement of the former difference of Lon­gitude to a Semicircle, and the Arch L A is the complement of L B the former Distance, and the lesser Vertical Angle is common to both Triangles.

2. That the right Angled Triangle A Q E hath its Sides and Angles equal to the Sides and Angles of the Triangle B AE H, and therefore the Arch A E passeth through the like Latitudes in the North Hemisphere, that the Arch H B doth in the South.

3. That in any right Angled Spherical Triangle if it have one obtuse Angle, it hath also the Leg opposite to that Angle, and the Hipotenusal greater then Quadrants, and the contrary, and the other Leg will be less then a Quadrant, and subtend an acute Angle.

And that in stead of resolving such a Triangle we may, and actually do in Calculation, resolve a right Angled Triangle, in which all the parts besides the right Angle, are less then Qua­drants; This is evident in the two Triangles f W S and f e P, in which the right Angle at e and W, the Angle at f and the Perpen­dicular P e, or S W, is common to both Triangles.

But the Sides

  • f S
  • W f

are the complements of the Sides

  • f P
  • f e

to a Semicircle, and the Angle f S W, is the complement of the Angle [Page 84] f P e to a Semicircle, for it is equal to the two Angles A P e, and B P f, which together are equal to the complement of the Angle f P e to a Semicircle.

This being fore-noted, because these Arkes are tedious and troublesome to draw, we shall handle in the next place a proje­ction in Tangent lines, on the which, albeit we cannot project an entire Hemisphere, yet all may be very well thence supplyed.

First therefore if we suppose a Plain to be raised Perpendicular to the Axis of the world, and to pass through one of the pole points, and then place the eye at the Center-rayes issuing from the sight, through the supposed graduations of any Meridian, unto the Plain, shall be the Secants of the arches from the pole point, through which the sight passeth, and on the Plain meeting therewith shall project Tangent lines which because they grow infinite, it followes that one intire Hemisphere cannot be thus projected; moreover, the sight there will project any great Circle in a right line as followes from 91 Prop. 6 Book of Aguilonius: this Projection is applyed by Mr. Phillips to great Circle sailing, divers things by him not handled we shall adde, and then proceed to shew how the same may be otherwise performed.

First Example of two places in one Hemisphere.

Now let it be required to finde the Longitudes and Latitudes of the great Arch between the Lizard Latitude 50d, and Trinity Harbor in Virginia, Latitude 36d, difference of Longitude 68d 30′, draw G F and upon P as a Center, describe a Semicircle, prick the difference of Longitude 68d 30′ from F to N, draw P N.

Now for speedy Operation it will be convenient to have a line of natural Tangents on the sloap edge of a ruler, which, as before in the first Part, may be divided from a Quadrants Limbe, or rather made by an Instrument-maker, and such a one we suppose here used, out of which prick down P L 40d, the complement of the Lizards Latitude, and P T 54d the complement of the Latitude of Trinity Harbour, and draw T L, and it shall represent the great Arch between these two places; let fall a Perpendicular upon it from P, to do which make P W equal to P L, and in the middle between L and W, as at A, let fall the Perpendicular P A, the Arch F O shewes how far it will happen from the Lizard. Now if it were required to finde the Latitudes of this Arch for every [Page 85] 5d difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, then must the Arch O N be divided into every fifth degree from o, but more certainly prick the Radius in the Perpendicular from P to C, and draw C D parallel to A T; and thereto laying the Tangents on your ruler, prick down every fifth degree from C to D, then lay­ing the beginning of your Tangents over P, and every one of those graduations, you may by the view see what Latitude the Arch passeth through at every 5 degrees difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, for which purpose the Tangents on your ruler may be double numbred both with the Arch and its complement to which they belong.

Example. Laying the Ruler over 25 degrees, it cuts the Arch at e, and the extent P e being measured on the Tangents, is 41d 51′, being the complement of the Latitude of the Arch at that diffe [...]ence of Longitude, wherefore the Latitude of the Arch at 25d difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, is 48d 9′.

In like manner the Latitudes of the Arch for

00dDifference of Lon­gitude from the Perpendicular, is50d, 56′.
0550, 49
1050, 30
1549, 57
2049, 10
2548, 9
3046, 51
3545, 16
4043, 20
4541, 4
5038, 23

and is the same for the first ten degrees difference of Longitude on each side the Perpendicular, and also as far as the lesser Verti­cal Angle.

A second Example for two places in different Hemispheres.

In like manner, if we suppose Trinity Harbour to be in as much South Latitude, the difference of Longitude being the same, to wit, 68d 30′, place P L from P to I, and draw I T continued, and it shall represent the great Arch, being continued from I up­wards, runs from the Lizard towards the Equinoctial, and below T downwards, runs also from the supposed place in South Latitude [Page 86] towards the Equinoctial, where in this Projection it grows infi­nite.

Let fall the Perpendicular P Q equal to the Radius, and prick off the Tangents from Q downwards beyond R, parallel to H T, and if you set P I from P to K, so as to meet with H T, then you may measure the Latitude of the Ark on each side the Equator the the same way by laying the beginning of the Tangents on the edge of the Ruler to P, and laying the Ruler as before to every fifth degree of Longitude, thus the Latitudes of the Arch at

55dDifference of Lon­gitude from the Perpendicular, is44d, 43′
6040, 49
6536, 7
7030, 34
7524, 4
8016, 42
858, 33

We have continued the Tangents but to 65d at R for want of room, however without any great Excursions, the Latitudes of it may be found near the Equinoctial by this Proportion:

As the Tangent of the Perpendicular:

Is to the Cosine of the Angle adjacent

So is the Radius:

To the Tangent of the Arkes Latitude:

Example:

Let it be required to finde the Latitude of the Arch at 70 de­grees difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular.

The complement thereof is 20d, to the Tangent whereof draw a line from P, then the nearest distance from Q to the said line, is the Cosine of the said Angle, which prick from H to S, a ruler over P and S, cuts this Tangent-line Q R at 30 degrees 34 mi­nutes, and so much is the Latitude required, and at 90 degrees from the Perpendicular this Arch passeth over the Equinoctial.

A third Example for two places in the same Parallel; to wit, in the Latitude of 50 degrees, difference of Longitude 92 degrees 46 minutes.

The Angle I P K is equal to the difference of Longitude, wherefore the Perpendicular P H is the same as before, from [Page]

[figure]

which the Latitudes to00dDifference of Longtitude will be found to be59d, 56′
0559, 39
1059, 32
1559, 3
2058, 20
2557, 25
3056, 13
3554, 44
4052, 54
4550, 41

Thus we see this Projection will supply all the Cases that can be put, and is in effect no other then a Scheme for the carrying on of Proportions, and the Sphere; being thus reduced into right lines, we may thence raise Proportions for Calculating all that is requi­red. In the oblique-angled plain Triangle T P L, we have the two Sides T P and P L given, being the Tangents of the complements of both Latitudes, and the Angle comprehended T P L given, now we finde the other Angles at T and L by this Proportion:

As the sum of the two Sides: Is to their difference

So is the Tangent of the half sum of the opposite Angles:

To the Tangent of half their difference

which Proportion is demonstrated in many Books of Trigonome­trie; And so the two Sides of this Triangle are the Tangents of the Complements of the Latitudes.

But as the sum of the Tangent of any two Arkes:

Is to the difference of those Tangents

So is the sine of the sum of those Arkes:

To the sine of the difference of those Arkes:

See this demonstrated in Mr. Newtons Trigonometria Brittanica.

Again the third tearm being the Tangent of the half sum of the opposite Angles, in other Language is the Cotangent of half the contained Angle.

Lastly, the half sum of the unknown Angles being added to their half difference, the sum makes the greater, and the difference the lesser of those unknown Angles. In like manner if the said half difference be added to half the contained Angle, the sum is the greater of those Angles next the Perpendicular, and the difference is the lesser, and these Angles we call the Vertical Angle.

The Proportion for finding the Perpendicular, having the Hi­potenusal or Colatitude, and the Vertical Angle given, is:

As the Radius: Is to the Cosine of the Vertical Angle

So is the Cotangent of the Latitude:

To the Targent of the Perpendicular

Then ass gning the difference of Longitude from the Perpendi­cular, we nave before set down the Proportion for finding the Arks Latitude, and both these Proportions may be brought into one, and so the Method of Calculation arising out of these Con­siderations, suns thus:

1. For a Parallel or East and West Course.

As the Cosine of half the difference of Longitude:

Is to the Tangent of the common Latitude

So is the Cosine of the Ark of Longitude from the Perpendicular:

To the Tangent of the Arks Latitude answering thereto

Again, in all other Cases for the Vertical Angles.

As the Sine of the sum of the Complements of both Latitudes:

Is to the Sine of their difference

So is the Tangent of the Complement of half the difference of Longitude:

To the Tangent of half the difference of the Vertical Angles

which Ark thus found.

Adde to half the difference of Longitude, the sum is the great­er Vertical Angle, which if it exceed the difference of Longitude, the Perpendicular falls without, and this Ark comprehends the whole Angle between the Perpendicular and both Colatitudes, the difference between the fourth Proportional Ark and half the diffe [...]ence of Longitude, is the Angle between the lesser Colati­tude and the Perpendicular, being the lesser Vertical Angle.

When one place is in South Latitude, and the other in North, the first and second tearms of this general Proportion change pla­ces, and the Sine of the sum becomes the Sine of the difference, and this that, as will be found if you make one of the contain­ing Sides greater then a Quadrant, the Polar distance in stead of the Colatitude, and then for the Sine of an Ark greater then a Quadrant, take the Sine of that Arks complement to a Semicir­cle, which may sometimes happen when both places are in one He­misphere, if the sum of the Complements exceed 90 degrees.

Secondly, the Latitudes of the great Ark are found by this Pro­portion, which is in a manner the same as for a Parallel Course.

As the Cosine of either of the Vertical Angles, but rather the lesser:

Is to the tangent of the latitude of that place to which it is adjacent

So is the Cosine of the Ark of difference of Longitude from the Per­pendicular:

To the Tangent of the Arks Latitude sought

Thus by this excellent Method of Calculation we dispatch that at two Operations, which Master Norwood and others do not attaine under seven or eight, which rendred the Sayling by the great Arch so difficult and laborious, that none cared to practise it. And this latter Proportion having two fixed tearms in it, will be performed on a Serpentine-line, or Logarithmical Ruler, with­out altering the Index or Compasses, which Proportion being va­ried, is carried on in the former Scheme:

As the Secant of either of the Vertical Angles:

Is to the Cotangent of the Latitude ad [...]acent thereto

So is the Secant of the difference of Longitude from the Perpendi­cular:

To the Cotangent of the Arks Latitude sought

In the former Scheme making the Perpendicular P A Radius, P T becomes the Secant of the Vertical Angle T P A to that Radius, and is also by construction the Tangent of the Comple­ment of the Latitude next that Angle, to another Radius, then by reason of the Proportion of Equality, which we have formerly handled, the Secant of any other Angle from the Perpendicular to the former Radius, as is P e, shall be also the Cotangent of the Arks Latitude to the latter Radius.

Also the former Scheme shews us how to delineate Proportions in Sines and Tangents, by framing of right-lined oblique Trian­gles; for as the Sine of the Angle at L is to its opposite Side T P a Tangent, so is the Sine of the Angle at T to its opposite Side P L another Tangent; and by the like reason Proportions in Sines a­lone, or in Equal parts and Sines, &c. may be carried on in the Angles and Sides of Plain Triangles.

Of the six parts of a right-angled Spherical Triangle, no more but four at a time can be laid down in right Lines and Angles.

As in the right-angled Triangle P A T, to wit, the right Angle [Page 91] at A, the Hipotenusal P T, the Perpendicular P A, and the Ver­tical Angle between T P A, so that the Angle at T being the Complement of the Vertical Angle, is not the Angle of Position in the Sphaere, nor is the Side A T the measure of the Distance on that side the Perpendicular, however both these Arks may be easily found.

Example for the Distance.

Prick the Radius of the Tangents from A to B, and place the extent, B P, being the Secant of the Perpendicular from A to E, from whence lines drawn to L and T, shall contain an Angle e­qual to the Distance between the Lizard and Trinity Harbour in the great Arch; To measure it, with 60d of the Chords, setting one foot at E, draw K M, which extent measured in the Chords sheweth the Distance to be 50d 9′ at 20 leagues to a degree, is 1003 leagues, the Rumbe between these two places is 74d 17′ from the Meridian, and the Distance of the Rumbe 1034 leagues, and after the same manner any part of it may be measured; and so likewise might the parallel Distance I V, which if we had room would be found to be 55 degrees and a half; Also the Distance I T would be found to be 74d 7′, the Complement whereof to a Semicircle being 105d 53′, would be the Distance between the Lizard and Trinity Harbour, as we supposed them, the one in South, the other in North Latitude.

The Proportion carried on to finde the Distance, is:

As the Radius: Is to the Sine of the Perpendicular

So is the Tangent of the Vertical Angle:

To the Tangent of the Distance

The Perpendicular A P is a Tangent to the Radius A B, and if we make the extent B P Radius, it then becomes a Sine, as is evident if you describe an Ark from P therewith; which R [...]dius if we should place from P outward beyond C, and suppose a Tangent erected thereon parallel to A T, then doth the extent A T become the Tangent of the fourth Proportional to that Radius, which that it might be measured, the Radius was pricked from A to E.

To finde the Angle of Position.

If the Hipotenusal and one Legg be given, the Proportion to finde the Angle next that Legg, would be:

As the Radius: Is to the Tangent of the Hipotenusal

So is the Tangent of the given Legg:

To the Cosine of its adjacent Angle

And so in the former Scheme, if we make T P Radius, which is also the Tangent of the Hipotenusal, then doth P A being the Tangent of the given Leg, become the Sine of the Angle P T A, which is the Complement of the Angle T P A; whence we may observe, that if a Perpendicular be raised at the end of the Tan­gent of the given Leg, the Tangent of the Hipotenusal being from the other end of the said Leg made the Hipotenusal opposite to the right Angle, the Angle included shall be the Angle sought; therefore having the Distance or Leg A T given, with its Radius A E, you may proportion out the Hipotenusal to that Radius, and with it setting one foot in T, cross A E with the other, from whence drawing a line to T, the Angle between it and A T, shall be the Angle of Position required.

Otherwise more readily:

Take the nearest distance from C to T P, and it shall be the Cosine of the Angle of Position, if we make E A Radius; where­fore upon A describe the prickt Ark n, a ruler from the Center E just touching it, cuts the Ark x n at n, which Ark measured on the Chords is 38d 49′, the complement whereof being 51d 11′ is the Angle of Position required, and so may all the other Angles of Position be found, if there were any need of them. The Propor­tion carried on, is:

As the Radius: Is to the Sine of the Vertical Angle:

So is the Cosine of the Perpendicular:

To the Cosine of the Angle of Position

If we make B P Radius, then is A B the Cosine of the Per­pendicular to that Radius, and the nearest distance from C to T P, is the Cosine of the Angle of Position to the Radius E A.

Thus we have shewed the use of this Pro [...]ection in more parti­culars then the Sea-man shall have occasion to use.

Lastly it may be noted, that in stead of pricking down a new Line of Tangents from the Perpendicular in every question that shall be put, that if the Perpendicular be placed in the Side P L, and thence the great Ark raised perpendicularly, as also a Line of Tangents to the common Radius, at the distance of the Radius [Page 93] from P, that there needs no new Tangents be p ickt down to eve­ry several question about the Arch, in other Cases whe [...]e the dif­ference of Longitude, as also the Latitudes of both places va [...]y.

THe former Pro [...]ection for places near the Equinoctial growes infinite and inconvenient, if therefore, as before, we suppose the eye at the Center of the Earth, and place a plain Parallel to the Axis, touching the Equinoctial in some point, then will the Equinoctial it self from that point be projected on each side in a Tangent-line, all the Meridians in that plain will be parallel to each other, and are Tangent-lines of several Radii, the Radius of each of which is the Secant of that Meridians distance from the touch point, any other great Circle passing through the Eye, w [...]ll on that Plain be projected in a right line. The Angle that every great Circle makes with the Equinoctial, I call the Obliquity of that Circle: thus the Angle of the Ecliptick and Equinoctial being measuted by the Suns greatest declination, is called the Obliquity of the Ecliptick; if this Plain toucheth the Equinoctial at the Meridian of the greatest Obliquity of any other Arch, then will the eye project the said Arch on this Plain in a right line, paral­lel to the Equinoctial, which being measured on their Secants, will all fall in the Circumference of a Circle; And though all this might be handled as a Projection, yet for brevity I shall onely shew you that a Scheme so made doth carry on the former Pro­portion for Calculating the Latitudes of the great Arch, and therefore one Quadrant onely may, and will supply all Cases whatsoever.

In the following Scheme, the line Q P is divided into a Line of Tangents, describe the Quadrant A R, and through every fifth degree of it draw lines from the Center, o [...] in stead of diving such a Quadrant, you may by the edge of the Ruler divide the lines A B and R B, each of them into a Tangent of 45d.

Examples for finding the Latitudes of the great Ark. 1. For a Parallel Course.

Admit there were two places in the Latitude of 50d, and their difference of Longitude were 70d, and it were required to finde rhe Latitudes of the great Ark between these places.

In all Cases we take the Line p Q to represent the Perpendi­cular, through 50d of the Tangents, draw the parallel of Latitude L E parallel to the Equinoctial Q AE, and in the Quadrant count half the difference of Longitude from A, to wit, 35d, and draw a line meeting with the parallel of Latitude at E, with the extent Q E draw the Arch E G, and it shall represent half the great Arch required; the nearest distance from a to Q E measured on the Tangent-line Q p, is 51d 49′, and so much is the Latitude of

[figure]

[Page 95] the Arch for 5d difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular on each side; also the nearest distance from b to Q R, is the La­titude of the Arch for 10d difference of Longitude on each side the Perpendicular.

And to save the trouble of taking out these Extents, and then measuring them, having the line of Tangents on the sloap edge of a ruler, you may slide it along perpendicularly to Q R, keeping the beginning of the Tangents always upon that line, and as it meets with the Ark at every fifth degree difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, you will see without trouble what Latitudes the Arch passeth through; and if no Line of Tangents be at hand, then the nearest distances from every fifth degree in the Arch to the Equinoctial line AE Q, may be placed on the Perpendicular Q P, and setting one foot in R, if with R Q you describe an Arch, as in page 28 of the First Part, by a ruler over R, and each Tangent placed on the Perpendicular, you may measure the Arks Latitude by a Line of Chords.

Thus the Latitudes of the Arch in the former Case for

00dDifference of Lon­gitude from the Perpendicular, is55d, 29′
555, 23
1055, 4
1554, 33
2053, 48
2552, 49
3051, 33
3550, 00

The Distance in the Arch is 846 leagues, but in the Rumbe 900 leagues, so following the Arch there is saved in the Distance 54 leagues, besides the altering of the Latitude 5d 29′, which is a great convenience in this East or West Course.

Another Example.

The Lizard and Fog-Bay in Newfound-land are both in the Latitude of 50 degrees, and the difference of Longitude be­tween them, according to the before-mentioned late Dutch Map, is 42 degrees: through 21 degrees of the Quadrant draw a line meeting with the parallel of Latitude at F, and with the Ex­tent Q F draw the Arch F P, which represents one half of the [Page 96] great Arch between these places, the Latitudes whereof

for 0dDifference of Longi­tude from the Per­pendicular, are51d, 50′.
551, 49
1051, 30
1550, 58
2050, 11

Another example for places that differ both in latitude and longitude.

In this case, if the greatest Obliquity be attained by the former Projection, or any other ready way, being the complement of the Perpendicular there found, there needs no more trouble but with the Tangent of the said Obliquity to describe an Arch upon Q as a Center, and it will shew all the Latitudes of the Arch as in the former case, also the Parallels of both Latitude meeting with this Arch, do therein shew you the quantities of the Vertical Angles, beyond which the Latitudes of the Arch are not required.

Let the Example be the same as in the Projection first handled, namely, between the Lizard and Trinity Harbour in Virginia, the Perpendicular A P measured on the Tangents, is 39d 4′, where­fore the complement thereof 50d 56′, is the Obliquity of the Arch, with the Tangent of the said Ark, setting one foot in Q, describe an Ark, in this latter Projection as T L, and it represents the great Ark between both places. Because the Perpendicular in this example fell within the arch e L, is supposed to happen as much

on the other side Q P, the lesserVertical Anglee L [...]s14d 38′
greatere T53 52.

And the Latitudes of this Arch measured as before, are the same as we found them in the other Projection, only here I have expres­sed the minutes in Centesimal parts of a degree.

00dDifference of Lon­gitude from the Perpendicular, is50d, 93′
0550, 82
1050, 50
1549, 95
2049, 17
2548, 15
3046, 85
3545, 27
4043, 33
4541, 07
5038, 38

In like manner, if these places be supposed to be in different Hemispheres, the Perpendicular P H in the former Projection measured on the Tangents, is 30d 4′, the complement whereof 59d 56′, is the Obliquity or greatest Latitude of the Arch, with the Tangent whereof draw the arch A E t l p, and it represents the arch

between these places and the lesservertical anglep lis 46d 23′
greaterp t65d 8′

be­ing the Complement of the greater to a Semicircle, because▪ should have happened as much below AE, as it doth above.

Part of this Arch AE t, is supposed to fall below the Equinoctail Line Q AE in the other Hemisphere, where it would pass through the like Latitudes as it doth here above it, and the Latitudes of this Arch measured as before, will be the same as we found, and before expressed them, in the use of the other Projection.

If one place be under the Equinoctial, and the other towards one of the Poles, the Latitude of the said place is the obliquity required; and therefore with the Tangent of the Latitude the Arch is to be described.

Places otherwise laid down.

THis way of laying down the great Arch by it greatest obliqui­ty, is universal, and when the first Projection is inconvenient in finding the Perpendicular, and thence the Obliquity, one of the Vertical Angles must be found, which being drawn in the Qua­drant from the Center, where it meets with the parallel of Lati­tude, gives a point passing through which the great Arch is to be drawn upon the common Center Q: Now this Vertical Angle may be either found on the former Scheme, or in an oblique plain Triangle, one side whereof sought shall be the Tangent of the half difference of the Vertical Angles, or in a Circular Scheme, as shall afterwards follow, by carrying on the Proportion before de­livered for Calculating the same either of these three ways; it would be too long to insist upon all, and by varying the Propor­tion used for finding the distance in the former Projection, it may also be found in this.

The former Scheme, albeit it may be demonstrated from Pro­jecting the Sphaere, yet it may be more easily and speedily done [Page 98] by shewing that it carries on the Proportions in Sines and Tan­gents before delivered for Calculating the Latitudes of the Arch, we need onely give one instance for places in the same Latitude.

The Arch G E in the former Scheme, is one of the Vertical Angles, or half the difference of Longitude for two places in the Latitude of 50d, whose difference of Longitude is 70d: the near­est distance from E to Q R, is the Cosine of half the difference of Longitude, making Q G Radius, which by construction is made equal to the Tangent of 50d, the common Latitude to another Radius, wherefore by reason of the Proportion of Equality, the Cosine of any Ark from the Perpendicular to the former Radius, to wit, the nearest distance from a to Q R, being the Cosine of 5d difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, is therefore equal to the Tangent of the Arks Latitude sought, to the latter Radius, proper to the given difference of Longitude, wherefore the Proportion is duly observed.

When the Obliquity or greatest Latitude is very great, it will be inconvenient to draw it the former way, this commonly hap­pens when places differ much in Latitude, but little in Longitude, however generally places may be laid down otherwise on the lat­ter Projection.

First if their difference of Longitude be less then 90 or 85 de­grees, they may be laid down without finding either of the Ver­tical Angles, by supposing this Plain to touch the Equinoctial for most conveniency at the Meridian of the greatest Latitude; and if they be in different Hemispheres, then may the Parallels be continued below AE Q.

But if their difference of Longitude be more then 90d, they may after the same maner be laid down by the difference of their Vertical Angles, whether they be in the same or both Hemi­spheres, as in the Projection first handled, the Angle V P T be­ing the difference of the Vertical Angles, doth as well help us to draw the great Ark T V I, as if the Angle I P T were given, be­ing the difference of Longitude greater then a Quadrant.

Example: Suppose I would finde the Latitudes of the great Arch between the Lizard in 50d of Latitude, and the Bermudas in Latitude 32d 25′, being both in the North Hemisphere, the difference of Longitude being 55d.

To lay down these places, draw the Parallel AE B passing tho­row the Tangent of 55 degrees, on which making the Secant of that Ark Radius, the Tangent of 32d 25′ is to be pricked down, to take out that Tangent to the said Radius.

[figure]

Note, That the line Q k passing through 55d of the Quadrant, counted from C, being continued till it meet with the Radius C D continued, is the Secant of 55d, and by Parallels drawn through the Tangents in the line Q C, will also be divided into a line of Tangents, wherefore through the Tangent of 32d 25′, draw a Parallel meeting with the Line or Secant of 55d drawn through the Quadrant at k, then is the extent Q k the Tangent to that Radius, which prick from AE to B, and draw L B, and it repre­sents the great Arch between these places, and the Latitudes thereof from the Equinoctial are measured by the Parallel Me­ridians, which are of several Radiusses, being Parallels drawn through the Tangents of 10d, 20d, 30d, &c.

Now to finde the Latitudes of the Arch from the Lizard for every 10d difference of Longitude.

In the first Parallel take the extent 1, 10, and place on the Se­cant of 10d from Q to a, also take the extent 2, 20, and place on the Secant of 20d from Q to b; or if these extents be too long, the extent f 2 being prickt on the Secant of 20d, shall reach from the Arch of the Quadrant to b, as before.

Now if you take the nearest distances from the points a b c d e to the Equinoctial AE Q, and measure them in the Meridian-line Q L, they there shew you the latitudes of the Arch required: thus the latitudes of the Arch or the points

afor10dDifference of Longi­tude from the Li­zard, is49d, 19′.
b 2047, 43
c 3045, 4
d 4041, 11
e 5053, 47

or the nearest distance from a to Q AE measured on the Scale of Tangents, is 49d 19′, the latitude of the Arch for 10d diffe­rence of longitude as before.

To these former ways, I shall lastly add the Geometrical way, which is void of all Caution or Excursion, and carries on the Pro­portions before delivered for Calculation.

[figure]

Let the Example be the same as before, between the Lizard and Trinity Harbour.

Upon the Center V with the lesser Chord, describe a Circle, and draw A S and B I parallel, the sum of the Complements of both Latitudes is 96d, the Sine whereof is the Sine of 84d its Complement to a Semicircle, which prick from A to S, and the difference of those Complements is 14d, make B D the Sine thereof, a ruler over S and D cuts the Diameter at E.

Out of the lesser Chords prick 68d 30′, the difference of Lon­gitude from B to H, a ruler over H and E cuts the Limbe at K, and the Arch B K is half the difference of the Vertical Angles, which prick from H to G and L, then if you divide the Semicircle B A into 90 equal parts, the Arch B G is the greater Vertical Angle, to wit, 53d 52′, and the Arch B L the lesser, to wit, 14d 38′. Now by help of this Scheme you may easily describe the great Arch in the former Quadrant, take the Extent B E from hence, being the Sine of the lesser Vertical Angle, which belongs to the greater Latitude, and upon A in the same Quadrant describe an Ark therewith at n, a ruler from the Center cuts the parallel of Latitude there at L, through which point the great Arch was drawn.

In the former Scheme, the Vertical Angles being the Angles at the Pole on each side the Perpendicular, are measured from the Point B, and the Chords of those Angles from the Point A, are the Cosines of those Angles; and so the extent A L is the Cosine of the lesser Vertical Angle, which prick from A in the line A S, the point found we may call the Vertical point; then prick down the Sines of every fifth degree from 90, as of 85d 80d &c, in the line I B, from I towards B, and laying a ruler over the Vertical Point, and all those Sine Points divide the Diameter into as many points, then prick down the Sine of the Latitude, to wit, 50d in the Semicircle A B, from A upwards towards B, and a ruler over the said Latitude point, and all the former points found in the Diameter, will cut the under Semicircle B A in as many points or Arkes more, which being counted or measured from B downwards towards A, are the respective Latitudes of the great Arch sought.

Nota, if a line of sines equal to the diameter be graduated on the floap edge of a ruler, the sines in the line B I may be easily pricked [Page 102] down with the pen, by the edge thereof without Compasses, and the Arkes in the under Semicircle B A, may be readily measured by view, by laying the beginning of that line of Sines to the point B, and moving the edge of the ruler to each respective Ark before found in the said Semicircle.

Here note, that a Semicircle being divided into 90 equal parts, the distances of each degree from one end of the Diameter, are Sines of those Arkes, the whole Diameter being their Radius, wherefore the use of Sines is as Geometrical as the use of Chords.

In the same Scheme the Reader may first finde the Perpendi­cular, and then the Distances on each side of it, by Proportions before set down.

Now for the Latitudes of the great Ark.

Having some of these ways found the Latitudes of the Arch, make a Mercators Chart for your Voyage, laying down the two places, suppose the Lizard at L in the following Chart, in the Latitude of 50 degrees, and Trinity Harbour at T in the Lati­tude of 36 degrees, the difference of Longitude, to wit, L M, be­ing 68 degrees and a half, then because the Perpendicular falls between both places, count off the lesser Vertical Angle 14 de­grees 63 Centesms from L to P, and there raise the Perpendi­cular P R.

This following Chart we have made as large as the page would admit, and having a Meridian-line fitted to the degrees of Lon­gitude in that Chart, by the edge thereof on the Perpendicular P R, you may prick down the Latitudes of the Arch before found, and 5 degrees difference of Longitude on each side of the Perpen­dicular at a time, and thereby graduate the respective Points or Crosses through which the curved prickt line is drawn.

Example.

The Latitude of the Arch at 30d difference of Longitude from the Perpendicular, is 46d 85 Centesmes, at which in the Meridian line P R is set the letter a; with the extent P a setting the Com­passes at 30 in the line L M, describe a small cross at 9: Again, with the extent P 30, setting one foot at a, describe another cross or little Ark at 9: thus may all the rest be found, through all which

[Page 103]

you may draw a curved line which shall run in the Chart near the great Arch; And now the work to be done, is to finde either by Calculation, or upon the Chart, all the respective Courses and distances from Point to Point, and to sayl as near the said Arch as you can.

Now to the apprehension the right Line L T will seem nearer then to sayl along by the prickt Arch, also it may seem improba­ble that a Ship bound from the Lizard to Trinity Har­bour in Virginia, being a place nearer the Equino­ctial by 14 degrees of La­titude, should yet run into a more Northwardly Lati­tude then the Lizard.

To which I answer, That Mercators Chart being no Projection of the Sphere, doth not represent things to the fancy as they are in the Sphere, but as they are accommodated to that Chart, by which Trinity Harbor in that Chart bears from the Lizard 74d 17′ from the Meridian, which is above 6½ points to the Westwards of the South, to wit, West and by South ¼ of [Page 104] a point, and one degree 39 minutes more Southwardly, and the Distance in the Rumbe is 1034 leagues, whereas the Distance in the Arch, if it could be precisely followed, is 1003 leagues, and following it from point to point, through every 5 degrees differ­ence of Longitude from the Perpendicular, it is 1020 leagues al­most, being less then the Distance in the Rumbe by 14 leagues, as appears by Calculation or the Chart it self. The respective Courses and Distances to be sayled.

  Course. Distance.
  Deg. Min. Leagues. Parts.
FromL to 180, 25to the Westwards of the North60, 06
1 284, 14½63, 86
2 388, 00½61, 02
3 488, 00½to the West­wards of the South61, 02
4 584, 14½63, 86
5 680, 14½64, 88
6 776, 2866, 66
7 872, 5169, 18
8 968, 5672, 32
9 1065, 3069, 20
10 1161, 3281, 40
11 1259, 0087, 76
12 1355, 0293, 86
13 T52, 2077, 88
   Whole Distance 1019, 96.

This Example serves fully to explain the Sailing by the great Arch, though it might not be safe to follow it, by reason of haling too near the Coast of Ireland.

OF Arithmetical Navigation.

ALl performances by the Pen require the help of some Ta­bles, by which the Question proposed may be speedily re­solved, if such Tables be at hand, and if no other Table be at hand but that of Natural Sines, it will serve to do the whole work; and how such a Table may be made, or the Sine of any Ark at command, we shall handle.

For conveniency and dispatch, there follows a Brief Table of Natural Sines, Tangents and Secants, to every one of the eight Points of the Compass, and their Quarters from the Meridian, and such a kinde of Table (but false printed) is in the Works of Maetius, the use whereof he explains in some of the following Propositions.

Given.Sought. 
1. The Longitudes and Latitudes of two placesRumbewhich is required at the beginning of a Voyage
Distance
2. The Rumb and Distance givenDifference of Lati­tude.whereby Dead Rec­koning kept.
 Departure from the Meridian.
3. Difference of La­tude and RumbeDeparture from the MeridianWhereby the Dead Reckoning is cor­rected.
 Distance.
4. Difference of La­tude and DistanceRumbe
Departure 

To give the difference of Latitude and Departure, whereby in some Cases to correct the Dead Reckoning, is the same with the first Proposition, and that we shall handle last.

5. Rumbe.Difference of Latitude.
Departure.Distance.
6. Departure.Rumbe.
Distance.Difference of Latitude.

These two last Propositions are of small use.

Some Examples of the Use of the said Table. 1. In keeping the Dead Reckoning.

As the Radius: Is to the Distance run

So is the Cosine of the Rumbe: To the Difference of Latitude:

The Table of Sines is numbred with the Points of the Com­pass, on the left side in the Variation Column from the bottom upward, and shew the difference of Latitude to 1000 leagues sayling upon any Rumbe, taking the figures that stand against the Point of the Compass as far as the Comma, and the other two fi­gures beyond it may be taken in, if more preciseness be required; so if a Ship sayl 1000 leagues South South West, being the se­cond Point from the Meridian, count the same in the Variation Column upward, and against it in the Sines you will finde the dif­ference of Latitude is 923 leagues and 87 parts more of another league, divided into 100 parts.

But if the difference of Latitude be required for any other Di­stance; multiply the Sine of the given Point by the Distance run, cutting off three figures from the Product.

Example.

If the Ship sayls 60 leagues on that Course, the difference of Latitude is 55 leagues and 38 Centesms, multiply 923 by 60 and the Product, cutting off three places, is 55, 380.

To finde the Departure from the Meridian, the Proportion is,

As the Radius: Is to the Distance run:

So is the Sine of the Rumbe: To the Departure

Example.

If a Ship sayl 1000 leagues South South West, count the Point sayled in the Separation Column downward, being the third Co­lumn and on the right hand of the Sines, and you will in the Co­lumn of Sines finde the Departure required to be 382 leagues 68 Centesms; But if a Ship sayl but 60 leagues on that Course, mul­tiply 382 thereby, cutting off the three last places, and you will finde the Separation or Departure required to be 22 leagues, 92 Centesms, or 22, 920 leagues.

PointsSinesSepar.TangentsSecantsAnglesSines quintupled deg. parts
¾49, 07¼49, 121001, 202d, 48m ¾2, 45
½98, 02½98, 481004, 845, 37 ½4, 90
¼146, 73¾148, 321010, 948, 26 ¼7, 33
7195, 091198, 911019, 5911, 159, 75
¾242, 98¼250, 481030, 8914, 3 ¾12, 14
½290, 28½303, 361044, 9916, 52 ½14, 51
¼336, 89¾357, 801062, 0819, 41 ¼16, 84
6382, 682414, 211082, 3922, 3019, 13
¾427, 55¼472, 961106, 2125, 18 ¾21, 37
½471, 39½534, 521133, 8828, 7 ½23, 56
¼514, 10¾599, 361165, 9630, 56 ¼25, 70
5555, 573668, 171202, 6833, 4527, 77
¾595, 70¼741, 651245, 2836, 33 ¾29, 78
½634, 39½820, 681293, 6439, 22 ½31, 71
¼671, 56¾906, 341349, 6142, 11 ¼33, 57
4707, 1041000, 001414, 2145,35, 35
¾740, 96¼1103, 321489, 0847, 48 ¾37, 04
½773, 01½1218, 481576, 3250, 37 ½38, 65
¼803, 21¾1348, 361678, 6853, 26 ¼40, 16
3831, 4751496, 601799, 9556, 1541, 57
¾857, 73¼1668, 371945, 1459, 3 ¾42, 88
½881, 91½1870, 732121, 3661, 52 ½44, 09
¼903, 99¾2114, 202338, 8864, 41 ¼45, 19
2923, 8762414, 212613, 1267, 3046, 19
¾941, 53¼2794, 762968, 3470, 18 ¾47, 08
½956, 94½3296, 503445, 6973, 7 ½47, 84
¼970, 03¾3992, 244115, 5675, 56 ¼48, 50
1980, 7875027, 335125, 8378, 4549, 03
¾989, 17¼6741, 446808, 5281, 33 ¾49, 45
½995, 18½10153, 6610202, 3284, 22 ½49, 75
¼998, 79¼20355, 4820380, 1587, 11 ¼49, 93
Variation      

Here note, that though the distance sayled be given in Leagues, yet the table of Sines may be so altered that the difference of Lati­tude [Page 108] (and Departure) may be found in degrees and Centesmes, and that onely be multiplying all the figures in the Column of Sines by the Number 5, for which purpose we added the last Column of quintupuled Sines, in which the whole degrees are distinguished from the Decimal parts.

Example:

If a Ship sayl 1000 Leagues South South-west, against the second Point counted upward, we shall finde the difference of Latitude to be 46d 19 Centesmes, but counted downward we shall finde the Departure from the Meridian to be 19 degrees 13 Centesmes, which Numbers multiplyed by 60, cuting off five places towards the right hand, give the difference of Latitude and Departure in that Course for 60 leagues to be

  • 2d, 77140Parts Diff. of Lat.
  • 1, 14780 Departure

of which results we need take no more places then

  • 2, d 77.
  • 1, 14 or 1d, 15.

By these two Propositions the Dead Reckoning (to be ap­plyed to the Plain Chart) may be kept after the form prescribed by Mr. Norwood, and accordingly the difference of Latitude and Departure from the Meridian is here expressed in degrees and Centesmes for the three Traverses from Tenariff towards Nicholas Island, which we made our former Example.

CourseDistance in leaguesNorthSouth Deg. Cent.EastWest d Cent.
S S W60, 2, 77 1, 15
W S W80, 1, 53 3, 69
S b E ½ E53, 2, 530, 770, 00
   6, 830, 774, 84

When some Courses increase the Latitude, and others decrease it, the difference between the North and South Column (found by substracting the lesser from the greater) gives the difference of Latitude, so likewise the difference of the East and West Columnes give the Departure, which in this Example is 4d 07, this difference of Latitude and Departure substracted out of the whole difference of Latitude and of Longitude between the said two Islands, there rest 4d 17 Centesmes difference of Latitude between the Ship and St. Nicholas Island, and 3d, 93 difference of Longitude, by [Page 109] which the Course from the Ship to the said Island, will be found to be 43d, 28 Centesms to the West-wards of the South, and the distance 5d, 73 being about 114 leagues and a half, as shall after­ward follow.

The difference of Latitude and the Rumbe given, to finde the Departure from the Meridian and distance.

As the Radius: Is to the difference of Latitude

So is the Tangent of the Rumbe:

To the Departure from the Meridian

And so is the Secant of the Rumbe: To the distance

Example. For the Departure.

Let the instance be the same as in page 24, where we suppose the Course to be 3 points from the Meridian, to wit, S W b S, and the corrected difference of Latitude to be 2 degrees 24 minutes, or 2 degrees 4 tenths, or 40 Centesms, by which multiplying 668, the Tangent belonging to 3 Points in the former Table, the result cutting off 5 figures, is 1d 60320, wherefore the Departure from the Meridian is 1 degree 6 tenths▪

For the Distance.

In like manner the Secant of three points, to wit, 1202 being multiplyed by the difference of Latitude 2d, 40, cuting off 5 figures is 2d, 88480, wherefore the distance is 2 degrees 88 Centesmes at 20 Leagues to a degree, is 50 leagues, and three quarters, or 50, 76.

For keeping a reckoning by Longitude (which is applyable to Mercators Chart and removes the error of the Plain Chart) the Table of Meridional parts were added at the end of the Book for working of this Proportion.

As the Radius: Is to the Tangent of the Rumbe

So are the Meridional parts between both Latitudes:

To the difference of Longitude

Which Proportion requires the difference of Latitude to be first found, and then by help of the Table of Meridional parts at the end of the Book, the difference of Longitude may be found, which Table being made but to every second Centesm, hath half the difference set down at the bottom of the Page, which added to the Meridional parts of any even Centesm above it, makes the Meridional parts for each odd Centesm, thus the Meridional parts [Page 110] for 25d 22 is 26, 076, whereto adding 11, the sum being 26, 087 are Meridional parts for 25d 23 Centesms, in the first Example of the Traverse the difference of Latitude is 2d 77 Centesms.

The Latitude of Tenariff is28dMeridional parts29d, 186
The Latitude of the Ships place is25, 2326, 087
The Meridional parts between both Latitudes, are3, 099

Which being multiplied by the Tangent of the second Point, to wit, 414, cutting off 6 places (three by reason the Radius is 1000, and three more for the Decimal parts of the Meridional Number) the amount being 1d, 282986, shews that the differ­ence of Longitude is 1 degree 28 Centesms, of which there may be a Column of East and West kept, like as was done for the De­parture; and this casting up of the Longitude may be readily done also on the Logarithmical Ruler, or by Mr. Phillips his late Tables for that purpose without Calculation, whereof we made mention in Page 37.

We have before said, that a Table of Sines is sufficient to sup­ply all Calculation, though o [...]er Tables may be more ready for dispatch when they are at hand, as we have shewed concerning the Table of Meridional parts in Page 48.

Out of it the Secants are made by this Proportion:

As the Cosine of any Arch proposed: Is to the Radius

So is the Radius: To the Secant of the given Arch

Which Proportion holds backwards to finde the Arch in the Table of Sines, if a Secant were given at adventure, and the Arch required.

Also out of it the Tangents are made by this Proportion:

As the Cosine of an Arch: Is to the Sine of the said Arch

So is the Radius: To the Tangent of the Arch proposed

Which Proportion doth not hold backwards to finde the Arch if a Tangent were given, in which Case the Secant may be found, and thereby the Arch, for the square of a Tangent more the square of the Radius, is equal to the square of the Secant. In this Case we have also the Propo [...]tion of the Cosine to the Sine given (be­ing the same with that of the Radius to the Tangent) and the sum o [...] their squares given (being equal to the square of the Radius) which very Case is reduced to a double equation in the 33d Que­stion of Mr. Moores Algebraick Arithmetick, and by which the [Page 111] Radius and a Tangent being given, either the Sine or Cosine may be found, without finding the Secant.

If such a Proportion as this were proposed:

As the Radius: Is to the Tangent of an Arch

So is the Tangent of another Arch:

To the Tangent of a fourth Arch

It might be resolved thus, without making a Table of Tangents: Make the Product of the Radius, and of the Cosine of the second Ark the Divisor, and the product of the Sines of the second and third Ark, and of the Cosine of the third Ark the dividend, and the Quotient will be the Tangent of the fourth Ark sought.

In like maner, if all those tearms were Tangents, the Product of the Radius Sine and Cosine of the first Ark would be the Divisor.

And the Product of the Sines, and Cosines of the second and third Ark, the Dividend whereby might be found, the Quotient being the Tangent sought, and consequently the Arch answering thereto; after the like manner with due regard to the Proportion for making the Secants, any Secant might be supplyed, and a Pro­portion wholly in Secants by turning those Arkes into their com­plements, is changed wholly into sines, or two tearms being Secants are changed into Sines by altering the places or order of those tearms, and their Arkes into their complements.

How to Calculate a Table of Natural Sines.

How to make the Sine of any Arke at pleasure, Snellius in his Cyclometria hath shewed, without making many such Sines as are not required, in which he went beyond all fo [...]mer Writers, one way he hath holds true as far as 30d of the Quadrant, out of which Sines their Cosines may be made, and so the Quadrant filled from 60d to 90d, and then by finding the Sine of the double Ark it may be supplyed from 30d to 60d, but in regard the performance is very tedious, and therefore not to be prosecuted in the Con­struction of a whole Table, we shall omit to mention it; another way he hath which doth not hold true to above 1/12 part of the Quadrant so that when a great Ark near the end of the Quadrant is given, he findes the Cosine thereof first, and thereby the Sine, or if the Ark be remote or about the middle of the Quadrant, he findes the Sine of the eighth or some such part of it, and then by finding the Sine of the double Ark, &c. backwards he findes the [Page 110] [...] [Page 111] [...] [Page 112] Sine sought; but how to Calculate a whole Table by Proportion with ease, is attained unto by our worthy Countrey-man Mr. Mi­chael Darie, who discovered the same in the year 1651, and com­municated unto me the Proportions for that purpose long since, whose method we shall now insist upon.

1. The readiest way is to assume the Proportion of the Diame­ter of a Circle to its Circumference to be known, and to be in the Proportion of 113 to 355 (of which see Maetius his Practical Geo­metry) which two Numbers are easily remembred, being the three first odde figures of the Digits, each of them twice wrote down and cut asunder in the middle.

2. It is most convenient that the Radius or whole Sine should be an Unit with Cyphers, and so the Proporrtion of the Diameter to the Circumference, found by the two Numbers above, is such as 2000000, to 6283185, so far true; and to finde it true to as many places of figures as you please, consult Dr. Wallis his Wri­tings, or Hungenius de Magnitudine Circuli.

3. The Sine of one Minute or Centesm doth so insensibly differ from the length of the Arch to which it belongs, that the length of the Arch of one Minute or Centesm may be very well taken to be the Sine thereof, and in the largest Tables that ever were published, differs nothing therefrom, wherefore a Minute being the 21600 part of the Circumference of a whole Circle, the like part of the number 6283185 being 290, is the Sine of 1 Minute.

4. You may finde the Cosine of one Minute by substracting the square of the Sine of one minute from the square of the Radius, the square root of the remainder is the Cosine of one minute.

5. The Sine and Cosine of one Minute being thus given, all the rest of the Sines in the Quadrant may be calculated by Mr. Daries excellent Sinical Proportion, which runs thus:

If a rank of Arches be equi-different,

As the Sine of any Arch in the said rank: Is to the sum of the Sines of any two Arks alike remote from it on each side

So is the Sine of any other Arch in the said rank: To the sum of the Sines of the two Arches next it on each side, having the like com­mon difference

And in a Semicircle we may make the Radius the middlemost of the three Arches, and the two Arches on each side of it shall be [Page] Arches one of them less by a Minute, and the other of them grea­ter by a minute then a Quadrant, the same Sine being common to both Arches, by reason whereof it will follow from the former Proportion, that

As the Radius: Is to the double of the Cosine of one minute:

So is the Sine of one minute: To the Sine of two minutes and of 00 ∷

And so is the Sine of 2 minutes: To the sum of the Sines of 3 mi­nutes and of one minute

From which sum taking the Sine of one minute, the remainder is the Sine of 3 minutes; And so also by the former Proportion,

Is the Sine of 3 minutes: To the sum of the Sines of 2 minutes and 4 minutes ∷ and so on successively.

In which excellent Proportion, because the first tearm is the Radius, Division is shunned, and because the s [...]cond tearm varies not, having multiplied it by all the 9 Digits, the whole Calcula­tion will then be performed by Addition and Substraction; But if you will finde the Sines of Arks near the end of the Quadrant first, the same Proportion continues.

As the Radius: Is to the double of the Cosine of one minute

So is the Cosine of the said minute; To the sum of the Cosines of two minutes, and of 00, the Cosine whereof is the Radius:

And so is the Cosine of two minutes: To the sum of the Cosines of three minutes, and of one minute

And so is the Cosine of 3 minutes: To the sum of the Cosines of 4 mi­nutes, and of 2 minutes, and so on successively.

Note also, that having made the Sines of the five first and last degrees, and their quarters, the intermediate Sines may well e­nough in a Table not very large be supplied, by dividing the dif­ferences proportionally, especially for the five first degrees of the Quadrant, in which the differences do but very little differ from each other: If besides the Sines of the five first and last degrees, and their Minutes or Centesms, there be moreover given in store the Sine of every tenth degree in the Quadrant, which may be found by the former Proportions (after the Sine of the fifth de­gree is found) the Sine of any other Arch whatsoever without ma­king any more Sines in a successive order, may by help of those in store be readily calculated, by reason no Arch in the Quadrant can be given, but it will be within five degrees or less of some known Sine, the Arch of that Sine we must make the middle [Page 114] Arch, and the Sine and Cosine of the Arch of difference between the middle Arch, and the given Arch, is by supposition already in store, and it will hold:

As the Radius: Is to the Cosine of the Arch of Difference

So is the Sine of the mean or middle Arch: To the half sum of the Sines of the extream Arches on each side of it alike remote, where­of the given Arch is one

Again, As the Radius: Is to the Sine of the Ark of difference

So is the Cosine of the middle Arch: To the half difference of the Sines of the said extream Arches

The half sum of those Sines added to their half difference, makes the Sine of the greater of those extream Arches, and their difference makes the Sine of the lesser of those extream Arches, one of which is the Sine of the Arch sought.

Admit in this latter Proportion it were required to produce the fourth tearm so, as that it should be the whole difference of the Sines of the Extream Arches, then must half the Radius be the first tearm, being equal to the Sine of 30d, which is the Cosine of 60d, and therefore if we make the middle Arch 60d, by reason of the Proportion of equality in the two first tearms, it follows that the Sine of the Ark of Distance of either of the extreams from 60d, is equal to the difference of the Sines of those extream Arches, and consequently having all the Sines under 60d made, all the rest a­bove it are made by Addition onely: for instance, the Sine of 10d is equal to the difference of the Sines of 50d, and of 70d, and therfore being added to the Sine of 50d, shal make the Sine of 70d.

So likewise in the former of those Proportions, if you would have the last tearm to be the sum of the Sines of the Extreams, half the Radius must be the first tearm, and then making the mean or middle Arch to be 30d, by reason of the Proportion of equali­ty between the Sine thereof and of half the Radius, it follows that the Cosine of the Ark of Distance of either of the extreams from 30d, is equal to the sum of the Sines of those extream Arches, from which taking the lesser of those Sines, the remainder is the greater; hence it follows that if the Sines of the first and last 30d of the Quadrant be given, from them all the Sines between 30d and 60d may be made by substraction. Let the three Arks be 20D, 30d, 40d, the Sine of 80d being the Cosine of 10d, the distance of these Arks from the middlemost, is also equal to the sum of the [Page 115] Sines of 20d and of 40d, from which sum Substracting the sine of 20d the remainder is the sine of 40d; or the Sines of the last 60d of the Quadrant being given, by the same reason the Sines of the first 30d may be found by Substraction, as in the present instance, if out of the sine of 80d you substract the sine of 40d, the remainder is the sine of 20d.

From the first Sinical Proportion, making the Radius the Sine of the middlemost of three equi-different Arks, it follows:

That as the Radius: Is to the sum of the Sines of the two arches next it on each side ∷ Or rather by two other tearms in the same Pro­portion, As half the Radius: Is to the sine of either of those arks

So is the sine of the said arch: To the sum of the Radius, and of the Sine of a fourth arch, having the same common difference

Consectary.

Wherefore the Rectangle of half the Radius, and of the sum of the Radius, and of the sine of any other Arch, is equal to the square of the sine of the middle Arch, from thence it followes, that the sine of any Arch in the Quadrant being given, we may by this Rule, and extracting the square root, perpetually bisect or finde the sine of the middle Arch between it and 90d, and so run up very speedily towards the end of the Quadrant; of which sine so found, the Cosine may be found by another extraction, and then you have the sine of as small an Arch as you please, near the beginning of the Quadrant, from which by Proportion, in regard the length of the sine and of the Arch to which it doth belong, have no sensible difference, you may finde the sine of one minute or Centesme, and thence by the former Proportions raise a whole Table of Sines to as large a Radius as you please, albeit the Proportion of the Diameter to the Circumference were wholly unknown, which not­withstanding hereby might be found, for having made a sine to a very small part of the Quadrant, the double thereof is the side of a Polygon inscribed, and by Proportion:

As the Cosine so found: Is to its Sine ∷ So is the Radius: To the Tangent of the Arch to which the small Sine belongs

The double of which Tangent is the side of the like Polygon cir­cumscribed, the length of the Arch of the Circle contained be­tween the sides of these two Polygons, being greater then the side of the inscribed Polygon, and lesser then the side of the circum­scribed Polygon.

In finding the Sine of any middle Arch by the former Consecta­ry, to shun the trouble of multiplying, we may assume the Radius to be 2, with a competent number of Cyphers, then the Sine of 30d, because it is half the Radius, will be an Unit with as many Cyphers, then to finde the Sine of 60d to that Radius, to the Sine of 30d, prefix to the left hand the number 2, and annex the Cy­phers in the Radius to the right hand, and the square root of the number so made, shall be the Sine required, and the like for fin­ding the Sine of the middle Arch between the Radius and the Sine of any other Arch given, and retaining the Radius 2 with Cyphers, the difference between the Sine of any Arch given and the Radius, having the figures of the Radius annexed thereto, the square root of the number so composed, shall be the Cosine of the middle Arch; or we may deliver it as a Consectary from former Proportions:

That the Rectangle of half the Radius, and of the difference between the Sine of any Arch given and the Radius, shall be equal to the square of the Cosine of the middle arch, to any Radius whatsoever.

We forbear to suit Arithmetical Examples to the fore-going Proportions and Consectaries, supposing the Reader furnished with so much Arithmetick, as that he can extract the square root, and work the Golden Rule, or Rule of Three. See page 12 of the First Part.

Of Books of Tables.

Such Tables as have a degree divided into 100 parts or Cen­tesms, are to be preferred before those that divide the degree but into 60 Parts, Minutes or Sexagesms, because they are more exact in calculation, and more speedy in finding the part proportional; and it were convenient for a Book of Tables to be so contrived, that the Natural Tables of Sines, Tangents, and Versed Sines to 90d, might stand against the Logarithmical Tables of Sines and Tangents in a portable Book, to be had by it self, to which might be added a Table of the Meridian-line to each, or every second Centesm, with Tables of the Suns Declination, Right Ascension, and of the Longitudes, Latitudes, Declinations, and Right Ascen­sions of some of the principal fixed Stars, and of the Longitudes and Latitudes of places; but those that have the Logarithmical Tables of Numbers, Sines and Tangents without the Natural, may supply the want of them.

Example. 1. Let the Natural Sine of 38d be required, the Loga­rithmical Sine of that Ark is 9, 789342, because we may make the Radius of the Natural Sines to be an Unit, and all the rest to be Decimal parts thereof, reject the first figure of the Logarithm or Characterisk, being 9, and seek the remaining figures of the Logarithmical Sine, to wit, 789342, amongst the Logarithms of absolute Numbers, and you will finde the absolute Number an­swering thereto to be 61566 nearest, and that is the Natural Sine of 38 degrees required.

2. The Table of the Meridian-line may be supplied by this Pro­portion, raised out of Mr. Bonds Additions to Mr. Gunters Works

As 75795: Is to

  • 60 ∷
  • 100 ∷

So is the difference of the Logarithmical Tangents of 45d, and of an Ark compounded or made of 45d, and of half the given Ark:

To the Meridional parts belonging to the given Ark

If you use the number 60, you will make such a Sexagesimal Table as Mr. Wrights or Mr. Norwoods, but if you use the number 100, then you will produce a Centesimal Table like Mr. Gunters, or that in Mr. Roes Tables, in which the Arks to which the Meri­dional Tables are fitted, are degrees and every other minute, but the Tabular Numbers are degrees and decimals, being [...] very good Table of that kinde, and much fuller then either Mr. Gunters or Mr. Norwoods; the Table at the end of this Book is of the same kinde, but fitted to every second Centesm of a degree, in stead of every second minute.

The ground of the former Proportion is, that the Logarithmical Tangents above 45d, accounting every half degree for a whole one, are in the same Ratio or Proportion with a Table of the Me­ridian-line, whence also it follows for Instrumental use, that a Line of Logarithmical Tangents will supply the defect of the Me­ridian-line.

The number above used, to wit, 75795, is not the difference between the Logarithmical Tangents of 45d and 45½d, though near it, being the difference of the Logarithmical Tangents of 45d, and of 45d and one Centesm more, multiplied by 50; and for to avoid the trouble of Division in working this Proportion, it were convenient either to have a Table of the said Number, multiplied by all the nine Digits, or rather to alter the Proportion so as an U­nit [Page 118] might be the first tearm, and then making such a Table for the second tearm, the said Proportion in a manner would be wrought wholly by Addition and Substraction.

What former Ages performed by Tables, this latter Age hath endeavoured in some respects to perform without them: Snellius in his Cyclometria, shews us how the Sides of a Plain right Angled Triangle being given, we may without Tables finde the Angles of that Triangle.

[figure]

In the right angled Plain Triangle C E A, with the Radius C A, describe a Semicircle, produce the Diameter, and therein make D R [...]qual to the Radius, and draw R B passing through A till it meets with the Tangent I B at B; now that which Snellius asserts, is, That the Tangent cut off, to wit, I B, is somewhat shorter then the Arch I A, though near it in length, when the Arch is not above 1/12 part of a Quadrant; and this Hugenius demonstrates in his Book De Magnitudine Circuli, where he finds fault with Snellius his Demonstration thereof. Now the Proportion for finding an Angle raised from that Scheme, lyes thus:

As R E the sum of the double of the Hipotenusal C A, and of the side C E: Is to E A the lesser side

So is R I the triple of the Radius or Hipotenusal

To I B the length of the Arch required ∷ propé verum.

This Proportion finds the length of the Arch, making the Hi­potenusal always Radius, whereas in Calculation we always retain such a Radius whereof the Circumference of the Circle is 360d: now the Diameter of such a Circle will be found by the numbers in page 112, in which the Proportion of the Circumference to the Dia­meter is expressed to be 114, 5915, wherefore the Radius of such [Page 119] a Circle is 57, 2957, and the triple thereof is 171, 8871, then retaining the two first tearms of the former Proportion, we may make this number the thi d tea [...]m, and by one single work finde the Angle; or rather taking the halfs of all four tearms, the Pro­portion will hold:

As the sum of the Hipotenusal and of half the greater Leg of a Plain right Angled Triangle: Is to the lesser Leg thereof

So is 86: To the Angle opposed to the lesser Leg:

The half of 171, 8871 is 85, 9435, which because we have taken it to be 86, the Proportion if the Angle be less then 30d, finds the Angle to be about one Centesimal part of a degree too much, but if the Angle be above 35d, by reason the Scheme is not absolutely true, must have these additions made to the Angle found thereby, from 35d to 38d adde one Centesm, from 38 to 40d adde two Cen­tesmes to it, and afterwards to 45d, for every degree it exceed; 40d, adde one Centesm more besides the former two Centesms, and thus we may always finde the lesser acute Angle, and conse­quently the greater, being the Complement thereof within one Centesm of the truth, which is nearer then any Mechanick way.

Example. In the former Triangle let there be given the Sides

  • C E 4, 17,
  • A E 3, 93,

by extracting the square root of the sum of the squares of these two Numbers, we shall finde the side C A to be 5, 73, to which adding the half of C E, the sum is 782 the Divi­sor, then multiplying 393 the lesser Leg by 86, the Product is 33798, to which you may annex Ciphers at pleasure to finde the Decimal parts of a degree, and dividing by 782, you will finde the quotient to be 43d, 22 Centesmes, to which if you adde 5 Cen­tesmes error, the Angle sought is 43d 27 Centesms.

Readily to finde what allowance must be made in respect of the Arch found, you may repair to a Table of Natural Sines, and take the two Legs of the right Angled Triangle to be the sine and cosine of any Arch, and by the last Proportion finde how near you can recover the Arch again, whereby you will find what allowance must be made.

The Example here used is that mentioned in page 16 and 109, so that hereby we finde a Course and Distance on the Plain Chart, without the help of Tables, and by the like reason the height of a Gnomon, and the length of its shadow being given, the Suns height may be got without Tables.

Hugenius not thinking this way of Snellius to be exact enough, propounds another of his own upon this consideration, that the Chord of an Arch being increased by one third part of the differ­ence between the Sine and the Chord of the said Arch, shall be very near equal in length to the Arch it self, yea so near, that in an Arch of 45d, it shall not erre or fall short above 1/18000 part of a degree, and in an Arch of 30d, not above the 1/21600 part of a de­gree, whereby the Sines may be examined, and an Angle found without Tables, as if the sides of the former Triangle be given, by taking C E out of C A there remains E I, the square where­of added to the square of E A, the Sine is equal to the square of the line A I the Chord, whereby may be found the length of the Arch I A to the given Radius C A, and then by another Pro­portion the measure of the said Arch to the Radius of such a Cir­cle, whose Circumference is 360d.

In like manner, if the sides of an oblique Plain Triangle were given, the Angles thereof might be found, if you first reduce that oblique Triangle to two right angled Plain Triangles, which is performed in every Book of Trigonometry without Tables.

But for such Cases of Plain Triangles, in which but one Side with two Angles are given to finde the other Sides, in regard the Proportions for such Cases require Sines, and that we have not attained any ready way to make the Sine of any arch at command, forbearing to mention such ways as are both troublesom and un­certain, we must suppose that the Reader is furnished with a Ta­ble of Sines, which most Mariners have in their Sea-mans Ka­lendar.

FINIS.

ERRATA.

PAge 1 line 31, for would read should, p. 48. l. 30. for 48 degrees r. 84 de­grees, p. 49 l. 3. for Angle r Angles, l. 4 for Sine r. Line, p. 51. l. 25. for fol­lowing r former, p. 59. l. 14. for or, r. of p. 60. l. 21. for as every, r. or ever. p. 81 l. 16. for one is, r. one in. page 88. l. 26. for Tangent r. Tangents.

A Table of Meridionall parts.

D0123456789
00, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0014, 0035, 0066, 0117, 0178, 02 [...]9, 037
20200202 0200 [...]1023029031037046057
404004004 [...]041043046051057066077
6060060060061063066071077086097
8080080080081083086091097106117
10, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1014, 1035, 1066, 1117, 1188, 1279, 138
12120120120121123126131138147158
14140140140141143146151158167178
16160160160161163166171178187198
18180180180181183186191198207218
20, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2014, 2045, 2076, 2127, 2198, 2289, 239
22220220220221224227232239248259
24240240240241244247252259268279
2626026026026126 [...]267272279288300
28280280280281284287292299308320
30, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3014, 3045, 3076, 3127, 3198, 3299, 341
32320320320321324327332339349361
34340340340341344347352359369381
36360360360361364367372379389401
38380380380381384387392399409421
40, 4001, 4002, 4003, 4024, 4045, 4086, 4137, 4208, 4309, 442
42420420420422424428433441450462
4 [...]440440440442444448453460470482
4646046046046246446847348 [...]490502
48480480480482484488498500510522
50, 5001, 5002, 5003, 5024, 5045, 5086, 5147, 5218, 5319, 543
52520520520522524528534541551563
54540540540542544548554561571583
56560560560562564568574581591603
58580580580582584588594601611624
60, 6001, 6002, 6013, 6024, 6055, 6096, 61 [...]7, 6228, 6329, 641
626206206216226256296346 [...]2652665
6464064064164264 [...]649654661672685
66660660661662665669674682692705
6868068068168268 [...]689694702712725
70, 7001, 7002, 7013, 7024, 7055, 7096, 7157, 7138, 7339, 746
72720720721722725729735743753766
74740740741742745749755763773786
76760760761762765768775783793806
78780780781782785789795803813827
80, 8001, 8002, 8013, 80 [...]4, 8055, 8106, 8167, 8248, 8349, 8 [...]8
828208 [...]08 1823825830836844854868
848408408418 [...]3845850856864874888
86860860861863865870876884894908
88880880881883885890896904915928
90, 9001, 9002, 9013, 9034, 9065, 9106, 9167, 9258, 9369, 949
92920920921923926930936945956969
949409409419439 [...]6950956965976989
9696096096196296697097698599610, 009
989809809829839869909968, 0059, 016030
h d10101010101010101010
D10111213141516171819
010, 05111, 06812, 08813, 1121 [...], 14115, 17416, 21 [...]17, 25518, 30319, 356
207108810813316 [...]194232275324377
4091108128153183215253296345398
61111291 [...]9174203235274317366419
8131150170194244256295338387441
1010, 15211, 17012, 16 [...]13, 21514, 2 [...]415, 27716, 31 [...]17, 35918, 4 [...]819, 463
12172190210236264297337380429484
14192210231257285318358401450505
1621223125127730 [...] [...]39379422471526
18233251272298326360400443492547
2010, 25411, 27212, 29313, 31814, 34715, 38116, 42017, 46418, 51319, 569
22274292313339367402441484534590
24294312334359388412461505555611
2631433335438040944 [...]482526576632
2833535 [...]3754014304645 [...]3547597653
3010, 35511, 37412, 39513, 42114, 45015, 48 [...]16, 52417, 56818, 61919, 675
32375394415441471508514589630696
34395414436461492526565600651717
36415435456481512546586621672738
38436456477502523567607642693759
4010, 45711, 47612, 49713, 52314, 55315, 58816, 62817, 67318, 72419, 781
42477496517543574609648694745802
444975165385645956306697157668 [...]3
46518537558585615651690736787845
48538557579605636671711757809866
5010, 55911, 57812, 60013, 62614, 65615, 69216, 73217, 77818, 83019, 887
525795986 [...]0646677713752799851908
54599618641667698734773820872929
566206396616877 [...]8755794841893951
5864166 [...]681708739775815861914972
6010, 66111, 68012, 70213, 72914, 76015, 79616, 83617, 88318, 93519, 993
6268170072275078081785790495620, 014
64701721743771801837878928977035
667227317647918 [...]1858899916998057
687 [...]275278581284287993096719, 019079
7010, 76 [...]11, 78212, 80513, 83214, 86315, 90016, 94117, 98819, 04120, 100
7278280282585288392096 [...]18, 009062121
74802822846873904941983030083142
768 [...]384386689392596217, 003051104163
7884486488791 [...]916983024072125185
8010, 86411, 88412, 90713, 93514, 96716, 00417, 04518, 09319, 14620, 206
82884904928956987024066114167227
8411, 00592494897615, 008045087135188248
86025945969997028065108156209269
8804596699014, 017049086129177230281
9010, 96611, 98613, 01014, 03815, 07016, 10717, 15018, 19819, 25120, 312
9298612, 006030059090128171219272333
9411, 00 [...]026051079111149192240293355
9602704 [...]07110013 [...]160213261314376
98048068092120133180234282335397
h d10101010101010101010
D20212223242526272829
020, 41921, 48622, 56123, 64324, 73 [...]25, 83326, 94128, 05829, 18630, 324
243050758366475685596 [...]080208346
4451528605686778877984103230369
64735506267088 [...]089927, 007126253392
84945716487308229 [...]1029148276415
1020, 52521, 59322, 66923, 75224, 84425, 94327, 05228, 17129, 29930, 438
12546614690773865965074193322461
14567635711795887987097214344484
165886577338 [...]790926, 009120238367507
1861067975 [...]83993103114226139 [...]530
2020, 63221, 70122, 77723, 861 [...], 95326, 05427, 16428, 28329, 41330, 553
22653722798882975076186305435575
24674743820904997098208327457598
2669576584192625, 019120230350480621
287 [...]7786863948041142252373503644
3020, 73821, 80822, 88523, 97025, 06326, 16427, 27528, 39629, 52630, 667
327598299 [...]6991085186297418548690
3478085092824, 013107208319440571713
368 [...]8729 [...]0035129230342463594736
388 [...]389397 [...]057151252364485617759
4020, 84521, 91522, 99324, 07925, 1732 [...], 27527, 38728, 50829, 64030, 782
428669 [...]623, 0 [...]4090194297409530662805
44887957036112216319 [...]1552985828
46909979058134238341454575708851
489322, 00108 [...]156260363477598731874
5020, 95222, 02323, 10124, 18825, 28226, 3 [...]627, 49928, 61129, 75330, 897
529730441 22093044085216437759 [...]0
54995065144231326430543665798 [...]43
5621, 16087166253348452565688811966
580 [...]7109188275360474587721844989
6 [...]21, 05922, 13023, 21024, 29725, 39226, 49727, 61028, 73429, 86731, 012
6 [...]0801512313 [...]8414519632756890035
64102173252340436541654778913058
661 [...]3195274362458563676801936081
68144 [...]17296384480585699824958104
7021, 16522, 23823, 31824, 40625, 50226, 60827, 72228, 84729, 98131. 127
7218626033042752463074486930, 003150
74207281351449546652766891026173
76229303373461568674789914049196
78251324395483590696812936072219
8021, 27222, 34523, 41724, 51525, 61326, 71927, 83428, 9593 [...], 09531. 242
82293366448536635741856981127265
8431538746955865776387829, 003140288
86336409481580679785901026163311
88358431503602701807923049186334
9021, 37922, 45323, 53524, 62425, 72326, 83027, 94629, 07230, 20931. 357
9240047455664674585228, 068095231380
94422495578668767874090117254403
96443517600690789896113140277426
98465539621712811918136163301449
hd10111111111111111111
D30313233343536373839
031, 47332, 63333, 80634, 99236, 19137, 40538, 63339, 87741, 13742, 415
249665682935, 01521542965790216244 [...]
451967985203923 [...]4536829271874 [...]6
654 [...]712876063263477707952202492
85657369000872874 [...]2732977228518
1031, 58932, 75033, 92435, 11136, 31237, 52738, 75740, 00241, 26 [...]42, 544
12612773647135336551781027289569
1463579697015936 [...]57380 [...]052314595
1665882999418333 [...]59983077340621
1868184334, 0182 [...]74086 [...]855102366647
2031, 70432, 86734, 0423 [...], 23136, 43 [...]37, 64938, 80040, 12741, 39242, 673
2279 [...]8900652544576739 [...]4152417698
248 [...]09 30892784816979291774427 [...]4
2684393611 [...]3025057 [...]19 [...]201467750
288779601373265297469 [...]227493776
3031, 82 [...]32, 98434, 16135, 35036, 5 [...]437, 771 [...]9, 00440, 25341, 51942, 802
3284333, 007184374578795029278544827
3486603020739860281605430 [...]569853
368 [...]90532314226268 [...]407 [...]3 [...]85 [...]4879
3891207725544665086910 [...]35 [...]6 0 [...]05
4031, 93633, 10134, 27935, 47036, 67537, 89439, 12940, 37941, 64642, [...]31
429591243024946999181534 [...]46 1957
44982147325518723942178429696983
463 [...], 005170349512747967205454 [...]2243, 009
4802819437356677199 [...]28 [...]479758035
5032, 05233, 21834, 39735, 59036, 7 [...]638, 01739, 25340, 50541, 77443, 061
5207523142061482004127 [...]030799087
5409825144463884 [...]0653020558 [...]4113
56121278468662868090327080850139
581443024926 [...]6892115352105876165
6032, 16833, 3363 [...], 51635, 71036, 91738, 13039, 37740, 63141, 90243, 191
62181357539734941164402656927217
64204378563758965188427681952243
66227399587782989213452706978269
6825143161180637, 01123847778142, 004295
7032. 28433, 45334, 63535, 83037, [...]3938, 26339, 50240, 75742, 03043, 321
72307476658854063287527782055347
7433050068287 [...]087311552807080373
763535247 [...]69021123365778 [...]2106399
7837654773092613736 [...]602858132425
8032, 40 [...]33, 5734, 75435, 95037, 16 [...]38, 38639, 62740, 88442, 15843, 451
8242 [...]596777971185410652909183477
84445611801993209434677934209503
8646864682536, 022233459702959235529
8848 [...]67184904625848 [...]727985261555
9032, 51633, 68834, 87336, 07137, 28338, 50939, 75241, 01142, 28743, 581
92539701896095307533777036312607
945627249 0119331558802061337633
96585748944143355583827086363659
98609772963167380608852111389685
hd11111112122212121213
D40414243444546474849
043, 71145, 02646, 36247, 71849, 09750, 49951, 92753, 38054, 86056, 369
2737052388745124527955409890399
47630784157721525559844389 0429
67891054 [...]279918 [...]58352, 003467950460
8815132469827 [...]08612032496980491
1043, 84245, 15946, 49647, 85549, 23650, 64152, 07153, 52655, 01056, 522
12868185523882263669109555040552
148942115509092916971 85840705 [...]2
169202385779363197251676 3100613
18946265604964347754196643130644
2043, 97345, 29246, 63147, 99249, 37550, 78352, 21553, 67355, 16056, 675
2299931865248, 019403811244702190705
2444, 025314685046431839273731220735
26051371712073459867302760250766
280 [...]7398739101487896331790280797
3044, 10445, 42546, 76648, 12949, 51550, 92552, 36053, 82055, 31056, 828
32130451793156543953389849340858
3415647782018357 [...]9814188783 [...]0888
3618250484721059951, 0104 [...]7908400919
38208531874238627039476938430950
4044, 23545, 55846, 902 [...]8, 26649, 65 [...]51, 06852, 50553, 96855, 46056, 981
422615849 [...]929368309653499749057, 011
4428761095632071112456354, 026520042
46313627983348739153592 [...]56500073
4833966447, 010376767182621086580104
5044, 36645, 69147, 03748, 40448, 79551, 21052, 65054, 11655, 61 [...]57, 135
52392717064431823238679145641165
544187440914588 [...]1266708174671196
56444771118486879295737204701217
584717981455149073 [...]4766231731248
6044, 49845, 82547, 17348, 54249, 93551, 3535 [...], 79554, 26455, 76257, 289
62524851200569963381824293792320
64550888227597981409853323822351
6657691525462550, 009 [...]38882353852382
68603932281653037467911383882413
7044, 63045, 95947, 30948, 68050, 07651, 49652, 94154, 41355, 91357, 444
72656985336707104524970442943474
7468246, 012363735132552999472973505
767 802939076316058153, 02850256, 003536
78735056417791188610057532034567
8044, 76346, 09347, 44548, 81950, 21751, 63953, 08754, 56256, 06557, 598
82788119472846245667116591095630
84814146499874273696145621125661
868 [...]0173526902301725174651155692
88867200553930329754203681186223
9044, 89446, 22747, 58148, 95850, 35851, 78353, 23354, 71156, 21757, 754
929202546089853868112627 [...]0247785
9494628163549, 013414840291770277816
96972308663041442869320800307847
98999335691069470918350830338878
hd131314141414141 [...]1515
[...]
[...]
D50515253545556575859
057, 90959, 48161, 08862, 73064, 4126 [...], 13467, 90069, 71171, 57273, 486
2940512120763446168935747609524
4971544152796480203971784647563
658, 00257618583051423868, 0078 [...]1685602
80336082188645 [...]8283043858623641
1058, 06559, 64061, 25062, 89764, 58266, 30868, 07969, 89571, 76173, [...]80
12096672282920616343114932798719
14127704314953650378150 [...]79836758
1615873634798668441318670, 016874797
1818976838063, 019718448222053912836
2058, 22159, 80061, 41363, 06364, 75366, 48368, 25870, 07971, 95073, 875
22252832445096787518284115988914
24283864478129821553 [...]2015272, 026953
26314896511163855588366199064992
2834592854419788962340223610274, 031
3058, 37759, 96061, 57763, 23064, 92466, 65968, 43870, 26372, 14074, 070
3240899260926395869447430017 [...]119
3443960, 024641296992729510337216158
3647005667433065, 02676454637 [...]254197
38502088707364061799582411292237
4058, 53460, 12061, 7 [...]063, 39865, 09666, 83568, 61870, 44972, 33174, [...]67
4256515277 [...]431130870654486369306
44596184805464164905690523407315
4662821683849819894 [...]726560445384
486592 [...]8871532233975762597 [...]83424
5058, 69160, 28061, 90463, 56665, 26867, 01168, 79970, 63572, 5 [...]274, 464
52722312937599302046835 [...]72560503
54753344970632336081871719598542
5678437662, 003666370116907756636581
58816408036700405152944793675621
6058, 84860, 44162, 06963, [...]346 [...], 44067, 18868, 9 [...]7 [...], 82172, 7 [...]474, 661
628794731027 [...]747422369, [...]178 [...]8752790
64910505135801508 [...]58 [...]53895790739
669425371618 [...]5513 [...]3089932828779
68974569201869578339126970867819
7059, 00660, 60162, 23463, 9 [...]365, 6167, 6569, 16371, [...]0872, 60974, 859
720376332679366 [...]7 [...]00199045944898
74068665300970681435235082982937
7610069733364, 00 [...]71647127111973, 021977
781327 [...]036603875150730815706 [...]75, [...]17
8059, 1646 [...], 76362, 39964, 07265, 78667, 54367, 34571, 19573, 09975, 057
82195795422106820578381232137096
84226827455140855613417269175136
8625886048817489 [...]6 [...]9454307214176
88290892521208925685491345253216
9059, 32260, 92562, 56464, 24265, 96067, 72162, 52871, 38373, 29275, 256
92353957597276994756564420330296
9438597963031066. 029792600458369336
9641761, 012663344064828637496408376
98449045696378099864674534447416
hd16166117171818191920
D60616263646566676869
075. 45677. 48779. 58381. 74983. 99 [...]86. 3 [...]388. 7 [...]591. 2 [...]293. 8 [...]696. 575
249452862579384. [...]3 [...]36077 [...]2838996 0
45335 [...]9667837081407823331952686
65716 17108811274518723859 [...]. 00 [...]7 [...]2
8607653753925173502921437059798
1075. 65077. 69479. 79681. 97084. 21986. 55088. 97191. 48991. 11396. 854
1269173583882. 01426459789. 020540166910
1473277688105831064406959220969
167738189241 [...]235669211964328497. 022
1881586096714640274016 [...]694338078
2075. 85777. 90180. 01082. 19184. 44886. 788 [...]9. 21991. [...]4691. 38 [...]97. 135
2289794 [...]0532 [...]5494835268797436191
249379830962795 [...]08 [...]33178 9490247
2697778. 025139323586931367901544304
2876. 0180671823686329794179535 [...]8361
3076. 05978. 10980. 22582. 41384. 67887. 02789. 46792. 00594. 65297. 418
32099150268457714075516056706474
34139191311501760123566108760530
3617923335454580617161 [...]160814597
38210275397590852219666212868654
4076. 26078. 31780. 44182. 63581. 90987. 26789. 7169 [...]. [...]649 [...]. 92397. 701
42301358484680955315766316977758
4434140052772585. 00136381636895. [...]31815
46382442570770 [...]47411866420085872
48423484613815094459916472140929
5076. 46478. 52680. 65782. 86085. 14187. 50889. 96792. 52595. 19597. 986
5250 [...]56870090518755690. 01757724998. 043
545156007439502 [...]3604067619303100
56586642786995280652117680358157
5862 [...]68483083. 040327700167732413214
6076. 66778. 73680. 87483. 08485. 37487. 74990. 21892. 78795. 46898. 272
62707778917129420797268839513329
647488209601744668453 [...]8891568386
6678986281. 004219513894868944623444
68830904047264. 560943419997678502
7076. 87178. 94781. 09183. 3 [...]085. 60787. 99290. 47093. 05095. 74398. 560
7291298913435565488. 040520102798617
7495379. 031178400701 [...]98570155853675
76994 [...]73222445748147621208908733
7877. 035115266490795196672261963791
8077. 07679. 15881. 31083. 53685. 84218. 23590. 72393. 31496. 01998. 849
82117200353581889284774367074907
84158242397626936333815420129965
8619928441167198338187647318599. 023
8824033748571786. 030431927526341081
9077. 28179. 37081. 52985. 76386. 07788. 48090. 97893. 57996. 29699. 139
9232241257280812452991. 028632351197
94363454616853171578079685407255
66404497660898218627130738463313
9544654070494426567618179 [...]519372
hd21212223232425262728
D70717273747576777879
099, 431102, 42105, 58108. 90112. 43116. 17120. 16124. 45129. 08134. 09
2499486497502424541819
45575471109. 045832326 [...]2830
66166 [...]7711654040723841
8675668418724849814851
1099, 724102, 73105, 90109. 25112. 79116. 56120. 58124. 90129. 56134. 62
12785799732866366996572
1484685106, 0338937174125. 087482
169 [...]7911045113. 017982178493
189689717520887912694135. 04
2010 [...], 02103, 04106, 23109. 59113. 16116. 95121. 00125. 35130. 04135. 15
220710306623117. 0208441425
2413163673301016532436
2619224380381824623447
2825285087452633714458
30100, 31103, 35106, 56 [...]09. 94113. 52117. 34121. 42125. 80130. 54135. 69
32374162110. 01604250896479
34434769 [...]8675058987390
36495376157458661 [...]6. 0883136. 01
3855608328816675179 [...]12
40100, 61103, 67106, 89110. 29113. 89117. 74121. 84126. 26131. 03136. 23
426773953696829235133 [...]
447379107, 0243114. 0390122. 0 [...]452345
467985095 [...]119809543356
488591165719118. 0618634367
50100, 91103, 98107, 22110. 64114. 27118. 14122. 27126. 72131. 53136. 78
5297104, 042871342235816389
54101, 031 [...]35784230439073137. 00
56091 [...]4185493852127. 0 [...]8311
5815224892564661099322
60101, 21104, 23107, 55110, 99114. 64118. 54122. 70127. 18132. 03137. 33
62273562111. [...]6716278271344
643 [...]4 [...]6813787086372355
6639487520867895453366
6845548227948 [...]123. 04554377
70101, 51104, 61107, 89111. 35115. 02118. 94123. 13127. 65132. 54137. 88
725767954209119. 0222746499
746373108, 02491710308374138. 10
7669800 [...]56241839928421
787 [...]8616633226481 [...]8. 029533
80101, 81104, 93108. 22111. 71115. 40119. 35123. 57128. 12133. 06138. 45
8287992978474365211656
849 [...]105, 053585555174302667
86991242926 [...]5983403778
88102, 0 [...]184999706792504789
90102, 1 [...]10 [...], 25108. 56112. 06115. 78119 76124. 01128. 60133. 57139. 01
921831641385840969671 [...]
9424377021939218797723
66304 [...]7728116. 01120. 002788873 [...]
953651843509 [...]36989847
hd3 [...]3344455139. 5 [...]
THE MARINERS PLAIN S …

THE MARINERS PLAIN SCALE NEW PLAIN'D: THE SECOND BOOK.

Shewing how by a Line of CHORDS onely, to resolve all the Cases of Sphaerical Triangles Ortho­graphically, that is, By projecting or laying down the Sphaere in right Lines, commonly called, The Drawing or Delineating of the ANALEMMA.

Of great Use to Sea-men and Students in the Mathematicks.

Being contrived to be had either alone, or with the other Parts.

Written by John Collins of London, Pen-man, Ac­comptant. Philomathet.

LONDON: Printed by Tho. Johnson for Francis Cossinet, and are to be sold at the Anchor and Mariner in Tower-street, and by Hen. Sutton Mathematical Instrument-maker in Thread-needle-street, behinde the Royal Exchange. 1659.

Courteous Reader,

THis Book being the Second of that which is En­tituled, The Mariners Plain Scale new Plain­ed, I thought fit so to contrive (for the ease of the Buyer, and advantage of the Stationer, who finde small Bulks more convenient for Sale then great) that it might be had alone by it self at an easie rate: What Definitions or Rudiments of Geometry are here wanting, the Reader will be supplyed withal in the first Part, and though per­formances of this nature are not so exact as Calculation, yet they will be a good Introduction to the ignorant, a Confirmation to the Studious, who use Tables that may be liable to Mistakes at the Press, and may very well serve where better helps are wanting: The Demonstration of the Analemma, and other ways of performance by it, are passed by here, and intended to be handled in a small Treatise of the use of it as a Mathematical Instrument, to be cut in Brass, with Paper Prints fitted up for Sale, which will be of excellent use to Seamen, Surveyors, and all that are Mathematically Studious: I remain thy freind, de­sirous of the Advancement of Knowledge,

JOHN COLLINS.

THE CONTENTS.

  • A Double Scale of Chords used in this Book, and described. Page 1, 2.
  • Sphaerical Definitions from page 2 to 9.
  • All the Points, Arks and Circles defined, represented to the view in a Scheme of the Analemma. p. 10 to 14
  • A general Almanack in two Verses p. 15
  • The manner of measuring and proportioning out Sines by a Line of Chords. p. 18, 19
  • A general Rule in two Verses for finding the Suns place. 21
  • To finde the Suns Declination and right Ascension. 23, 24
  • To finde the Suns amplitude, height at Six, Vertical height, time of rising, &c. 25, 26
  • The sixteen right angled Cases resolved by proportions of four several kindes. p. 27 to 32
  • To finde the Suns height without Instrument. 32
  • To finde the Hour, Azimuth, and Angle of Position. p. 33 to 39
  • To finde the Suns Altitudes on all Hours. 40, 41
  • To finde the Distances of Places, &c. 42, 43
  • All the Oblique Cases solved. p. 46. p. 53
  • To finde the Altitudes on all Azimuths. p. 46 to 52
  • All the sixteen Cases of right angled Sphaerical Triangles projected, and otherwise resolved. p. 57 to 63
  • The Longitude and Latitude of a Star given, to finde its Declination and right Ascension p. 64
  • Two Azimuths and two Altitudes given, to finde the Latitude and Declination by Projection. p. 65
  • With Proportions to finde the same by Calculation. p. 66, 67

Page 2. Line 17. Obliterate Superficies.

OF THE SCALE Used in this Book.

THough this Treatise bears the name of the Mariners Plain Scale new Plain'd, yet the Scale intended thereby, is cut in the Frontis-piece of the first Book.

Nothing more is necessarily required in the perfor­mances of this Book, then from the commonly known Division of a Circle into 360 equal parts, called Degrees, to prick down any number of Degrees less then 180d, and a quadrant divided into nine equal parts, and one of those parts for convenience below the Diamater into 10 Sub-divisions, called Degrees, may very well serve the turn, which the Readers ingenuity will furnish himself withal in any place, if he have but Compasses, yet for expedition a line of Sines is often made use of.

In the following Diagram, the equal Divisions of the Semicircle, are transferred into the line of Chords in the Diameter, by setting one foot of the Compasses in A, which is called the lesser Chord.

Those Chords being numbred by the half Arches, to which they belong, become a line of Sines of the same Radius with the Diameter of the Semicircle, and are called the greater Sines.

To that Radius there is fitted a Chord of 60 d, called the greater Chord, that the Reader might be supplyed with both, for the lesser Chord will not serve to prick off an Arch in a Circle of twice the Radius whereto it is fitted, unless the said Chord be dou­bled in a right line before it be pircked into the Circumference.

The Sines to the Chord in the Diameter, are graduated on the Radius or line C B, by drawing lines thorough each degree of the quadrants AB, DB, and are called the lesser Sines.

There is also added a Scale of equal parts and Rumbes for other Protractions, but we use neither of them in this Book.

The Schemes in the Book are fitted either to the lesser or greater Chord here described.

Every degree of a Line of Sines, or Chords, we suppose to be divided into 60 parts, which we call minutes, which in the following Operations are guessed at, for a small Instrument will not admit of so many Sub-divisions.

[figure]

CHAP. I. Sphaerical Definitions.

BEfore we proceed to the Resolution of any particular questi­ons, it will be necessary to premise the common Spherical Definitions, and to shew how the Analemma repesents them.

The word Sphere, though, as Herigonius sheweth, it be taken in a fourfold sense, yet I think it not necessary to define above two of them.

1. Therefore a Sphere may, according to Theodosius, be under­stood to be a solid Superficies, or round Body, contained under one Surface, in the middle whereof there is a point whence all right lines drawn unto the Circumference, are equal, and is made by the turning round of half a Circle, till it end where it began.

[Page 3]2. It is taken for a certain round Instrument consisting of divers Circles, whereby the motions of the Heavens, and the Scituation of the whole World, is most conveniently represented.

For the better explanation whereof, Astronomers do imagine, 10 Principal points, and 10 Circles to be in the hollow inside of the first moveable Sphere, which are commonly drawn upon any Globe or Sphere, besides divers other Circles which are not deli­neated, but onely apprehended in the fancy.

The Points are the two Poles of the World, the two Poles of the Zodiack, the two Equinoctial points, the two Solstitial points, and the Zenith and Nadir.

The Poles of the World are two points, which are Diametrically, or directly opposite to one another, about which the whole frame of Heaven moveth from the East into the West, whereof one is perpetually seen by us, and is called the Arctick, or North Pole.

The other being hid from us, and directly opposite to the former, is called the Antarctick, or South pole, a right line imagined to be drawn from the one Pole to the other, is called the Axis, or Axeltree of the World.

The Axis differs from the Diameter, because that every right line drawn through the Center of the Sphere, and limited on each side of the Surface of the Sphere, is a Diameter; but not an Axis, unless the Sphere move round about it.

The Poles of the Zodiack, are two points Diametrically oppo­site, upon which the Heavens move from the West into the East, one of them is towards the North, distant from the Arctick or North Pole, 23 degrees 31 minutes; the other is towards the South, and is as much distant from the South Pole.

A Degree is the 360th part of any whole Circle, and a Mi­nute is the 60th part of a Degree, but of late some divide a De­gree into 100 parts, which are called Centesmes, or Centesimal Minutes, in defining some of the Points we must refer to Circles afterwards to be defined.

The Equinoctial Points are in the beginnings of Aries and Libra, to which when the Sun cometh, he makes the day and night of an equal length throughout the whole World, to wit, in the begin­ning of Aries about the 11th of March, which is accounted the [Page 4] beginning of the Spring, and in the beginning of Libra, about the 13 of September, which is the beginning of Autumn.

The Point of the Summer Solstice, is in the beginning of Cancer, to which when the Sun cometh, as about the 12th of June, is the beginning of Summer, and the longest day in the year.

The Point of the Winter Solstice, is in the beginning of Capricorn, to which when the Sun cometh, as about the 11th of December, is the shortest day in the year, and in the Astronomical account, the beginning of Winter.

The Zenith, is an imaginary point in the Heavens, right over our heads 90d from the Horizon.

The Nadir, is a point or prick in the Heavens under our feet, opposite to the Zenith.

Of the Circles of the Sphere.

The 10 Circles are the Horizon, the Meridian, the Equino­ctial, the Zodiack, the Colure of the Equinoxes, the Colure of the Solstices, the Tropick of Cancer, the Tropick of Capricorn, and the two Polar Circles.

The first six are called great Circles, and the other four lesser Circles.

By the Center of a Circle, is meant a Point, or Prick in the middle of the Circle, from whence all Lines drawn to the Circum­ference, are equal, and are known by the name of Radius resem­bling the spoak of a Cart-wheel.

That is said to be a great Circle which hath the same Center as the Sphere, and divides it into two equal halfs, called Hemispheres, and that is called a lesser Circle, which hath a different Center from the Center of the Sphere, and divides the Sphere into two unequal Portions or Segments.

1. Of the Horizon.

The Horizon is distinguished by the names of Rational or Sen­sible, the Rational Horizon is a great Circle every where equidi­stant from the Zenith, and divides the upper Hemisphere from the lower, and by accident or chance, is distinguished by the names of a right Oblique and parallel Horizon.

A right Horizon is such a Horizon as passeth through each Pole [Page 5] of the World, and cuts the Equinoctial at right Angles, whence the Inhabitants under the Equinoctial, are said to have a right Ho­rizon, and a right Sphere.

An Oblique Horizon is such a one as cuts the Equinoctial ob­liquely, or aslope.

A parallel Horizon is not such a one as cuts the Equinoctial, but is coincident, and is the same therewith, and such is the Hori­zon under the Poles.

The sensible Horizon is a Circle dividing that part of the Hea­vens which we see, from that part which see not, thence called Fi­nitor.

From the Accidental Scituation of the Horizon, follows many consequences.

1. Those that live in a right Horizon, that is under the Equi­noctial, have their days and nights always of an equal length, to them all the Stars both rise and set, twice in a year the Sun pas­seth through their Zenith, consequently they have two Summers and two Winters, to wit, Summers when the Sun passeth through their Zenith; and Winters when he is in or near the Tropicks.

2. In any right or Oblique Sphere, the length of the day when the Sun is in the Equinoctial, is equal to the length of the night.

3. In any Oblique Sphere, the nearer the Sun approacheth to the Visible Pole, the longer are the Days more then the Nights, some Stars always appear, others never appear, and the more re­mote from the Equinoctial, the greater is the number of such Stars, and the more inequality is there between the Days and Nights.

4. To those that live under the Polar Circles, their day once a year is 24 hours long, and their Night nothing.

5. Under the Pole, one half of the Sphere doth always ap­pear, and the other half not appear, and one half of the year is well nigh continually Day, and the other half continually Night, because the Equinoctial lies in the Horizon; 'Tis said well nigh, for by reason of the Suns Excentricity, the day under the North Pole, is longer then the Night, about eight days; and on the con­trary under the South Pole, is shorter then the night as many days.

2. Of the Meridian.

The Meridian is a great Circle, which passeth through the Poles of the World, the Zenith and Nadir, and the North and South points of the Horizon, and is so called, because that at all times and places when the Sun by his daily motion cometh unto that Circle twice every 24 hours, maketh the middle of the day and middle of the night; all places that lie under the same Meridian, bear North and South, but places that lie East and West from one another, have each of them a several Meridian.

3. Of the Equinoctial.

It is a great Circle imagined in the Heavens, dividing them in­to two equal parts, or halfs, called the North and South Hemi­sphere, lying just in the middle between the two Poles, being every where equi-distant from them, and is called the Equator, because when the Sun cometh unto it, which is twice in the year, at his en­trance into Aries and Libra, the days and nights are of an equal length throughout the whole World.

4. Of the Zodiack.

The Zodiack, alias Signifer, is another great Circle that divides the Equinoctial into two equal parts, the Points of Intersection being called Aries and Libra, the one half of it doth decline into the North, the other half into the South, as much as the Poles thereof are distant from the Poles of the World, namely 23d 31′, and likewise passeth through the two Solstitial Points, it's ordinary Breadth or Latitude is 12 degrees, but late Writers make it 14 or 16d by reason of the wandrings of Mars and Venus.

A Line, dividing the breadth thereof into two halfs, is called the Ecliptick Line, because the Eclipses of the Sun and Moon are al­ways under that Line, it's Circumference is divided into 12 parts called the 12 Signs, whereof each containeth 30d.

The Names and Characters of the 12 Signs, are

Aries Taurus Gemini Cancer Leo Virgo Libra Scorpius Sagittarius Capricornus Aquarius Pisces

The six former are the Northern, and the six latter the Sou­thern Signs.

Of the Colures.

These are two great Circles, and are no other then two Meri­dians passing through both the Poles of the World, crossing one another therein at right Angles, and divide the Equinoctial and the Zodiack into four equal parts, making thereby the four Sea­sons of the year.

The Colure of the Equinoxes is so called, because it passeth through the Equinoctial points of Aries and Libra, shewing there­by the beginning of the Spring and Autumn, when the days and nights are equal.

The other Colure passeth through the two Solstitial or Tropi­cal Points of Cancer and Capricorn, shewing the beginning of the Summer and Winter, at which two times the days are longest and shortest.

The very beginning of Cancer where the Colure crosseth the Ecliptick line, is called the Point of the Summer Solstice, to which place when the Sun cometh, he can approach no nearer the Zenith, but returneth towards the Equinoctial again, the Arch of the Me­ridian or Colure contained betwixt the Summer Solstice and the Equator, is called the greatest Declination of the Sun.

Of the four Lesser Circles.

The Tropicks are two lesser Circles, parallel to the Equinoctial, limiting the Suns greatest Declination towards both the Poles; that towards the North Pole is called the Tropick of Cancer, be­cause the Sun being in the very point of entrance into Cancer, which is the nearest he can approach unto the North Pole, is then [Page 8] in the point of the Summer Solstice, and by his diurnal or daily motion, describes a parallel, from thence called the Tropick of Cancer.

The Tropick of Capricorn, likewise limiteth the Suns greatest Declination Southward, and is a lesser Circle parallel to the Equinoctial, and hath that Denomination put upon it, because it passeth through the beginning of Capicorn, and hath the like re­ference to the South Pole, as the Tropick of Cancer, hath to the North Pole.

Of the two Polar Circles.

These are two lesser Circles, distant so much from the Poles of the World, as is the Suns greatest Declination from the Equi­noctial; in these Polar Circles, are the Pole points of the Zodiack, which moving round the Poles of the World, describe by their motion the said two Circles; that about the North Pole, is cal­led the Arctick Circle, and that about the South Pole, the Antar­tick Circle.

Of other Circles imagined, but not described in a material Sphere or Globe.

Such are the Azimuths, Almicanteraths, parallels of Latitude and Declination.

Azimuths are all great Circles bisecting the Sphere which meet together in the Zenith, and may be imagined to pass through every degree and minute of the Horizon at right Angles thereto, and serve to find the true coast of bearing of the Sun or Stars at at any time, in respect of the four chief Coasts of the Horizon, East, West, North, South. By some they are tearmed Vertical Circles, because they pass thorough the Zenith, but then they call the Azimuth of East, or West, the prime Vertical.

The Sun or any Star having Elevation or Depression above or below the Horizon, are then properly said to have Azimuth; But if they be in the Horizon, either Rising or Setting, the Arch of the Horizon, between the Center of the Sun or Star, and the true Points of East or West, is called Amplitude.

Almicanteraths are Circles parallel to the Horizon, continued up even to the Zenith, and serve to measure the Altitude, or [Page 9] height of the Sun, Moon, or Stars above the Horizon, which is no other then a portion or Arch of an Azimuth contained betwixt that Almicanter which passeth thorough the Center of the Sun or Star and the Horizon.

Parallels of Declination are lesser Circles, all parallel to the Equi­noctial, and may be imagined to pass through every degree, & part of the Meridian, and are described upon the Poles of the World.

Those parallels which in respect of the Sun or Stars, are called parallels of declination in respect of the Scituation of the earth, are called parallels of Latitude.

The Latitude of a Town or Place, is measured by the Arch of the Meridian, between the Zenith of that place, and the Equinocti­al, or which is equivalent thereto, by the Arch of the Meridian of the place between the Elevated Pole and the Horizon.

In like manner the Declination of the Sun or any Star, is mea­sured by the Arch of the Meridian, between the Sun or Star, and the Equinoctial.

Parallels of Latitude in the Heavens, are all lesser Circles de­scribed upon the Poles of the Zodiack or Ecliptick, and serve to define the Latitude of a Star, which is the Arch of a Circle, con­tained betwixt the Center of any Planet or Star, and the Ecliptick Line, making right Angles therewith, and counted either towards the North or South Poles of the Ecliptick; the Sun never pas­sing from under the Ecliptick Line, is said to have no Latitude.

Longitude in the Heavens, is measured by the Arch of the Ecli­ptick, comprehended between the Point of Aries, and a suppo­sed great Circle or Meridian of Longitude, passing through the Center of the Sun or Stars, and the two Poles of the Ecliptick, but counted according to the order or succession of the Signs.

Longitude on the Earth, is measured by an Arch of the Equi­noctial, contained between the primary or first Meridian of any place where Longitude is assigned to begin, and the Meridian of any other place, but counted Eastward from the said first place, according as the right ascension is counted in the Heavens.

Right Ascension, is an Arch of the Equinoctial (counted from the beginning of Aries) which cometh to the Meridian with the Sun, Moon, or Stars, or any portion of the Ecliptick; this is so useful, that Tables thereof are made both for the Sun and Stars, [Page 10] whereby is known the true time when they come to the Meridian, also by help of the Stars hour, the true time of the Night.

Olique Ascension, is an Arch of the Equinoctial, between the beginning of Aries, and that part of the Equinoctial that riseth with the Center of a Star, or any portion of the Ecliptick, in an Oblique Sphaere.

Ascensional Difference, is the Ark of difference between the right Ascension and the Oblique Ascension, and thereby is mea­sured the time of the Sun or Stars rising before, or after six.

CHAP. II. Shewing how the Analemma represents the Points and Circles before described.

[figure]

IN this Scheme are represented the Points and Circles of the Sphaere before described, fitted for the Latitude of London.

Upon the Center C, with 60d of a Line of Chords, draw the Circle S Z O N.

Draw the Diameter S C O, and perpendicular thereto cross it with another Diameter Z C N.

From S to AE, as also from Z to P, prick off 38d 28′ out of a Line of Chords, and draw AE C E and P C A.

From AE to F and X, also from E to D and Y, prick off 23d 31′, with Chords, do the like from P to R and Q, as also from A to T and V, and through those Points draw the Lines R Q, F D, X Y, and V T.

From F through the Center, draw the Line F C Y.

Parallel to S O through the point G, draw H G also parallel thereto, at any other distance draw L M B.

In this Scheme are represented the Points before defined.

P the North pole or pole Arctick, A the South pole or pole An­tarctick.

Q the North, and V the South pole of the Ecliptick.

C both the Equinoctial points of Aries and Libra.

F the point of the Summer Solstice.

Y the point of the Winter Solstice.

Z the Zenith, N the Nadir.

Secondly, the greater Circles are there represented.

S C O the Horizon, and Z C N the Axis thereof, or Azi­muth of East and West.

S Z O N the Meridian, it represents also the Colure of the Summer and Winter Solstices.

AE C E the Equinoctial.

F C Y the Ecliptick.

A C P represents the Colure of the Equinoxes, as also the Axis of the World, and the hour Circle of six.

Thirdly, the lesser Circles are there represented.

F D the Tropick of Cancer, X Y the Tropick of Capricorn.

R Q the Arctick or Polar Circle about the North pole.

V T the Antarctick Circle, or Circle about the South pole.

Fourthly, other Circles not described upon Globes are there represented.

L B represents a parallel of Altitude called an Almicanterath.

The prickt Arches Z ⊙, and Z G K being Ellipses, represent the Azimuths or Vertical Circles.

And the other prick't Arches,

Represent Meridans or hour Circles, which are also Ellipses, the drawing whereof would be troublesome, and therefore is not mentioned, and how to shun them in the resolution of any Pro­position of the Sphaere by Chords, shall afterwards be shewed.

Any line drawn parallel to AE E, as is f p, F D, R Q, will represent parallels of Declination.

And any Line drawn parallel to F Y, will represent a parallel of Latitude in the Heavens.

Fifthly, divers Arches relating to the Suns Motion, such as are commonly found by rhe Globes or Calculation, are in the same Scheme represented in right Lines.

1. The Suns Amplitude or Coast of rising and setting from the East or West, is there represented C W in North Signes, and by C g in South Signes.

2. His Ascensional difference or time of rising from six in Sum­mer by G W, in Winter by g h.

3. His Altitude at six in Summer by H C, his Depression at six in Winter by C b.

4. His Azimuth at the hour of six by H G in Summer, equal to h b in Winter.

5. His Vertical Altitude, or Altitude of East and West by I C, his Depression therein in Winter by C q.

6. His hour from six being East or West in Summer by G I, in Winter by h q.

7. His Azimuth from the East and West upon any Altitude, is represented in the parallel of Altitude, where it intersects the parallel of Declination here by M ⊙.

8. The hour of the day from six to any Altitude, is represented in the said point of Intersection, but in the parallel of Declina­tion here by G ⊙, and all these Arches thus represented in right Lines, are the Sines of those Arches to the Radius of the parallel in which they happen, being accounted from the midst of the said parallel.

Now how to measure the quantities of these respective Arches by a Line of Chords, and consequently thereby to resolve all the [Page 13] cases of Sphaerical Triangles, is the intended subject of some fol­lowing Pages.

The former Arches thus represented in right Lines, many whereof fall in parallels or lesser Circles, when Calculation is used, are all represented by Arches of great Circles (namely such as bisect the Sphaere) and the former Scheme doth represent the Triangles commonly used in Calculation.

Thus the right angled Triangle C d y, right angled at d sup­posing the Sun at y is made of

C y The Suns place or distance from the nearest Equinoctial point.

C d his right Ascension.

Y d his Declination.

d C y the angle of the Ecliptick and Equinoctial.

C y d the angle of the Suns Meridian and Ecliptick.

In the right angled Triangle W O P, right angled at O, sup­posing the Sun at W.

O P is the poles Elevation.

P W the complement of the Suns Declination.

W O the Suns Azimuth from the North.

W P O the hour from Midnight, or complement of the Ascen­sional difference.

P W O the angle of Position, that is, of the Suns Meridian with the Horizon, and of the like parts or their complements is made the Triangle C m W.

In the right angled Triangle C K G, right angled at K, sup­posing the Sun at G.

C G is his Declination.

G K his height at the hour of six.

C K the Suns Azimuth from the East or West, at the hour of six.

K C G the angle of the Poles Elevation.

C G K the angle of the Suns position.

In the right angled Triangle C k I, right angled at k, suppo­sing the Sun at I.

I k is the Suns Declination.

C k his hour from six.

C I his height, being East or West.

k C I the Latitude.

k I C the Angle of the Suns position.

In the oblique Angled Triangle Z ⊙ P, if the Sun be at ⊙.

Z P is the Complement of the Latitude.

P ⊙ his distance from the elevated Pole, in this Case the complement of his Declination.

Z ⊙ the Complement of his Altitude or height.

Z P ⊙ the Angle of the hour from Noon.

P Z ⊙ the Suns Azimuth from the North or midnight Meridian.

Z ⊙ P the Angle of the Suns Position.

Thus we have shewed how the former Scheme represents the Sphaerical Triangles used in Calculation, whereby of the six parts in each Triangle, if any three are given, the rest may be found by Calculation from the Proportions, and that either by Multipli­cation and Division, when the natural Tables of Sines and Tan­gents are used, or by Addition and Substraction when the Loga­rithmical are used, and what is performed by either of those sorts of Tables, we shall here perform by Scale and Compass, from which performances the like measure of exactness, is not attain­able as from the Tables.

CHAP. III. Shewing how to know upon what day of the Week, any day of any Moneth happens upon for ever.

1 TO perform this Proposition, there must be a general Rule prescribed, to find on what day of the Week, the first of March will happen upon for ever, which take in the following Verses.

To number two, adde year of our Lord God,
And a fourth part thereof, neglect the odd
Remainder, if such be, the sum divide
By seven, lay your quotient aside,
The Rest when your Divisions finished,
Will number shew day of the Week you need,
On which the first of March doth chance to be,
Still counting Lords day first, if you do see
That nothing do remain, then you may say,
The day you seek's the seventh, and Saturns day.

Example.

Let it be required to find on what day of the Week the first of March will happen, in the year of our Lord 1687.

Operation.
Divisor 7)2The even fourth of the Year, The remainder neglected, (301 Quotient.
1687
421
2100
21
10
7
3 remains.

Because three remains, the first of March in that Year happens on a Tuesday, in the Year 1679 nothing remains, therefore it happens on a Saturday.

Proposition. 2. The day of the Week, on which the first of March happens on any Year, being known and remembred.

To find on what day of the Week, any day of any Moneth in the said Year hapneth.

To perform this Proposition, the following Verse being in ef­fect a perpetual Almanack is to be recorded, & laid up in Memory.

All evil chances, grievous evils bring,
Fierce death attends, foul chances governing.

In this Verse are twelve words, relating to the number of the twelve Moneths of the Year, accounting March the first, where­fore the word proper to that Moneth is All, and so in order Fierce is the seventh word, and therefore belongs to the seventh Moneth, or September.

That which is to be observed from these Words, is what letter the word beginneth withal, and to count the number of that letter in the order of the Alphabet which will never exceed seven, and the number of the said letter, shews what day of the Moneth pro­per to the said word, shall be the same day of the Week the first of March hapned upon.

Example.

The word Fierce belongs to the Moneth September, and the first letter of the said word being f, is the sixth letter of the Al­phabet, a, b, c, d, e, f, wherefore the sixth day of September, is the same day of the Week that the first of March hapned upon, which in the year 1687 will be on Tuesday, and then by adding perpe­tually seven, we may finde on what days of the Moneth all the Tuesdays in that Moneth will happen:

Thus the

  • 6
  • 13
  • 20
  • 27

days of September in the Year 1687 will be all of them Tuesdays, then if it were required to know on what day of the Week the 29 of September, or quarter-day would happen, we might conclude it to be on a Thursday, because the 27th day hapned on a Tuesday; and the like for the Moneth of December, the word proper whereto is Foul, and then in that Year because the 27th day is Tuesday, we may conclude the 25th day being Christmas day, to happen on the Lords Day.

The day of the Week being given, to finde what day of what Moneth it is.

The Moneth must be given, and also the number of the Week in the said Moneth, as whether it be the first, second, third or fourth Week in the Moneth, otherwise no Almanack whatsoever can resolve this Proposition.

Wherefore let it be required to know what day of the Moneth Friday, in the third Week of January, happens in the year 1687, the word proper to January, is Chances, beginning with the third letter of the Alphabet, wherefore the

  • 3
  • 10
  • 17

days of that Moneth are Tuesdays, wherefore Friday, in the third Week of that Moneth, happens on the 20th day of that Moneth, because the 17th was Tuesday.

The foundation of which Almanack is this, that the

  • 1 March
  • 5 April
  • 3 May
  • 7 June
  • 5 July
  • 2 August
  • 6 September
  • 4 October
  • 1 November
  • 6 December
  • 3 January
  • 7 February

Do for ever hap­pen in the same year (which al­ways beginneth the first of March, and ends [Page 17] on the last of February) on the same day of the Week, which every year varieth, as doth the first of March, for the more ready find­ing whereof, this Proposition may be added.

The day of the Week on which any day of any Moneth hapned, being known; To find on what day of the Week, the first day of March hapned that year.

Example: In the year 1660, admit it were known, or should be remembred that the 21 of May happened on Monday, the third Word of the Verse being the Word proper to May, is Chan­ces, the first letter whereof is C, the third letter of the Alphabet, wherefore the

  • 3
  • 10
  • 17
  • 24

days of the same moneth happen on the same day of the week that the first of March hap­pened upon; now the 24th day of that month will be Thursday, because the 21 day was Monday, wherefore the first of March happened that year on a Thursday.

CHAP. IV. Shewing the nature of Sines.

AN Arch being given to take out the Sine or Cosine thereof to the common Radius, whereby the defect of a Line of Sines is supplied, if one be not at hand.

Draw the two Radii AE C, and C P, making right Angles at C the Center, then with 60d of the Chord upon the said Center, describe the Quadrant AE P, and thereon prick off the Ark pro­pounded: admit 50d from AE to F, the nearest distance from F to AE C, is the Sine of 50d, and the nearest distance from P C is the Cosine, to wit, the Sine of 40 degrees.

To prick off an Arch or Angle by Sines in stead of Chords, or to finde what Arch belongs to any Sine proposed.

Admit I would prick off an Arch of 50 degrees by a Line of Sines, first with the Sine of 90 degrees the Radius, draw the Qua­drant AE P C, then with the Sine of the Arch proposed, upon AE as a Center, describe the Arch A B D, a Line drawn from C the Center into the Limbe so as to touch the extreamity of that Ark at B, shall make an Angle of 50 degrees with the Line AE C, the [Page 18] Arch AE F being an Arch of 50d, and would be found so much, if measured on the greater Chord.

But when an Arch to be pricked off by Sines is great, it were best to prick off the complement thereof from the other Radius, thus upon P as a Center, with the Sine of 40d, describe the Arch K, a line from the Center touching that Arch, findes the Point F in the Limbe, as before.

Otherwise,

Prick the Sine of 50d from C to E, and with the said extent upon AE, as a Center, describe an Arch at A, a line drawn from E, touching the extreamity of the Arch at A, will pass thorough the point F in the Limbe, as before, and the same point might have been found by pricking the Sine of 40d on the other Radius C AE, after the same manner.

Thirdly, the extent C E, so entred in the quadrant, that one foot resting thereon may but just touch AE C, findes the point F as before.

[figure]

To proportion out a Sine to a lesser Radius.

Admit I would make F E a line of 90d Sines, and to that Radius would prick down the Sine of 20d; First, prick the Ra­dius E F from C to R, then prick off 20d from the Chords, [Page 19] from AE to H, and draw the line H C into the Center, the nearest distance from R to the said line, is the Sine of 20d to the Radius F E, and is equal to E L.

Otherwise without drawing li [...]es from each respective Arch into the Center.

Draw the line F C into the Center, and from F set off a qua­drant each way to M, and N, and from those Points prick off the Arch proposed to S and T, a ruler laid over those Points cuts the line F C at G, and the nearest distance from G to C E, is equal to E L, as before.

But when a line of Sines is at hand, these quadrants and Arches need not be pricked off, onely set off the Sine of 20d to the com­mon Radius from C to G, and the nearest distance from G to C E, is the Sine required, equal to E L, as before.

A Sine being given in a parallel or lesser Radius, to reduce it to the common Radius, and thereby finde to what Arch it be­longs.

Let E L be the Sine of an Arch in the parallel F E, prick F E from C to R, and upon R as a Center, with the extent L E, describe the Arch V, a ruler laid from the Center, touching the extreamity of that Arch, findes the Point H in the Limbe, and the Arch AE H measured on the Chords is 20d, being the Arch pro­per to L E, and this is the best way when an Arch is not very great, and is the same used in finding the Suns right ascension.

Otherwise, by Sines.

Prick E L from C to I, a ruler laid from I to L cuts the line F C at G, and the extent C G measured on the Sines, is 20d, as before.

Another way to finde it in the Limbe.

Thorough the point L, draw L I parallel to E C, then with the Radius of the parallel F E, setting one foot of that extent in C, with the other cross the line L I, as at y, a ruler laid from C to y, findes the Point X in the Limbe, and the Arch X P is 20d, the measure of L E required, here having a Sine, and the [Page 20] Radius I y, is the Cosine according to the Definitions of Sines, and therefore subtends it's opposite Angle, the Arch whereof is measured by X AE: elswhere in a Treatise of Dyalling, we have by the converse hereof, having the Sine, and Cosine of an Arch given, found the Radius thereto, by this way to Porportion out a Sine to any Radius, is no other in effect then the same with the first way, for y C here, is equal to R C there.

CHAP. V. Shewing how to resolve those Propositions that require the know­ledge of the Suns place.

THe Day of the Moneth being known, to find the Suns true place.

This Proposition is propounded in the first place, because ma­ny others depend upon it, for that being given, his Declina­tion will be easily attained, and this is necessary to be insisted on, because a Table thereof may not be at hand.

Here, according to the Hipothesis of Ticho, it is to be suggested that there is ascribed to the Sun a triple motion; First, A mo­tion upon his own Center, whereby he finisheth one revolution in 26 days time.

2. A dayly motion from the East into the West, whereby he causeth the day and Night.

3. An opposite motion from the West into the East, called his annual motion, whereby he runs once round in a year through the whole Ecliptick, moving near a degree in a day, and thereby cau­seth the several Seasons of the year: these two latter motions are fancied out unto us by a man turning a Grind-stone 365 times round, while a worm strugling against, and contrary to that mo­tion, creeps once round the contrary way, but obliquely and aslope, that is, from the further side of the Grind-stone towards the hi­thermost, and by this motion the Sun is supposed to describe the Ecliptick Line, and continually to insist in this course; the other Planets, except the Moon, moving round him, and following after him like Birds flying in the air, being subject to his motions, and divers of their own besides, many of which motions are removed by the Copernican supposition of the earths motion, which is a subject of much controversie among the learned, however be it either the one or the other, the Propositions hereafter resolved, vary not by reason thereof.

And so the Sun being supposed not to vary from under the Ecliptick, in respect of Latitude, the Proposition or query in effect is, what Longitude he hath therein; which for the present pur­pose need onely be known from the nearest Equinoctial point, now this may be found within a degree by a following verse newly framed for this purpose, which may serve for some ages, the old Latine Distich being now out of date and erronious.

Evil attends its object, vnvail'd vice Vain villains iest, into a Paradice.

In which are twelve words, to represent the twelve Moneths of the year, the first March, the second April, and so forward, and over the respective words are the Characters of the twelve Signs of the Zodiack, thereby denoting that in the Moneth to which the word belongs, the Sun is in that Sign over head; And if it be required to know the day of the Moneth in which the Sun enters into any of those Signs, if the first letter of the word pro­per to the Moneth be a Consonant, the Sun enters into the Sign thereto belonging on the eighth day of the said Moneth, as in the word Paradice belonging to February, in that Moneth he enters Pisces the eighth day, but if it be a Vowel, as all the rest are, adde so many days unto eight as the Vowel denotes; now the Vowels are but five in number, which almost every Child knows how to number.

By this Rule we shall finde that the Sun enters into the re­spective Signs,

  • Aries, March 10
  • Taurus, April 9
  • Gemini, May 11
  • Cancer, June 12
  • Leo, July 13
  • Virgo, August 13
  • Libra, September 13
  • Scorpio, October 13
  • Sagittarius, November 11
  • Capricornus, December 11
  • Aquarius, January 9
  • Pisces, February 8

Now knowing on what day of the Moneth, the Sun enters into any Sign, it will be easie afterwards to know in what degree of the said Sign he is in for any other day.

1. If the number of the day of the given Moneth, exceed the number of that day in which the Sun enters into any Sign, substract the lesser number from the greater, and the remainder is the de­gree of the Sign the Sun possesseth.

Example.

On the 21 of April, I would finde the Suns place, by the verse it appears, the Sun enters into Taurus on the ninth of that Moneth, which taken from 21, there remains 12, shew­ing that the Sun is in the twelfth degree of Taurus, the second Sign, that is, 42d from the next Equinoctial Point.

2. But if the number of the day of the given Moneth, be less then the number of that day in which the Sun enters into the be­ginning of any Sign, the Sun is not yet entred into the said Sign, but is still in the Sign belonging to the former Moneth, in this case substract the given day, from the day of his entrance into the next Sign, and again substract the remainder from 30, and the remainder shews his place in the Sign of the former Moneth.

Example.

Let it be required to know the Suns place the fifth of August, on the 13th day of that Moneth the Sun enters into Virgo, 5 from 13 rests 8, and that taken from 30, there remains 22, shewing that the Sun is in the 22th degree of Leo, the fifth Sign, and con­sequently his distance from the Equinoctial point Libra, is 38 de­grees; Having compared the Suns place, found by the former verse with a new Table of the same in the Sea-mans Calendar, it doth not at any time differ a degree from the truth, and seldom half so much.

In the Propositions following, we shall assume the Suns Decli­nation to be given, in regard there are tables thereof in almost every Mathematical Book.

[Page 23]1. Proposition. The place of the Sun in the Ecliptick, and his greatest Declination being given, to finde his Declination.

[figure]

In the general Scheme of the Analemma we observed that the nearest distance from the Suns place to the Equinoctial, was equal to the Sine of the Suns Declination thereto, having drawn AE C and P C, perpendicular to each other, with 60d of the Chords, setting one foot of the Compasses in C, draw the quadrant or Arch AE P in it, set off the Chord of 23d 31′, the Suns greatest Declination from AE to F, and draw the line F C, the Scheme is fitted to the greater Chord.

Then out of the line of Sines in the Diameter, prick down the Sine of the Suns place, or distance from the next Equinoctal point, which for the 21 of April was 42d, and it reaches to y, the nearest distance from y to AE C, measured on the line of Sines in the Diameter, shews the Declination sought in this Example, 15 degrees and a half, to measure it without Sines, prick the said nearest distance from C to p, and draw the parallel p y f, and the Arch AE f is the measure thereof on the greater Chord.

The Suns place or Declination being given (as before) to finde his right Ascension.

In the former Scheme having drawn the parallel of the Suns [Page 24] Declination passing thorough his place at y, the extent y p, is the Sine of the Suns right Ascension, from the nearest Equinoctial Point to the Radius of the parallel f p, wherefore place the ex­tent p f from C to R, and upon R as a Center, with the extent y p, describe an Arch at B, a Ruler laid from the Center just touching the Extreamity of that Arch, findes the point A in the Limbe of the quadrant, and the Arch AE A measured on the greater Chords, is 39d 33 minutes, and so much is the Suns right Ascension in the first quarter of the Ecliptick, when he is depart­ing from the Equinoctial in Spring.

In the second quarter of the Ecliptick in Summer, the Sun re­turning towards the Equinoctial, and having the like Declination, his right Ascension is the complement of the Arch before found, to a Semicircle, to wit, 140d 27′.

In Autumn, or the third quarter, the Sun having the like De­clination towards the depressed Pole, the right Ascension found by the Scheme, must have a Semicircle added thereto, and would in this Example be 219d 33′.

In the Winter, or last quarter, the right Ascension is the complement of the Arch found to a whole Circle, and would be in this Example 320d 27′, the uses hereof we mentioned in the Definitions.

CHAP. VI. Shewing how to resolve those common Propositions relating to the Suns Motion, that require the Latitude of the place to be known, as also the Suns true place, or his Declination to be given.

[figure]

WIth 60d of a line of Chords upon the Center C, de­scribe the Semicircle S Z N, and draw the Diameter [Page 25] S C N representing the Horizon, and raise Perpendicular there­to Z C, and from Z to AE, as also from N to P, out of the Chords prick off 51d 32′ the given Latitude, and draw AE C representing the Equinoctial, and C P the Axis, then if the Suns place be given, prick from the Chords from AE to F 23d 31′ his greatest Declination, and draw the line F C, wherein prick down from C to y out of the Sines, his distance from the near­est Equinoctial point, as in the first Scheme, admit 60d, and through the point y draw the line y W, parallel to AE C, and it shall be the parallel of Declination, but in this Example we sup­pose the Suns Declination to be given 20d 12′, prick the Chord of it from AE to G, then prick the Sine of it from C to A, or which is all one, set the nearest distance from G to AE C, from C to A, as before, and through the point A, draw the line G A W, and it represents the Parallel of the Suns Declination; and through the point A, draw the line H A B parallel to the Hori­zontal line C N, and so is the Sphere Orthographically (in right lines) projected, and fitted for the resolution of many questions.

1. To finde the Amplitude.

Measure the Extent, C W on the line of Sines, and it will reach to 33d 42′, and so much doth the Sun rise or set to the Northward of the East and West in the Latitude of London, when his Declination is 20d 12′ North, but he rises and sets so much to the Southward of the East and West, when his Declination is as much South, and this Proposition is of use to finde the varia­tion of the Compass.

By comparing the Coast, or bearing of the Sun, observed at his rising or setting by an Azimuth Compass with his true Coast, or bearing found by this Proposition or Calculation, the difference sheweth the Variation sought.

If the Suns parallel of Declination G W, doth not meet with the Horizontal line S N, as in Regions or Latitudes far North, the Sun doth neither rise nor set.

2. To find his Altitude at the hour of six.

The nearest distance from A to C W equal to H C, mea­sured on the Sines, sheweth it to be 15d 41′, and so much is his [Page 26] Depression under the Horizon at six, when his Declination is 20d 12′ South.

3. His Altitude or Height, being East or West.

Measure the Extent C I, on the line of Sines, and it reaches to 26d 11′, and so much is the Altitude sought in Summer, but so much is his Depression under the Horizon in Winter, to the like Declination when he is East or West. If the Suns parallel of Declination G A doth not meet with the Vertical Circle C Z, the Sun cometh not to be East or West, as it often happeneth in small Latitudes or in Countries between the Tropicks.

4. His Ascensional difference or time of rising and setting from six.

This is represented by A W in the parallel of Declination, and is therefore to be reduced to the Common Radius.

Take the Radius of the parallel A G, and prick it from C to R, then take the Extent A W, and setting one foot upon B, with the other draw the touch of an Arch at E, lay a Ruler from C, so as it may but just touch the outwardmost verge of the said Arch, and it cuts the Circle at D, take the Chord or extent D N, and measure it on the line of Chords, and it reaches to 27d 35′ which being converted into time, is one hour 46 minutes, and so much doth the Sun rise before and set after six in Summer, but so much doth he rise after and set before six in Winter, when his De­clination is as much South.

5. The time when the Sun will be due East and West.

The hour from six is represented by A I in the parallel of De­clination, with that extent upon the point R, draw the Arch O, a Ruler laid from C to the extremity of the said Arch, cuts the Circle at P, and the distance P N measured on the Chords, shew­eth 16d 18′, which converted into time, is one hour 5′, and so much after six in the Morning, or before it in the afternoon, will the Sun be due East and West.

6. The Suns Azimuth at the hour of six.

This is represented by H A, in the parallel H A B, prick H B [Page 27] from C to K, and with H A upon the point K, draw the Arch L, a Ruler laid from C, just touching the said Arch, cuts the Circle at M, the distance S M measured on the Chords, sheweth 12d 53′, and so much is the Sun to the Northward of the East, at the hour of six.

CHAP. VII. Shewing how all the 16 Cases of right Angled Sphaerical Triangles, may be reduced to four heads of Proportion, and resolved by light from the Analemma.

1. IN Sines alone of the greater to the less, wherein the Radius leads, whereof there are three such Cases.

2. Proportions in Sines alone of the less to the greater, where­in the Radius may be in the second or third places, whereof there are five such Cases.

3. Proportions wherein the Radius is first, a Sine last, and two Tangents in the middle, whereof there are three Cases.

4. Proportions wherein the Radius is first, a Sine second, and two Tangents, the two other Tearms, according to which Distri­bution, the Proportions for all the Cases may be collected from my Treatise the Sector on a quadrant.

Now the Analemma, if it be minded, shews us how to resolve all these Cases.

In finding the Suns Declination from his given place, and greatest Declination, or his Altitude at six, it shews how to work Proportions in Sines alone of the first kind, and the Converse, or in finding the Amplitude or Vertical Altitude, it shews the se­cond kind, suitable to each Variety, we shall adde one Example.

1. An Example of the first Variety.

Let the Proportion be,

As the Radius to the Sine of 38d 49′.

So is the Sine of 31d 27′.

To the Sine of 19d 6′.

Having drawn the quadrant P C E, prick one of the middle Tearms of the Proportion from P to O, to wit, 38d 49′, and draw the line O C, then out of the line of Sines prick the other middle [Page 28] Tearm from C to W, to wit, 31d 27′, and the nearest distance from W to C P, being equal to W G, is the Sine of the fourth Proportional, and being measured on the Sines, sheweth 19d 6′.

2. An Example of the second kinde.

Let the Proportion be,

As the Sine of 51d 11′, Is to the Radius,

So is the Sine of 24d.

To what Sine? 31d 27′.

Having drawn the quadrant C E P, prick the middle Tearm (not the Radius) from E to B 24d, and draw B G parallel to E C, then prick the first Tearm from E to O, a Ruler laid over O, from the Center, findes the point W, and the Extent W C measured on the Sines, sheweth 31d 27′, the fourth Proportional Sine sought.

3. An Example of the third kinde.

[figure]

Let the Propor­tion be,

As the Radius to the Tangent of 38d 49′.

So is the Tan­gent of 24d.

To what Sine? Answer: The Sine of 21d.

Operation.

With 60d of the Chords, draw the quadrant P C E, and then prick off one of the middle Tearms being a Tangent in the Limbe with the Chords, here 38d 49′ is set from P to O, and the other middle Tearm being a Tangent, prick [Page 29] down the Chord thereof, namely, of 24d from E to B, and through the point B, draw B G parallel to C E, so is G W the Sine sought, but found in a parallel set G B from C to A, and upon A, with the extent G W, draw the Arch F; a Ruler laid from C, just touching the extreamity of that Arch, cuts the Circle at D, the distance P D being measured on the Chords, sheweth 21d, and so much is the sine sought.

If it be desired to measure it in a Sine, draw a line from B to C, and through the point W, draw a line parallel to G C, the di­stance between C, and the point of Intersection, or crossing being measured on the Sines, will shew 21d as before, but this is not ne­cessary unless G W be large.

Demonstr [...]ion.

The Proportion that find [...] the Ascensional difference is,

As the Radius, is to the Tangent of the Latitude:

So is the Tangent of the Declination,

To the Sine of the Ascensional difference.

The Proportion before wrought, is a Proportion of the same nature with this, and after the same manner as the Ascensional difference was found in the Analemma, was the said Proportion protracted, the truth of the Analemma being out of all doubt, ma­ny hundred years since invented, and demonstrated, which I shall not make my present task to repeat.

Otherwise.

It may be demonstrated from Proportion solely, the former Proportion may be Varied to stand thus.

As the Tangent of 66d to Radius,

So the Tangent of 38d 49′,

To the Sine of 21d.

Making G C Radius, B G becomes the Tangent of 66d, and W G the Tangent of 38d 49′, then it holds, making B G also t [...]e Radius of a line o [...] Sines.

As B G the Tan [...]ent of 66d to B G the Radius,

So W G the T [...]ngent of 38d 49′.

To W G the Sine of the fourth Proportional to that Radius, which was reduced to the common Radius, by the prescribed Di­rections, [Page 30] whence it may be observed, that if two Tearms of such a Proportion be fixed, a line placed against the Limbe of a qua­drant as B G, with a Thread from the Center, will operate Pro­portions in Sines and Tangents.

Otherwise taking the Proportion as at first propounded.

Raise a Perpendicular from P, meeting with C O produced, and the said Perpendicular shall be the Tangent of 38d 49′, and then it holds.

As the Radius C P, to the said Tangent,

So is C G the Sine of the third Tearm, to G W, the fourth Pro­portional, the [...] because the third Tearm C G, being a Tangent, was changed into a [...]i [...], the Cosine thereof G B must become Radius, for as the Tangent o [...] [...]n Arch, is to the Sine of an Arch, so is the Radius to the Cosine of th [...] [...]id Arch.

4. An Example of the fourth kinde.

Let the Proportion be,

As the Radius to the Sine of 38d 49′,

So is the Tangent of 31d 27′,

To what Tangent? 21d.

Operation.

With 60d of the Chords upon the Center C, draw the qua­drant P E, and draw the Radiu [...] P C, with 90d of the Chords prick off P E, and draw E C, so [...] the quadrant finished.

Out of the Chords prick off P O, 38d 49′, the second Tearm of the Proportion, and draw the line O C.

Then out of the Sines from C to V, prick off 31d 27′, the third Tearm of the Proportion, and thorough the point W, draw G W B, parallel to C E, and place G [...] from C to A, upon which as a Center, with the extent G W, describe the Arch F, a Ruler from C touching it, findes the Point D in the Limbe, and the Arch P D, is the measure of the fourth Proportional.

Demonstration.

The Proportion that findes the Suns Azimuth at the hour of six, is,

As the Radius is to the Cosine of the Latitude,

So is the Tangent of the Declination,

To the Tangent of the Azimuth from East or West.

The Proportion before protracted, is a Proportion of the same nature, and after the same manner as we found the Azimuth at six before by the Analemma, was the said Proportion protracted, yet here it is to be suggested, that in the Analemma there are three Proportions in Sines wrought, instead of the one in Sines and Tangents before expressed.

1. As namely to finde the Suns Altitude at Six.

As the Radius is to the Sine of the Latitude,

So is the Sine of the Declination,

To the Sine of the Suns height at six.

2. To finde his Azimuth in that parallel of Altitude.

As the Radius is to the Cosine of the Latitude,

So is the Sine of the Declination, to the Sine of the Azimuth in the said Parallel.

3. To reduce it to the common Radius.

As the Cosine of the Altitude at six,

Is to the Radius,

So is the Sine of the Azimuth in that parallel,

To the Sine thereof in the common Radius.

The two latter Proportions in Sines, may be brought into one, as I have shewed in a Treatise, the Sector on a quadrant, Pag. 111, 114. and that will be,

As the Cosine of the Altitude at six,

Is to the Cosine of the Latitude,

So is the Sine of the Declination,

To the Sine of the Azimuth sought.

And thus in effect, the Analemma performs that single Propor­tion intermingled with Tangents after a more laborious manner in Sines, or if you will the Altitude at six being found, it holds:

As the Cotangent of the said Altitude,

Is to the Radius,

So is the Cotangent of the Latitude, to the Sine of the Azimuth sought; and this Proportion lies visible in the Analemma.

By these Directions derived from the Analemma, together with the Proportions for each Case, all the 16 Cases of right angled Sphaerical Triangles may be resolved; some whereof seem to require the drawing of an Ellipsis, as namely, if the Suns place and right Ascension were given, to find his greatest Declination, which notwithstanding, according to these Directions, is easily shunned.

CHAP. VIII. Shewing how to come by the Suns Altitude or Height, without Instrument.

UPon any Flat or Plain, that is, level or parallel to the Hori­zon, erect or set up a Wire, without inclining or leaning to either side, admit in the Point C, and when you would finde the Suns Altitude or height, make a mark at that instant in the very end or extreamity of its shadow, suppose at G the shadow be-being the Line C G.

[figure]

Then upon the same Flat draw the quadrant of a Circle C A F, with 60d of your Chords, and make C E equal to the height of the Wire, and through the point E, draw the line E D parallel to C A, and therein prick down the length of the shadow from E to D, a Ruler laid from the Center to D, cuts the quadrant at B, and the Arch B A measured on the Chords, sheweth the height re­quired in this Example 20d 25′, in like manner if the length of the shadow were E K, the height would be N A 38d 16′.

Otherwise.

This may be performed otherways, by drawing the quadrant C A F, upon any plain board whatsoever, then stick in a Pin at the Center C, and hold the board so towards the Sun, that the sha­dow [Page 33] thereof may fall upon the line C A, then imagine C G to represent, or supply the use of a Thread and Plummet hanging up­on the Pin in the Center at liberty, and mark where it cuts the Arch of the quadrant F A, suppose at H, measure the Arch F H, on the line of Chords, and it shews the height requi [...]ed: By the next Chapter we shall finde the Suns Azimuth belonging to the Altitude, 20d 25′, (according to the Latitude and Declination there given) to be 31d 19′ from the Meridian, admit to the Westward of the South, then doth the shadow happen so much to the Eastward of the No [...]th, wherefore if 31d 19′ be set off in the quadrant, from the line of shadow, from H to N, a line drawn into the Center, as N C, shall be a true Meridian Line, or line of North and South.

CHAP. IX. Shewing the Resolution of such Propositions wherein the Suns Al­titude i [...] either given or sought.

THe Latitude of the place, Declination of the Sun, and his Altitude given, to finde the hour of the day and the Azimuth of the Sun.

Example.

[figure]

Latitude 51d 32′ North,

Declination 13d South,

Altitude 14d 40′.

With 60d of the Chords draw the Circle S Z, N E, the Cen­ter whereof is at C, and draw the Diameter S C N and Per­pendicular ther­to Z C, prick off the Latitude 51d 3′ from N [Page 34] to P, and from Z to AE, and draw the Axis B P, and the Equator AE C Q, prick off the Declination from AE to D, and from Q to E, being 13d from the Chords, and draw the parallel of De­clination D B E, then from S to A, and from N to O, out of the Chords, prick off 14d 40′ the Altitude, and draw the parallel of Altitude A O, so is B ⊙ the hour from six towards Noon in the parallel of Declination, and M ⊙ the Azimuth of the Sun, from the East or West Southwards.

To measure the Hour.

Set the extent B D, from C to F, and upon F as a Center, with the extent B ⊙, draw the Arch G, a Ruler laid from C, just touching that Arch, findes the point H, the Arch N H measured on the Chords, sheweth 45d, and so much is the hour from six, to wit, in time three hours, either nine in the forenoon, or three in the afternoon.

To measure the Azimuth.

In like manner set M A, from C to R, and upon R with the extent M ⊙, draw the Arch I, a Ruler laid thereto, from C cuts the Limbe at L, the Arch L S measured on the Chords, is 44d 35′, and so much is the Sun to the Southwards of the East or West.

To finde the Angle of Position.

Place the complement of the Altitude Z A, from P to g, then place the extent A g, from g to f, a Ruler laid over A, and f cuts the parallel of the Suns Declination at t, and D t is the ver­sed Sine of the Angle of Position.

To measure it.

Thorough the point t, draw k t y parallel to the Axis B P, and draw D C, then the extent C y measured on the Sines, shew­eth the complement of it, to wit, 62d 57′, therefore the said Angle is 27d 3′.

Otherwise: With the extent B D, setting one foot in the Cen­ter at C, with the other cross the former parallel line k t at k, a Ruler laid from C to k, cuts the Limbe at X, and the Arch [Page 35] AE X is 27d 3′, the measure thereof as before, the Complement whereof is the Arch V E, and might be measured from the South Pole V, if the Equinoctial AE Q were not drawn.

Three sides given to finde an Angle.

Another Example, the Declination being North,

Latitude 51d 32′,

Declination 13d North,

Altitude 37d 18′. In the following Scheme,

Upon the Center C, with 60d of the Chords, describe a Circle, prick one of the sides, namely, the Colatitude 38d 28′ from Z to P in the Limbe, and from P prick the Suns polar distance 77d to D and E, and draw the parallel of Declination D E, from Z, prick off the complement of the Altitude to A and O, to wit, 52d 42′, and draw the parallel of Altitude A O, so is the hour and Azimuth found in these two parallels without drawing any more lines, the drawing of the Axis C P was onely to divide the parallel D E into halfs at B; Likewise the drawing of C Z, divides the paral­lel A O into halfs at M, which may be found without drawing lines by laying a Ruler from C to Z and P, or if you will draw the Horizontal line S N passing thorough the Center, and above it the Altitude may be set from S to A, and from N to O, in like manner if the Equinoctial be drawn, the Declination being North, is to be set above it.

The manner of measuring, is the same as before, To finde the Hour.

C F is made equal to B D, then upon F with the extent B ⊙, draw the Arch G, a Ruler from the Cen [...]er touching G findes H, and the Arch H N being 45d, is the hour from Noon.

For the Azimuth.

C R is made equal to M A, then upon R with M ⊙ draw I, a Ruler from the Center touching it, findes L, and the Arch L S measured on the Chords, is 30d, and so much is the Azimuth to the Southwards of the East or West.

To finde the Angle of Position.

Here also Z A is placed from P to g, and then g f is made [Page 36] equal to g A, a Ruler from A to f, cuts the parallel of Declina­tion at t, and D t is the versed Sine of the angle of Position, which being measured as in the former Example for finding it, will be found to be 33d 34′.

[figure]

Another Example for South Declination 13d, retaining the for­mer Latitude.

A new Scheme need not be drawn, the Declination being as much South, let the Altitude be 20d 25′, prick the Altitude from S to Q, and from N to X, and draw the parallel Q X, where it crosse [...]h the parallel of Declination, set V, joyn C X, and draw V r parallel to W C.

To finde the Hour.

Upon F as a Center, with the extent B V, describe the Arch K, a Ruler from the Center touching it findes T, the Arch N T being 60d, is the hour from six, to wit, either ten in the morning, or two in the afternoon.

To finde the Azimuth.

The extent C r measured on the Sines, is 58d 41′, and so much is the Suns Azimuth to the Southward of the East or West in this our Northern Hemisphere.

A third Example, for finding the Azimuth.

In the former Examples, it may be observed that the Azimuth is alwayes found in the parallels of Altitude, which towards the Zenith grow very small, and consequently this way of finding the Azimuth in Latitudes, between or near the Tropicks, and some­times in our own Latitude, when the Sun hath much Altitude, will be very inconvenient; for remedying whereof let it be noted, that the Azimuth may be alwayes found in the parallel of Lati­tude.

Example: For the Latitude of the Barbadoes 13d, ⊙ Declination 20d North, Altitude 52d 27′.

[figure]
[figure]

In the first Scheme, having drawn the Horizon S N, its Axis C Z, the parallel of Altitude B A 52d 27′, set off the Latitude from N to P 13d, and draw the Axis C P, prick off the comple­ment of the Declination 70d from P to D, and E, and draw the parallel of Declination D E, then is F ⊙ the Sine of the Azimuth, from East or West Northwards F A being Radius, which being placed from C to G, and the Arch I described with F ⊙, a Ru­ler from the Center touching it findes S L 16d the measure of the Azimuth in the Limbe, but thus to transfer from a less to a greater will breed much incertainty, and the parallels of Altitude near the Zenith decrease very much, for remedying this inconve­nience, change the names Latitude and Altitude, and fit the Ana­lemma thereto, for the bare changing of the names of the two containing sides of a Triangle, doth not alter the quantity of the angle comprehended:

Then will the new Latitude be 52d 27′,

And the new Altitude 13d 00.

I say, the Azimuth is the same as it is in the Latitude of 13d when the Altitude is 52d 27′. Also the hour from noon in the new Latitude, is equal to the angle of Position in the old Lati­tude, [Page 39] and the angle of Position in the new Latitude, is equal to the hour from noon in the old Latitude.

The old or first Scheme may very well serve if you set off 70d the complement of the Declination each way from A, the end of the parallel of Altitude, and then through the point P, draw the parallel of Altitude parallel to the Horizon.

But here we have drawn a second Scheme, where N P is 52d 27′, P D and P E 70d, thorough which points are drawn the pa­rallel D E; Also S B and N A is 13d, thorough which is drawn the parallel B A, then is F ⊙ the Sine of the Suns Azimuth to the Northwards of the East, to the Radius F A which is placed from C to G, upon which with F ⊙, was the Arch I described, and the Azimuth S L found to be 16d as before.

Nota, also in the first Scheme (or in both) that the Radius C G might have been doubled, and pricked upon N S produced, then also must the extent F ⊙ have been doubled, and the Arch I therewith described; also, the hour of the day might after the same manner be found in the parallel of Latitude which may be convenient for Stars that have much Declination in that Case, the Declination and Latitude must change Names.

And thus when three sides are given to finde an angle, we may find it in the Analemma, by calling the complements of those sides the Declination, the Latitude, and the Altitude, or Depression at pleasure.

Also when three Angles are given to finde a side, those Angles must be changed into sides, by taking the complement of the greatest Angle to a Semicircle, and writing it, and the other An­gles down to their opposite sides in another Triangle, as in the Scheme following, wherein as the angles are changed into sides; so are the sides changed into angles, and then the Case will be the same as before.

[figure]

Two sides with the angle comprehended to finde the third side, and both the other angles.

By this Case may be found the Suns Altitudes on all hours, and the distances of places in the Arch of a great Circle.

First, the Suns Altitudes on all hours, thereby is meant that if the hour of the day, the Declination and Latitude be given, the Suns Altitude proper to that hour (or his depression) may be found.

[figure]

Upon the Center C, with 60d of the Chords, describe the Arch S D P E, the Diameter or Horizontal Line S C N, and from N to P prick off by the Chords the Latitude 51d 32′, and from P to D and E, set off 66d 29′ the complement of the Suns declination, and draw the Parallel of Declination D E, and the Axis C G P. Draw the Radius D C, and therein out of the Sines prick

down15dfor the hours of1from 6 before it and after it,, then take
302
453
604
755

the nearest distances from 15d to C G, and prick it from G to 5 and 7, likewise take the nearest distances from 30d to C G, and set it from G to 8 and 4, and the like for the rest, then will the nearest distances from 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, to the Horizontal Line S C N, be the Sines of the respective Altitudes sought, and are accordingly to be measured on the line of Sines, so the Alti­tudes

for the hours4in Summer will be1d34′
5930
61812

and so much is the Suns depression under the Horizon at the hours of 8, 7, and 9 in Winter: the Summer Altitudes for the

hours7are27d23′
83642
94542
105345
115942

And the Winter Altitudes for the hours9are5d13′
101028
111348

and so much are the Summer depressions for the hours 3, 2, 1, from midnight, and are found in the Line H E, by taking the nearest distances in that line from the points 9, 10, 11, unto the line H N, [...]or if this Scheme be turned upward, then is H E the parallel of [...]eclination above the Horizon for 23d 31′ of South Declination; [...]nd if you will, the parallels of Altitude may be drawn, as is 8 A, [...]nd the arch A N measured on the Chords, is 36d 42′ as before; [...]nd now having the Declination, Latitude and Altitude, the Azi­muth [Page 42] and Angle of Position may be found according to former directions, and are the two other Angles required.

I have before suggested, that the names of Declination and latitude might change places, the angle remaining the same, hence it follows that a Star that hath 51d 32′ of north declination in the latitude of 23d 31′, shall have the like altitudes on all hours, or horary distances from the Meridian, as the Sun having 23d 31′ of north declination, hath in the latitude of 51d 32′, whereof no Example is needful.

Now to apply what hath been said to the finding of the di­stances of places in the arch of a great Circle, let it be noted that this Case of finding the Suns Altitudes on all hours, and that for finding of distances are both of them one and the same case of Sphaerical Triangles, namely, two sides with the Angle compre­hended given, to finde the third side, in the following Tri­angle B L P.

[figure]

Let L signifie London, P the North pole, I Java major, and let it be required to finde the distance between Java major and Lon­don in the arch of a great Circle, their difference of longitude be­ing 114d 10′. To resolve this Proposition, call the difference of Longitude the hour from noon, and the side I P the Suns polar distance, and the side L P the complement of the Latitude, and fit the Analemma to the resolution thereof, as before, for finding the Suns Altitudes or Depressions.

Example.

Java major, Lat. 9d. South Long. 140d. London, Lat. 51d 32′. North Long. 25d 50′. Diff. Long. 114d 10′.

[figure]

Upon C as a Center, describe the arch G L F. In the Limbe from L to P prick the complement of the Latitude of London 38d 28′, from P set off 99d to D and E, being the distance of the other place from the North pole, and draw D M E, draw L C, and C P continued, and the Radius D C, therein from C to K out of the Sines prick down 24d 10′, the excess of the difference of Longitude above a quadrant, the nearest distance from K to M C, place from M to I, so is D I the versed Sine of the diffe­rence of Longitude in that parallel; and if from L and P you draw the prickt arks meeting at I, the Triangle is represented: through I draw F B G perpendicular to L C, and L B is the ver­sed Sine of the distance of these two places, to wit, 111d 58′, found by measuring C B on the Sines, to wit, 21d 58′, whereto the quadrant L C is to be added. The distance thus found, is the ark of a great Circle passing between those places, which is to be converted into Leagues or Miles, allowing 60 Miles to a degree, [Page 44] if it be assented to, that so many raise or lay the Pole one degree under the Meridian; Also F I is the versed Sine of the Angle of Position P L I, to measure it prick the Radius B F from C to k, and upon it with B I, describe the Ark O, a Ruler from the Center findes Q, and the Ark L Q is 13d 41′, being substract­ed from 90d, rests 76d 19′, and so much is the Angle P L I the Angle of Position at London, thereby is meant the Angle between the Meridian of London, and the Ark of the great Circle passing between both places.

To finde the Angle of Position at Java major, that is, the Angle between the Meridian of that place, and the aforesaid Arch of a great Circle.

Place L G from P to F, and make f h equal to G f, a Ruler laid from h to G cuts D M at t, parallel to M P draw t y, then measure y C on the Sines, and it is 52d 17′, the complement whereof is 37d 43′, being the Angle of Position at Java major.

After the same manner are the distances of Stars to be found, their Longitudes and Latitudes being given, or their Declinations and right Ascensions.

Thus when two sides with the Angle comprehended are given, may the third side be found, and that being found, then either of the other angles may be found.

If two Angles with the side between them, or their interjacent side were given to finde rhe third Angle, or one of the other sides, in both these cases there must be a conversion or changing of the given angles into sides, and of the given side into an angle, by taking the complement of the greatest angle, (or of the side if that be greatest) to a Semicircle, and then drawing a new Tri­angle, write them down to their opposite sides, and the case will be the same as before.

[figure]

For now we have two sides, and the angle comprehended in the latter Triangle, to finde the third side thereof ⊙ P, the complement whereof to a Semicircle shall be equal to the angle ⊙ Z P in the first Triangle, and the angles at

  • P

in the latter Triangle, shall be equal to the side

  • Z P
  • ⊙ Z

in the first Triangle.

Thus we have finished the six certain oblique Cases of Sphaeri­cal Triangles, to wit,

1. Three sides to finde an angle.

2. Three angles to finde a side.

3. Two sides with the angle comprehended, to find the third side.

4. Or to find one of the other angles.

5. Two angles with the side between them, to find the third angle

6. Or one of the other sides.

And here it may be observed that the fourth case cannot be resolved by this Projection without finding the third side first, which is the thing required in the third case, yet it may be resol­ved from proportions immediatly, without the knowledge of the third side, as I have explained in a Treatise of Geometricall Dyal­ling; as also in the first Book of the Marriners plain Scale new Plain'd. There remaines yet Six other Cases, to wit,

7. Two sides with an angle opposite to one of them, to find the [...]hird side.

8. From the same Data or parts of the Triangle given, to finde [...]e angle included, that is, the angle betweene the two given [...]des.

[Page 46]9. To finde the Angle opposite to the other side.

The eighth and ninth Cases also requires the third side to be found first, before the angle included, or the angle opposite to the other side can be found from this Projection (as to my knowledge) yet are easily resolved from proportions without finding the said third side at all, as in the said first Part.

10. Two Angles with a side opposite to one of them, to finde the third Angle.

11. To finde the interjacent side, or side between them.

12. To finde the side opposite to the other Angle.

And these three Cases are the same with the seventh, eighth, and ninth, when the Angles are changed into sides, and the side into an Angle.

These six latter Cases I call the doubtful Cases, because some­times a double answer must be given, and both true, and when these Cases will happen, and when not, I have shewed at large in a Treatise, called The Sector on a quadrant.

3. Two sides with an angle opposite to them, to finde the third side.

By this Case if the Suns true Azimuth and Altitude thereto be observed at any time off the Meridian, and his Declination given, the Latitude may be found.

Example given.

Suns Declination, 23d 31′ North.

Azimuth, 20d to Southwards of the Vertical.

Altitude, 44d 39′

Demanded the Latitude, Z AE, 51d 32′.

[figure]

In every Scheme of the Analemma, observe that the near­est distance of the point of the Suns place in his pa [...]allel of Altitude from the Equinoctial Line, is equal to the Sine of his Declination, from whence the resolution of this Proposition easily follows.

Having with 60 degrees of the Chords upon the Center C, drawn the Semicircle S Z N, the Diameter S C N, the Axis of the Horizon Z C, out of the Chords prick off the given Altitude from S to A, and from N to B, and draw the parallel thereof A F D B, then ptoportion out the Sine of 20 degrees to the Radius A D, draw the line A C, and therein from the Sines prick off 20 degrees from C to 20 degrees, and take the nearest distance to C D, and set that extent from D to the point F, then take 23 degrees 31 minutes from the Sines, and setting one foot in F, with the other draw the arch L, a right Line drawn from C, just touching the outward extreamity of that arch, as doth AE C, shall be the Equinoctial, and so the arch S AE is the complement of the Latitude, and Z AE the Latitude sought, in this Case 51d 32′.

By this Case of Triangles, the Declination and Latitude be­ing given, the Suns Altitudes (or Depressions) to each assigned Azimuth may be found

This case may be done without the drawing of any Ellipsis, and that divers wayes, though it hath not hitherto been so repu­ted; in order whereto observe that any two containing sides of a Triangle, may change names, as in the former Example: if the Latitude be 44d 39′, the Altitude to that Azimuth will be 38d 28′, consequently by the same Scheme and manner of work, if the Azimuths be prickt off in the parallel of Latitude, the respective Altitudes thereto may be found; but this Scheme I have further insisted upon in the first Part.

[figure]

Another manner of Operation.

Let the Latitude be 51d 32′ North.

The Suns Declination 23d 31′ North.

And let it be required to finde the Suns respective Altitudes to the Azimuths of 20d and 60d, on each side from the Vertical Circle. Upon the Center C, describe an arch bigger then a Se­micircle, and draw the Horizontal Line S C N, and its Axis Z C at right angles thereto, and set off the Latitudes from S to A, and draw the parallel thereof L A, set off the Declination likewise from N to E, and draw the parallel thereof D E, which is easily done by pricking off the like arch above S.

Now to proportion out the Sines to the Radius A L, draw the Line A C, and there prick down the Sines of 20d and 60d, and take the nearest distances therefrom to the line C Z, and transfer or place those respective extents into the parallel of Latitude L A, pricking them down from L, then one foot of the Compasses resting in C, take the distance to 20d and 60d in the parallel of Latitude L A, and transfer or place them into the parallel of Declination D E, and there number them, as before, then take the distance between the Zenith at Z, and 20d in the parrallel of Latitude L A, and the said extent shall reach from 20d in the parallel of Declination D E, to F upward, and to H downwards.

The arch N F being 44d 39′, is the Suns height for 20d of Azi­muth to the southwards of the East or West, and the arch N H 14d 15′, is the Suns height for the like Azimuth to the northwards of the East or West.

Also the distance between 60d in the parallel of Latitude and the Zenith Z, reacheth from 60d in the parallel of Declination to Q upwards, and to R downwards.

The ark N Q being 59d 21′, is the Suns height for 60d of Azimuth to the southwards of the East or West, and the ark N R being 9d 43′, is the Suns depression in Summer for 60d of Azi­muth to the northwards of the East or West; It is also his Win­ter Altitude for 60d of Azimuth from East or West southwards, when his Declination is 23d 31′ south, which is as much as we supposed it to be north.

The ground of the former Scheme, is, that the Sun in his pa­rallel of Altitude hath the like distance from the Zenith, as in his parallel of Declination, also his distance from the Center in his parallel of Altitude, is the same with his distance from the Cen­ter in his parallel of Declination, whence follows another Deli­neation of the Analemma suitable to this case, for we may place the parallel of Declination parallel to the Horizon, which now must represent the Equinoctial, then if the Sine of the Azimuth be prickt down in any given parallel of Altitude, the distance of that point from the Center and Zenith are both given, then ma­king the Sun to have the like distance in his parallel of Declina­tion from the Center, as he had in his parallel of Latitude: and moreover, if from the said point his distance from the Zenith in his parallel of Altitude be applied upward, it wil give the Latitude or Zenith sought, from the Horizontal line representing the Equi­noctial, and by the bare change of names, if the Sines of the respe­ctive Azimuths be prickt down in the parallel of Latitude, the respective Zeniths will become the Altitudes sought. See page 38 to this purpose. And the same Zenith distance and Center di­stance, is common to Azimuths as much remote on the other side the Vertical, wherefore the Scheme findes both.

[figure]

In like manner if it were required to finde what Altitudes the middlemost Star in the Bears-tail should have upon the Azimuth of 40d to the northwards of the East or West. Having drawn the Parallel of Latitude A L 51d 32′, and therein proportioned out the Sine of 40d L B, to the Radius L A, prick off the Declination of that Star from N to E, being 56d 45′, and place the nearest distance from E to N C, from C to D, and draw the Parallel D E, then one foot of the Compasses resting in C, place the di­stance C B into the Parallel of Declination at G, then the ex­tent Z B will reach from G to F upwards, and to H downwards.

The arch S F being 80d 50′, is the greater Altitude that the Star shall have upon that Azimuth, and N H 45d 3′ is the lesser Altitude: and here observe, that such Stars as have more decli­nation then the complement of the Latitude, never rise nor set; if their declination be also more then the latitude of the place, they will have two altitudes or heights on every Azimuth from the Meridian, except the remotest. See Page 115, 130, 132 of my Treatise The Sector on a Quadrant about this subject.

To finde the Altitudes on all Azimuths.

To these ways I shall adde one more, purposely invented by my loving Friend Mr. Thomas Harvie, to shun the drawing of an Ellipsis, occasioned by a Question sent out of France by Jean Montfert, proposed to all the English Mathematicians, which the said Mr. Harvie speedily resolved, and hath since published his Resolution in Latine in a single Sheet, sold by Henry Sutton Mathematical Instrument-maker in Thread-needle street behinde [Page 51] the Exchange, from which the Reader may be furnished with the Demonstration of what follows, the Geometrical performance ensuing being the same with that in the Authors Sheet, from whence, and by conference with the Author, I attained it.

[figure]

Given Latitude 51d 32′ North.

Declination 23d 31′ North.

Azimuth 30d from the Vertical, that is, from the east or west Required the Suns Altitudes to that Azimuth on each side the Vertical.

Having described a Circle S Z N, and drawn the Horizon S C N, the Axis or Vertical Z C B, prick off the Poles height or latitude from N to P, and from P set off 66d 29′, the Suns Polar distance being the complement of the Declination to D and E, and draw the Parallel D E. Prick down the Sine of the given Azimuth 30d out of the Sines from C to G, and from G draw B G parallel to D E, and joyn S B produced or continued, then thorough the Point F, draw the Line H A parallel to S B, then is the arch S A 49d 56′, the Suns Altitude for the Azimuth of 60d from the South, and the arch N H being 6d 36′, is the [Page 52] Suns height for the Azimuth of 60d from the North. If H had fallen below N, then had the arch H N been the ark of the Suns depression under the Horizon, proper to the Azimuth given from the East or West northwards.

It had also been the Suns height for the like Declination to­wards the south Pole, proper to the like Azimuth counted from the East or West southwards, so that there needs no Scheme for South Declinations.

Nota, The excellency of this way further appears in this, that if the Azimuth we [...]e required, and the Latitude, Declination and Height given, the very contrary work would finde G C the Sine of the Azimuth to the common Radius.

The same manner of Operation also holds for the Sun or Stars when their Declination is more then the Latitude, in which case the Parallel of Declination will not cross the line C Z within the Circle, but must be produced to cut the line C Z continued without the Circle above Z, and then a line from the Intersection F happening without, being drawn parallel to S B, will pass through the quadrant Z N in two points, which shall be the two Altitudes required, when it so happens. And here note, that if C G had been pricked towards N, then B would have fallen as much above C, as it doth in the former Example below it, from which point B a line must be drawn to N in stead of S, which will be parallel to S B; and therefore a line drawn parallel thereto passing through F, shall as well give the Altitudes required, as it did before; wherefore when the distance between A and F is but small, though the point F happen within, yet the operation will be most certain to place C G on the other side the Vertical.

But here we must prevent an inconvenience, for in small La­titudes when the Declination towards the elevated Pole is more then the Latitude, the parallel of Declination will not meet with the Vertical or Axis of the Horizon, but at a remote or inconve­nient distance. I shall onely mention how this Inconvenience may be shunned, omitting an Example thereof, in regard other ways before spoke to may prove more convenient.

Two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them, to finde the Angle included, that is, the Angle between those Sides, and the Angle opposite to the other given Side.

Example. Admit there were given the Latitude of the place and the Suns Declination, (from which ark are got the two sides) and the Azimuth, and it were required to finde the hour, that is, the angle included, and the angle of Position, that is, the angle opposed to the other side.

The first work wi l be to finde the Altitude or Height accord­ing to the directions before given, and then we have the Latitude, Declination and Height given to finde the hour, and the angle of Position, which are the angles required, and we have largely before shewed how to finde them.

Two Angles with a Side opposite to one of them, to finde the Side between them and the Side opposite to the other Angle.

[figure]

Example. In the Triangle ⊙ Z P, ad­mit there were given the Azimuth from the North ⊙ Z P 120d, the hour from Noon, ⊙ P Z 37d 26′, and the comple­ment of the Altitude ⊙ Z 40d 4′, and it were required to finde Z P the com­plement of the Latitude, and ⊙ P the Suns Polar distance.

These angles being changed into sides, and the side into an angle, as in the se­cond Triangle, we have then two sides with an angle opposite to one of them to finde the third side, and both the other angles, and the case is the same as be­fore.

The side A B lying next the given angle, we call the complement of the Latitude, the side A C the Suns Polar distance, and the angle A B C the Azim th from the North, and then fit the Analemma to [...]nde the Altitude or height, the complement whereof is C B, and thereby finde the [Page 54] Angle C A B, calling it the hour, and the Angle A C B, calling it the Angle of Position, by former directions.

Having found the angle C A B, it is equal to the side Z P in the first Triangle, which is the complement of the Latitude re­quired. And the complement of the angle A C B in the second Triangle, being taken to 180d is equal to the side ⊙ P in the first Triangle, the Suns distance from the elevated Pole required.

Example in this Scheme.

[figure]

The Latitude S T 30d, whose complement is Z T 60, equal to the side of the Triangle A B.

Z Y is the Polar distance 69d 46′, the complement whereof is N Y. L G is the Sine of 6d 36′ in that parallel the excess of the Azimuth above a quadrant from the north.

C F is equal to C G, the extent G Z reaches from F to A, and the arch Z A being 35d 59′, is equal to C B in the second Triangle, or to the angle Z ⊙ P in the first Triangle, being there the angle of Position.

To finde the Hour.

Make N P equal to S T, drawing C P, and set off 69d 46′ from P to D and E, and draw the parallel D E. Then draw the parallel of Altitude H A, and B ⊙ is the Sine of the hour from six, C R is equal to B D, upon R with B ⊙ describe K, a Ruler from the Center just touching it findes M, and the arch M O be­ing 38d 28′, is the angle C A P in the second Triangle, equal to the side Z P in the first Triangle, which is the complement of the Latitude there required.

To finde the Angle of Position.

Place Z H from P to f, and make f g equal to f H, a Ruler from H to g cuts D E at I, upon R with B I draw Q, a Ruler from the Center touching it findes V, and the ark O V being 66d 29′, is the measure of the angle A C B in the second Tri­angle, which is equal to the side ⊙ P in the first Triangle, the Suns distance from the Pole required, and thus this question hath exercised most of the Rules before delivered; and thus solely up­on the consideration of the Projection of the Sphaere, I have shewed how all the twenty eight common Cases may be resolved Orthographically.

CHAP. X. Shewing how to project all the Cases of right angled Sphaerical Triangles.

ANd because Projections of the Sphaere do not depend upon Proportions for the resolving of any Case propounded, but on the contrary Proportions are derived from Projections, I shall therefore further enlarge in shewing how the right angled Cases are resolved without the knowledge of the Proportions.

[figure]

In Projecting the right angled Cases Orthographically, the Triangle V A ⊙ right angled at A, shall be the Example used, in which the arch S AE is equall to the Complement of the Latitude at London 38d 28′, equall to the Angle A V ⊙.

The Hipotenusal V ⊙ is the hour from Six.

The legg A ⊙ the Altitude or Suns height at the time pro­posed.

The legg V A the Suns Azimuth from the Vertical.

The angle A ⊙ V, the angle between the Suns Azimuth Circle and the Equinoctial.

Case 1, 2, 3. Given a Leg and its adjacent Angle, to finde the rest.

Data A V 31d.

Angle A V ⊙ 38d 28′.

[figure]

Having drawn the Quadrant S Z, and S V, and Z V at right angles, in the Center place the given angle 38d 28′ from S to AE, and draw AE V, draw AE L parallel to Z V, then prick the Sine of the given Leg from V to A and F, the nearest distance from A to AE V, prick from L to B.

1. To finde the other Side, or Leg.

A ruler over V and B, cuts the Limbe at D, and the arch S D being 22d 16′, is the measure of the side A ⊙.

2. To finde the Hipotenusal.

Through D draw D ⊙ G parallel to S V, and the extent V ⊙ measured on the Sines, is 37d 30′ the Hipotenusal sought.

3. To finde the angle V ⊙ A.

Through F draw F E parallel to V S, and make V C equal to [Page 58] V ⊙, a Ruler from the Center over C, cu [...]s the Limbe at L, and the arch S L being 57d 55′, is the measure of the angle sought.

Otherwise: Make V I equal to V C, then take the distance between C and Z, and the said extent shall reach from I to L in the Limbe as before; after the same manner the point D might have been found: Also the extent V F may be doubled or tripled upwards, and at the end thereof a Perpendicular raised, accord­ingly multiply or increase the extent V ⊙, and one foot resting in the Center, cross the said Perpendicular, and a ruler laid over the point of Intersection or crossing, and the Center V shall pass through the Limbe at L, as before.

Otherwise:

Place V ⊙ from V to Q and upon Q with V A, describe the ark H, a ruler from the Center just touching the outward extrea­mity of it, cuts the Limbe at L, as before, the arch S L being the angle sought.

Or to keep the said arch more remote from the Center, prick V ⊙ twice from V to P, then double the extent V A, and there­with upon P describe the ark K, a rule from the Center just touching the outward extreamity of that ark, cuts the Limbe at L, as before.

These Cases being the most difficult (as requiring an Ellipsis to be drawn, which we have shunned, and may be otherwise a­voided, according to the Example in Page 51) I thought fit first to handle.

The Triangle resolved is not represented, unless there be an Elliptical a k drawn from ⊙ to A.

The finding of the Point D was carried on from a proportion of this kinde:

As the Radius AE L to the Tangent of the ark S AE, being the measure of the given angle,

So is the Sine of the given Leg L B proportioned out to that Ra­dius, to the Tangent of the ark S D, being the measure of the Leg sought.

Case 4, 5, 6. Given a Side and its opposite angle, to finde the rest.

Data the Side A V 31d.

The Angle V ⊙ A 57d 55′.

[figure]

Place the given Angle at the Center of the quadrant, where­fore prick it, to wit, 57d 55′ from S to L, and draw L V.

Then place the given Legg from S to D, to w [...]t, 31d, and draw D ⊙ G parallel to S V.

To measure the Arks sought.

1 The Hipotenusal.

The Extent V ⊙ applyed to the Sines, is 37d 30′, being the measure thereof.

2. The other Leg.

Place D G from V to R, and upon R with the extent G ⊙, draw the ark H, a ruler from the Center touching the extreamity of it, cuts the Limbe at E, and the arch S E being 22d 16′, is the measure of the other Leg.

3. The other Angle.

Draw E F parallel to S V, and make V C equal to V ⊙, a ru­ler from the Center over C, cuts the Limbe at AE, and the arch [Page 60] S AE being 38d 28′, is the measure of the other oblique angle. Lastly, the Triangle resolved is represented by the Eliptical prickt arch ⊙ A, and by the sides ⊙ V and V A.

Note from the first Scheme, that if ⊙ V by being produced, have a quadrant added to it, and if ⊙ A be continued to the Nadir, and so have a quadrant added to it, the other side between the Nadir and ⊙ V produced, will be equal to AE Z, and so there will be another right angled Triangle right angled in the Limbe, and if there were given a Leg in the first Scheme, to wit, AE Z, and its opposite angle Z ⊙ AE, there would be given the same Leg and its opposite angle in the lower Triangle, wherein the other Leg and Hipotenusal are greater then quadrants, and the other oblique angle obtuse, and so a double resolution will arise, unless the affection of some part of the Triangle unknown be likewise given. And how to resolve such a Triangle wherein any of the Data are bigger then quadranrs, the Reader may observe from the said Triangle and its opposite, by resolving the Complement­al Triangle near the Center, arising from the other Triangles.

Case 7, 8. Given both the Legs.

[figure]

Data Leg A ⊙, 22d 16′. Leg A V 31d

Having drawn the Quadrant and its two Ra­dii, place one of the given Legs from S to D 22d 16′, and draw D G parallel to S V, and make V R equal there­to.

Prick the other given Leg from S to E, and draw [Page 61] a line into the Center, and from R take the nearest distance to the said Line, which place from G to ⊙, and draw V ⊙ AE.

The Arch S AE measured on the Chords, is 38d 28′, being the measure of the oblique angle at the Center.

The extent V ⊙ measured on the Sines, is 37d 30′, and so much is the Hipotenusal.

Draw E F parallel to S V, and therein make V C equal to V ⊙, a ruler from the Center over C, cuts the Limbe at L, and the arch S L being 57d 55′, is the measure of the angle V ⊙ A; by which Letters the Triangle is represented. Nota, in finding this oblique angle wee have the Hipotenusal and Leg that sub­tends, it given, which joyned in a right angled Triangle, the angle thereby subtended, is the angle sought.

Case 9, 10, 11. Given the Hipotenusal and its adjacent An­gle, to finde the rest.

Data Hipotenusal V ⊙ 37d 30′.

Angle V ⊙ A 57d 55′.

[figure]

Having drawn the quadrant S Z, and S V, and Z V, at right angles in the Center, prick the given angle 57d 55′ from S to L, and draw L V: Prick the Sine of the Hipotenusal from V to [Page 62] ⊙, and through the point ⊙, draw D G parallel to S V, so is S D the Chord of the Leg opposite to the angle placed at the Center, to wit, 31d.

Place D G from V to R, and upon R with the extent G ⊙, describe the arch H, a ruler from the Center touching the extreamity thereof, cuts the Limbe at F, and the arch S E being 22d 16′, is the measure of the other Leg.

From the Point E, draw E F parallel to S V, and therein make V C equal to V ⊙, a ruler over C from the Center, cuts the Limbe at AE, and the arch S AE being 38d 28′, is the measure of the other oblique angle.

Lastly make V A equal to V F, and draw the Ellipticall arch V ⊙, and the Triangle is epresented by V A ⊙.

Case 12, 13, 14. Given the Hipotenusal and one of the Legs, to finde the rest.

Data Hipotenusal ⊙ V 37d 36′.

The Leg ⊙ A 22d 16′.

[figure]

Having drawn the quadrant and its two Radii, pick the gi­ven Leg from S to E 22d 10′, and draw E F parallel to S V; then take the Sine of [...]7d 30′ the Hipo­tenusal, and placing one foot in the Cen­ter at V, with the other cross the pa­rallel E F, as at ⊙, a Ruler from V over ⊙ cuts the Limbe at AE, and the arch S AE is the measure of the Angle ⊙ V A 38d 28′.

Place F E from V to R, and upon R with F ⊙, draw the Arch H, a ruler from the Center touching it, cuts the Limbe at D, and [Page 63] the arch S D being 31d, is the measure of the Leg V A.

Make V C equal to V ⊙, and a ruler from the Center over C, cuts the Limbe at L, and the arch S L being 57d 55′, is the measure of the angle V ⊙ A.

Case 15, 16. Given both the oblique Angles.

In the first of these six Schemes, if the Angles V ⊙ A, and A V ⊙, be given in the Triangle ⊙ V A, then there is also gi­ven the Leg AE Z, and the Angle Z ⊙ AE in the Triangle Z AE ⊙, and that Triangle being resolved, the complements of the arks sought in the Triangle in which the case is put, are also found, and the operation will be the same with Case 4, 5, 6.

CHAP. XI. The Longitude and Latitude of any Star or Point of the Heavens being given, to finde the declination and right ascension thereto.

[figure]

Example. Medusas-head, a Star of the third Magnitude, Lon­gitude, as set down in M. Wings Harmonicon Coeleste, is 20d 37′ [...], North Latitude 22d 2 [...]′.

Having with 60d of the Chords drawn the outward Circle with [Page 64] the two Diameters AE V Q, and P V, making right angles in the Center, prick the obliquity of the Ecliptick 23d 31′ from P to F, and from AE to E, and draw AE V Q and F V, then prick the Latitude of that Star from E to L, and draw L A parallel to E C, and joyn L V, wherein prick down from V to I the Sine of 50d 37′, that Stars distance from the Equinoctial Inter­section of Aries, and take the nearest distance from I to V F, which place from A to O, thorough the point O draw D H pa­rallel to AE Q, and the arch E D being 39d 22′, is the measure of that Stars Declination.

Make V R equal to G D, and upon R as a Center, with the extent G O, draw the ark K, a Ruler from the Center V, tou­ching the extreamity of that ark, cuts the Limbe at B, and the arch AE B being 40d 37′, is the right Ascension of that Star from the Equinoctial Point Aries, in time is 2 hours 42 minutes and a half.

The Triangle resolved will be represented by drawing two Eliptical Arks from O, to the extreamities of the side placed in the Limbe, to wit, to P and F, in which there is given the Side P F, the Angle of the Ecliptick and Equinoctial equal to the distance of the Poles of those Circles.

The side O F the complement of that Stars North Latitude, with the Angle between them, P F O the Longitude of that Star from the Colure of the Solstice.

To finde the Side P O, the complement of the Declination required, and the angle F P O, the difference between which angle and a quadrant, is the right Ascension of the Star sought, from one of the Equinoctial Points.

For a Conclusion I shall adde one Proposition more.

CHAP. XII. Two Altitudes of the Sun, and the two Azimuths thereto be­longing being given, to finde the Latitude of the place and the Suns Declination.

[figure]

Example. Let one Altitude be 49d 56′, Azimuth thereto 30d to Southwards of the East; the other Altitude 14d 15′, Azimuth thereto 20d to the northwards of the East.

In the Scheme annexed make S A the greater Altitude, 49d 56′, and draw the Parallel A F, which being Radius, make F B the Sine of 30d the Azimuth thereto.

Again, Make N G the lesser Altitude 14d 15′, and draw the Parallel thereof H G, which being Radius, prick down the Sine of 20d the given Azimuth thereto from H to I, because it was to the northwards of the East.

Through the points B I, draw the line D E, and it shall be the Parallel of Declination.

Divide the ark D E into halfs at P, and the arch P N is the Latitude 51d 32′.

Place Z P from S to AE, and the arch AE D is the Declina­tion 23d 31′. Moreover, the Amplitude, Hour, &c. are given by the Scheme, though not required.

To Calculate the Latitude from the said Scheme.

From the point I draw I L parallel to H F, and produce B F to L, then is I L equal to H F, the difference of the Sines of both the given Altitudes, and B L is equal to the Sum of B F and H I, and the angle B I L is equal to the Latitude of the place the first work is to finde B F and H I in the Parallels of Altitude: The Proportion will be,

As the Radius is to the Cosine of the given Altitude (being the Ra­dius of the Parallel)

So is the Sine of the Azimuth from East or West belonging to the said Altitude, to the Sine of the said Azimuth in its pa [...]allel of Altitude, whereby at two Operations may be found B F and H I.

When the Azimuths are on different sides the Vertical, take the Sum, when on the same side the difference between the fourth tearms found by each Operation, then it holds:

As the difference of the Sines of both the given Altitudes,

Is to the aforesaid Sum or difference:

So is the Radius to the Tangent of the Latitude.

The two first tearms of this latter Proportion in this Scheme, are as I L to L B.

Or it may be expressed in two Proportions, thus:

As the difference of the Sines of both the given Altitudes,

Is to the Cosine of the greater Altitude:

So is the Sine of the Azimuth (from the East) thereto belonging, to a fourth number.

Again:

As the difference of the Sines of both the given Altitudes,

Is to the Cosine of the lesser Altitude:

So is the Sine of the Azimuth thereto belonging, to a seventh number.

The Sum of the fourth and seventh Numbers, when the Azi­muths fall on different sides the Vertical; but their difference [Page 67] when they happen on the same side, is equal to the Tangent of the Latitude.

Or it may be thus delivered:

Multiply the Cosine of each Altitude by the Sine of the Azi­muth thereto belonging, and there will arise two Products, the sum of these Products when the Azimuths happen on different sides, but the difference of them when they happen on the same side the Vertical, divide by the difference of the Sines of both the given Altitudes, and the Quotient will be the Tangent of the Latitude sought. This supposeth the Operations to be per­formed by the natural Tables of Sines and Tangents.

Now having the Latitude, either of the Altitudes with the Azi­muth theteto belonging, we have two Sides and the Angle com­prehended given, to finde the third Side, whereby is found the Declination required.

How from three Shadows happening the same day on a Hori­zontal Plain, to Calculate the Latitude, &c. as also to perform it by Scale and Compass, with another way for finding the Azi­muth, I have shewed in a Treatise of Geometricall Dyalling, whereto the Reader is referred.

FINIS.

Errata.

Page 47. Line 28. for 38d 28′, read 51d 32′.

Page 49. Line 23. for Latitude, read Altitude.

THE MARINERS PLAIN S …

THE MARINERS PLAIN SCALE NEW PLAIN'D: The Third PART or BOOK.

Shewing the Uses of a Line of CHORDS onely, in Resolving or Projecting all the 28 Cases of Sphaerical Triangles on the Stereographick or Circular Projection.

Also how from three Shadows of a Wyre on a Hori­zontal Plain, taken the same day, to finde the Lati­tude of the Place, the Suns Declination, &c.

Whence follows a general Method of Dyalling from three Shadows, or by help of two Shadows, &c. With other Pro­positions of excellent Use to Sea-men and Practitioners in the Mathematicks.

Being contrived to be had either alone, or with the other Parts.

Written by John Collins of London, Pen-man, Ac­comptant. Philomathet.

LONDON: Printed by Tho. Johnson for Francis Cossinet, and are to be sold at the Anchor and Mariner in Tower-street, and by Hen. Sutton Mathematical Instrument-maker in Thread-needle-street, behinde the Royal Exchange. 1659.

Courteous Reader,

THis part of the Treatise is also contrived to go alone, wherein we use no other Scales but onely a Line of Chords, or rather the equal Divisions of a Qua­drant of a Circle, and accordingly have divided the same in the second Scheme of this Book, having shun­ned the use of Tangents, Semitangents, and Secants, which others use upon Scales or Sectors for this pur­pose; the Demonstration of this Projection the Rea­der will finde sufficiently handled in the Sixth Book of Aquilonius his Opticks, in Guidoubaldus his Theorick of Planisphaeres, see also Clavius his Astrolabe; and the two former Authors have also handled the Orthogra­phick Projection: The Spherical Definitions necessary to be understood by the Reader, are handled in the Se­cond Part. Not willing further to detain thee, I rest a Well-willer to the Advancement of Knowledge.

JOHN COLLINS.

THE CONTENTS.

  • CErtain Definitions and notions about Sphaerical Triangles. Page 1
  • The 16 right angled Cases projected. from page 2 to 12
  • The Scheme for Chords used in this Book. 4
  • How quadrantal Triangles arise from the right angle [...] 5
  • How otherwise in less room then a Semicircle, to project the right an­gled Cases. 12
  • The 12 oblique Cases projected. from page 13 to 22
  • How it ariseth from projection, that the Angles of one oblique Triangle are equal to the sides of another. 16
  • How it ariseth from projection, that in some Cases the Sun and Stars have two Altitudes upon one and the same Azimuth. 24
  • How from three shadows on a Horizontal Plain, to finde the Latitude of the Place, the Suns Declination, Amplitude, and the Azimuths of those shadows. from page 25 to 28
  • A general Method thence derived for Inscribing the Stile and Sub­stile into such Dyals as have Centers. 29
  • Also a Scheme for placing the Meridian line in such Dyals. 31
  • The Suns Declination, two Altitudes, with the difference of Azimuth being given, how by projection to finde the Latitude of the place, and the Azimuths of these shadows, &c. 33, 34
  • A Method of Dyalling thence issuing. 34
  • How from the former Data, onely altering the difference of Azimuth into the difference of Time, to finde the Latitude, &c. 35
  • After the same manner the Declinations and right Ascensions of two fixed Stars being given, as also the Altitudes of them both, being at any period of time observed, to finde the Latitude, &c. 36

SPHERICAL TRIANGLES Solved by PROJECTION.

A Sphaerical Triangle is supposed to be described on the Surface or Convexity of the Sphaere.

The sides of a Sphaerical Triangle, are the Arches of three great Circles of the Sphaere mutually intersecting each other.

Those are said to be great Circles which bisect or divide the Sphaere in halfs.

A Sphaerical Angle (being the arch of Inclination between two Circles of the Sphaere) is measured by the arch of a great Circle described on the Angular point, as a Center between the sides, being extended to Quadrants.

Every Sphaerical Triangle is composed of three sides, and three angles opposed thereto, any three of which six parts being given, the rest may be discovered by Projection, and is the subject of the following Discourse.

The Pole of a Circle is a point in the Surface of the Sphaere, distant always 90d from the Circumference of that Circle to which it belongs, from whence it follows that all right lines pro­duced to the Circumference of the said Circle, are equal.

Any two Lines so drawn, contain an Angle between them, measured by the Arch or Circumference to which they belong. By help of this Pole point, the sides of Sphaerical Triangles in all the following Propositions are measured.

A Pro [...]ection of the Sphaere, is the Representation of the Cir­cles of the Sphaere on some Plain or Flat, as they appear to the eye, according to its supposed situation.

By helps of such Representations of the Sphaere on a Plain, the [Page 2] same Conclusions are performed on a Flat, as upon the Sphaere or Globe it self.

A Sphaerical Triangle is either right angled, or oblique angled; a right angled Sphaerical Triangle hath one right angle at the least, the measure of a right Angle being always a quadrant or 90d, the Sides about or including the right Angle, are called Sides or Legs; and the Side subtending the same, is called the Hipotenusal.

Because these Triangles are more easily resolved then the ob­lique, we shall first handle the sixteen Cases thereof, and then proceed to the twelve remaining Cases of oblique angled Sphae­rical Triangles.

CASE I, II, III. Given a Leg and its adjacent Angle, to finde the Hipotenusal, the other Leg and its adjacent Angle.

  • Given the Leg E Z, 46d 43′.
  • Angle, E Z ⊙ 42d.
  • To finde the Hipotenusal Z ⊙.
  • The other Leg E ⊙.
  • The Angle Z ⊙ E.
[figure]

With 60d of a Line of Chords, or of a quadrant divided into 90 degrees, upon V as a Center, de­scribe the Circle Z S N B, and draw the two Diameters S V B and Z V N, ma­king right An­gles in the Cen­ter, which is to be observed in the following Schemes, rela­ting to the right angled Cases, [Page 3] prick 46d 43′ the given Leg, from Z to E, and from B to L, and draw the Diameter E V I.

Prick 42d the given Angle, from N to G, and from G to H, a Ruler from Z on H, cuts the Diameter at C, the Center of a Cir­cle to be described with the extent C Z, to wit, the Circle Z A N.

Nota, when the point H falls in the upper quadrant Z B, the Diameter S B must be extended, and the point C will happen to be found therein without the Circle; and a remedy for the find­ing it with more certainty then this way affords, shall afterwards be prescribed.

If S F be made equal to N G, a Ruler from Z on F, findes the point A in the Diameter through which the Circle was drawn, which may be found in many Cases, not for necessity, but for more certainty: this Circle, in regard we project upon rhe plain of the Meridian, is an Azimuth Circle.

A Ruler from Z on G, findes the point P in the Diameter, be­ing the Pole point of the Circle Z A N, a point that must of ne­cessity be found, without which an Arch assigned in the said in­ward Circle cannot be measured in the Limbe, nor can an Arch given in the Limbe be transferred into the said Circle.

The Arks sought measured.

1. The Hipotenusal.

A Ruler laid from P over ⊙, cuts the Limbe at D, and the arch D Z, being 55d, is the measure of the Hipotenusal ⊙ Z.

2. The Leg.

A ruler from L on ⊙, findes the Point K in the Limbe, and the arch K E, being 33d 14′, is the measure of the Leg E ⊙.

3. The other oblique angle.

A ruler laid from ⊙ on P, cuts the Limbe at R, and the arch L R being 62d 41′, is the measure of the angle Z ⊙ E

Otherwise to measure this angle.

Set off a quadrant from D to M, or which is all one, make N M equal to S D, a Ruler from P on M, cuts the Azimuth Circle at Q, then a Ruler from ⊙ on Q, cuts the Limbe at T, and the arch I T being 62d 41′, is the measure of the angle I ⊙ N, which be­ing the opposite angle to Z ⊙ E, is equall thereto, the comple­ment whereof to a Semicircle, is the angle Z ⊙ V.

Any right angled Sphaerical Triangle, having the Sides thereof [Page 4] continued to quadrants, there will arise out of it five other Tri­angles, all made of the same parts or their complements of the first Triangle; wherefore any Case propounded, may be varied and variously projected within the primitive or fundamental Cir­cle, as also without it, but in the following Cases we shall keep where we began.

To illustrate this, extend V E, and through the three Points O P L, describe a Circle, the Center whereof happens in the extended Diameter I X, to finde it upon the Points P L with any extent, make a cross with two arks near C, also the like with any other extent near Y, a ruler laid through these Intersections or Crosses, cuts the extended Diameter at X, upon which, as a Cen­ter, describe the ark W L P O, the pole of which ark is the point ⊙, and if K Y be made equal to K O, a ruler from L on Y, findes the Center X as before, the six several Triangles thus arise:

[figure]

1. The Triangle Z E ⊙ right angled at E.

2. The Triangle Z W L right angled at W, whereto is equal the opposite Triangle N Q O.

3. The Triangle ⊙ A V right angled at A.

[Page 5]4. The opposite Triangle thereto V W P, right angled at W.

5. The Triangle P B L right angled at B.

This second Scheme is to shew how all these Triangles arise out of the Triangle first proposed: the arch N B divided into 9 equal parts, being 10 degrees each, with the ten small divisions or degrees beyond it, above B is all the Scale required or used in this part of the Treatise, from whence any ark required may be taken, or any ark given may be measured.

There are also included in the said Scheme as many quadran­tal Triangles, the quadrantal Sides being prickt lines, the sides of each of which quadrantal Triangles are limited by the Pole points of that right angled Triangle from which it doth arise.

In the quadrantal Triangle V L P, the points V, L, P, are the three Pole points to the three sides of the right angled Triangle E Z ⊙, and the sides of this quadrantal Triangle, are equal to the angles of that right angled Triangle; Also the angles of this quadrantal Triangle, are equal to the Sides of that right angled Triangle, onely the right Angle and the Hipotenusal, being the greatest Side opposed thereto, are changed into their comple­ments to a Semicircle.

The like also holds, if any other Angle and its opposite Side were changed into their complements to a Semicircle.

If the Side E Z and its opposite Angle E ⊙ Z, were so chan­ged, and the other parts of that Triangle not altered, then would the Sides of the quadrantal Triangle O V P, be equal to the Angles of the right angled Triangle Z E ⊙, and the Angles of the said quadrantal Triangle, equal to the Sides of the right an­gled Triangle, and the like holds in the other quadrantal Tri­angles.

The quadrantal Triangle O P V, ariseth from the right angled Triangles Z W L, or O Q N.

So also do the qua­drantal Triangles

  • ⊙ Z V
  • Z L P
  • Z L ⊙

arise from the right angled Triangles

  • P B L.
  • ⊙ A V.
  • V W P.

From the consideration whereof, may follow much variety in the projecting of any Case proposed.

Note in the first Scheme, that the arch N G being 42d, the ex­tent V P is the Semitangent of that ark, that is to say, it is the [Page 6] tangent of 21d, and the arch N H being 84d, to wit, the double of N G, the extent V C is the tangent of 42d, and the extent Z C the Secant thereof, the extent Z V being Radius, and to take out thus the tangent or secant of any ark, because the Cen­ter happens in the circumference of the Circle, the ark it self must be doubled, or twice pricked down in the circumference; and after this maner may we take out the Semitangent, Tangent or Secant of any ark needful for the drawing of this Projection; which how to do by Scales of Tangents and Secants on a small Ruler, is handled in a Treatise, Entituled, Posthuma Fosteri.

CASE IV, V, VI. Given a Leg and the opposed Angle thereto.

  • Given in the former Scheme E ⊙ the Leg, 33d 14′: the An­gle E Z ⊙ 42d.
  • To finde the other Leg Z E, the Hipotenusal ⊙ Z, the An­gle E ⊙ Z.
[figure]

Having drawn the primitive Circle, prick 42d for the given An­gle, from N to G, and from G to H, and by a ruler from Z over P, and H, finde the pole point at P, and the Center at C, and [Page 7] with the extent C Z, describe the Circle Z ⊙ N; then prick 33d 14′ for the given Leg from S to K, a ruler from Z finds the point F, with the extent V F cross the Azimuth circle, this Intersection will happen at ⊙, through which Point and the Center, draw the Diameter E I.

The Arch E Z measured on the Chords, is the other Leg sought, to wit, 46d 43′.

A ruler laid over P and ⊙, cuts the Limbe at D above, and at R, in the opposite quadrant.

The Arch Z D measured on the Chords, is 55d, being the measure of the Hipotenusal ⊙ Z.

Place the extent B R from N to T, and the arch I T is the measure of the angle I ⊙ N, equall to the angle Z ⊙ E, to wit, 62d 41′.

Note in the resolving of these three Cases, we may observe that the three given parts of the Triangle, to wit, the right angle, a Leg and the angle opposed thereto, are not sufficient without the quality of one of the other unknown three parts, to determine the affection of the Leg, the Angle, or Hipotenusal sought, for the extent V F will as well meet with the Azimuth Circle at O, through which point draw the Line V Q, and there ariseth the right angled Triangle Z Q O, right angled at Q, the side Z Q being 133d 17′, the Hipotenusal Z O 125d, and the Angle Z O Q 117d 19′, the complements to a Semicircle of the Leg, Hipotenusal and Angle found in the upper Triangle, and so a double solution is to be rendred, unless the affection of the arks sought be determined from one of the parts not given.

CASE VII, VIII. Given both the Legs.

The Leg Z E 46d 43′.

The Leg E ⊙ 33d 14′.

To finde either of the Angles at Z or ⊙, and the Hipotenu­sal Z ⊙.

[figure]

Prick 46d 43′ from Z to E, and from B to L, and draw the Diameter E I, then prick the other given Leg from E to K 33d, 14′, Lay a Ruler from L to K, and it cuts E V at ⊙, through the points Z ⊙ N describe a Circle, the Center whereof will be easily found by two Intersections, the one above Z ⊙ at g, the other beneath it at y, the arks of those Intersections being described upon the points Z and ⊙, with any two extents at pleasure, but alike on each; A Ruler laid through the Crosses g y, cuts the Diameter at C the Center required, and when the Center doth not fall with­in, V B must be extended without.

Having described the Circle Z A N, to finde the Pole thereof lay a Ruler from Z to A, and it cuts the Limbe at F, place S F from N to G, a Ruler on it from Z findes the Pole point required [Page 9] at P, a Ruler laid over ⊙ and P, cuts the Limbe at D and R.

The Arch Z D measured on the Chords is 55d, the measure of the Hipotenusal Z ⊙.

The Arch S F being 42d, is the measure of the angle E Z ⊙.

The Arch L R being 62d 41′, is the measure of the angle Z ⊙ E

Though we finde three Requisites, yet we have but two Cases, because the finding of either of the oblique Angles, is but one Case.

CASE IX, X, XI. Given the Hipotenusal and its adjacent Angle.

The Angle E Z ⊙ 42d.

The Hipotenusal Z ⊙ 55d.

To finde the

  • Side Z E.
  • Side E ⊙.

And the Angle Z ⊙ E.

[figure]

Prick off 42d, the given angle from N to G, and from G to H, a Ruler from Z on G, and H, findes the Pole and Center at P and C; Upon C with the extent C Z, describe the Circle Z A N.

Prick off 55d the given Hipotenusal from Z to D, lay a Ruler [Page 10] from D to P, and it cuts the Azimuth Circle at ⊙; through ⊙ and the Center draw the Diameter E I.

The Arch E Z measured on the Chords is 46d 43′, being one of the Legs sought.

Place Z E from B to L, then a Ruler laid over L and ⊙, cuts the Limbe at K, and the arch E K measured on the Chords is 33d 14′, the measure of the other Leg.

A Ruler from ⊙ on P, cuts the Limbe at R, and the arch L R being 62d 41′, is the measure of the Angle Z ⊙ E.

CASE XII, XIII, XIV. Given the Hipotenusal and one of the Legs.

The Hipotenusal Z ⊙ is 55d.

The Leg Z E 46d 43′.

To finde the other Leg E ⊙, the Angle E Z ⊙, and the An­gle Z ⊙ E.

[figure]

Having drawn the fundamental Cir­cle Z S N B, and the two Diameters S V B & Z V N, prick 55d the given Hipotenusall from Z to D and H, from B to O, and from O to Q, a Ruler laid from S to Q, cuts the Di­ameter N Z ex­tended at M, then place the extent S M from V to Y upwards, and upon Y as a Center, with the extent Y D, draw the Circle D W H: otherwise with the extent V [Page 11] M, place one foot at D, and the other will reach to Y.

Otherwise a Ruler laid from S to H, cuts Z V at W, and then it is required to finde the Center of those three Points, which may be easily found by two Intersections, because it hap­pens in V Z extended: or lastly, setting one foot in S, opening the other to B, describe the ark B X, then double the extent Z D in a right line, and it reaches from Z to T, which extent place from B to X, and a Ruler laid from S to X, findes the point M as before; by the like reason an extent might be tripled or qua­drupled, provided the Radius be increased after the same rate, and this remedy must be used if the point Q chance to fall too near unto S.

Prick 46d 43′ from Z to E, and draw the Diameter E V I, which intersects the Circle D W H at ⊙, having the points Z, ⊙ and N, through them draw a Circle, the Center whereof C, is found by applying a Ruler through the two crosses within, as be­fore was instanced.

Prick Z E from B to L, a Ruler on L and ⊙, cuts the Limbe at K, and the arch E K being 33d 14′, is the measure of the Side or Leg E ⊙.

A Ruler laid from Z over A, cuts the Limbe at F, and the arch S F being 42d, is the measure of the Angle E Z ⊙.

Place S F from N to G, a Ruler laid over Z and G, findes the Pole point of the Azimuth Circle at P, a Ruler laid over ⊙ and P, cuts the Limbe at R, and the arch L R being 62d 41′, is the measure of the Angle Z ⊙ E, and all this may be otherwise performed; for the Case propounded in this Triangle in the Tri­angle P B L of the first Scheme, is another Case before handled, to wit, the fourth, fifth and sixth, and then having resolved that Triangle, by consequence this is also resolved.

CASE XV, XVI. Given both the oblique Angles to finde (both) either of the Legs, being one Case, and the Hipotenusal the other Case.

Let there be given the Angle E Z ⊙ 42d.

The Angle Z ⊙ E 62d 41′.

This Case cannot be resolved by projecting the Triangle E Z ⊙, but some other of the Triangles thence arising.

Repair to the first Scheme. In the Triangle Z W L right an­gled at W, we have the Leg L W given, being 27d 19′, the com­plement of the given Angle Z ⊙ E; Also in that Triangle we have the Angle opposed thereto W Z L given 42d, and the re­solution of that Triangle would be the same with the fourth, fift, and sixt case, as before. Or in the Triangle P L B, we have the Hipotenusal P L given, and one of the Legs P B, and the resolu­tion would be the same with the 12, 13, 14 Cases.

Which may be also resolved in the Triangles ⊙ A V or V P q, the position of any of which Triangles may be the same with that we have hitherto handled, and having resolved any of them other Triangles, the Triangle proposed is also resolved, because the parts of the one are the same or the complements of the other.

Suns place 60 de­grees from Equino­ctial point, greatest declination 23 de­grees, 31 minutes.

We have before said, that any of the right angled Cases might be projected without the primi­tive Circle: take one example there­of:

Let the Suns place and greatest Declination be given, to finde his right Ascension and Decli­nation.

Draw the Diameter A V Z, and upon V as a Center, describe the quadrant V Z B, and prick 23d 31′ (the Angle between the Equinoctial and Ecliptick) from Z to F, and from F to D, a Ru­ler from A findes the Pole at P, and the Center at C. Upon C, with the extent C Z, draw the arch Z ♋, then prick down 60d the Suns given place from Z to e, a Ruler laid from P to e, cuts the [Page 13] outward Circle at ⊙, draw ⊙ V, the arch Z a measured on the Chords, is 57d 48′, and so much is the Suns right ascension.

Place the extent V ⊙ from V to f, a Ruler laid from Z to f, cuts the inward Circle at o, and the arch B o being 20d 12′, is the Suns Declination required.

To measure the other oblique Angle, would require the conti­nuance of these Circles about; for if the Circle Z B were con­tinued round, a Ruler laid from ⊙ to P cutting it on the other side, the ark of distance of that Intersection from ⊙ V produced till it also cut it, would be equal to the complement of the An­gle sought; and this agrees with Case 9, 10, 11, onely there the work is performed within the primitive Circle, here without, by continuing the inward Circle about, there represented by the Azimuth Circle Z A N.

CASE I. Of oblique angled Sphaerical Triangles.

Three Sides given to finde an Angle.

THis being the most useful Case, I thought fit to handle first, because of some Observations from it, which will further us in the solving of some following Cases.

We refrain drawing a Triangle apart, because the Scheme will serve, though the construction thereof is afterwards prescribed.

[figure]

In the precedent Triangle ⊙ Z P, let there be given the three Sides, ⊙ Z the complement of the Suns height, 37d 53′, Z P the complement of the Latitude, 38d 28′, and ⊙ P the Suns distance from the visible Pole 66d 29′, and let it be required to finde the three Angles, Z P ⊙ the hour from noon, P Z ⊙ the Suns Azi­muth from the North in that Hemisphere, and the Angle Z ⊙ P, being the Angle of Position.

Having upon V as a Center, described the fundamental Circle S Z B N, and drawn the two Diameters S V B and Z V N, making right Angles in the Center, and produced without the Circle, prick any one of the given Sides into the Limbe from Z to P, and from S to AE in this Scheme, 38d 28′ the colatitude, and draw the Axis P V F, and the Equator AE V Q, and upon AE as a Center with AE Q, describe the ark Q X.

From one extreamity of the Side placed in the Limbe as at P, prick off one of the other given Sides, to wit, 66d 29′ from P to D, and if you will also to E; prick it likewise twice in the Axis from F to t, the said extent F t place from Q to X, a Ruler laid from AE to X, cuts the extended Axis at M, and the extent V M will reach from D to Y, the Center of the parallel of Declination D E, wherewith describe it.

A Ruler laid from Q to D, cuts the Axis at W, a third point through which that Circle is to pass, if it be thought needful to limit it.

From the other extreamity of the Side placed in the Limbe as at Z, prick off the third Side 37d 53′ to A, also prick it twice from B to G and H, a Ruler laid over H and S, cuts the Diame­ter Z N at I: One foot of the extent V I being placed at A, the other will meet with the Diameter N Z produced at L, the Center of the parallel of Altitude A ⊙, then describe it.

Through the three points Z ⊙ N draw a Circle, the Center whereof happens at C, and may be found by applying a Ruler through the two prickt Intersections, which are found as before; also through the three points P ⊙ F draw a Circle, the Center whereof will be found at g, then is the Sphere projected for the resolution of the arks sought, which are thus found:

1. The Angle Z P ⊙ being the Hour from Noon.

Lay a Ruler from P to h, and it cuts the Limbe at K, the ark AE K being measured on the Chords, is 33d 15′, and so much is the hour from noon, in time 2 hours 13 minutes, either so much in the afternoon, or 9 hours 47 minutes in the morning.

2. The Angle ⊙ Z P being the Suns Azimuth from the North.

Lay a Ruler over Z and n, and it cuts the Limbe at O, and the arch S O being 55d, is the measure of the Suns Azimuth from the South, the complement whereof to a Semicircle being 135d, is the Angle ⊙ Z P.

3. The Angle of Position Z ⊙ P.

Place S O from N to o, and a Ruler over it and Z, findes the Pole of the Azimuth Circle at R, also place AE K from F to a, a Ruler laid over P and a, cuts the Equator at T the Pole of the Hour-circle, then apply a Ruler over ⊙ and R, and it cuts the [Page 16] Limbe at c, apply it also over ⊙ and T, and it cuts the Limbe at d, the arch c d measured on the Chords, is 33d 45′, and so much is the Angle of Position Z ⊙ P.

Otherwise:

Set off a quadrant in the Azimuth Circle from ⊙ to f, by help of its Pole R, also set off a quadrant in the Hour-circle from ⊙ to e, by help of its Pole T, as was shewed in the first Case of right angled Triangles, a Ruler applyed from ⊙ to e and f, cuts the Limbe at j and k, and the arch j k measured on the Chords, is 33d 45′, the measure of the Angle of Position, as before.

From the former Scheme in the Triangle F ⊙ N, we may ob­serve that every Sphaerical Triangle hath opposite to each angular Point another Triangle, having the side subtending the said An­gle common to both, and the Angle opposite thereto equal the other parts of it, are the complements of the former parts to a Semicircle; so that if a Question were put in that Triangle, it might be conveniently resolved in this we have handled.

CASE II. Three Angles given to finde a Side.

[figure]
[figure]

This Case is in effect the same with the former, after the Angles are changled in­to Sides; and how that is to be done ariseth from the former Scheme.

From the Center draw a Line passing through the Point ⊙, as doth V m, in that Line doth happen the Center of a great Circle that passeth through the two Pole points R, and T, as also through the Points f e, the Center whereof at m may be found by two Intersecti­ons described on T and R, but here we have made use of two In­tersections describedd on f and e.

This prickt Circle being drawn, look for the three Pole points of the Triangle ⊙ Z P, which are V, R, T, and they limit the three sides of another Triangle, which sides are equal to the An­gles of the former Triangle, onely one of them is changed into its complement to a Semicircle.

Thus the Side V R in the under Triangle being 55d, is the complement of the Angle ⊙ Z P in the upper Triangle to a Se­micircle.

The Side V T in the lower Triangle being 33d 15′, is equal to the Angle ⊙ P Z in the upper Triangle.

And the Side T R in the lower Triangle being 33d 45, is equal to the Angle Z ⊙ P in the upper Triangle.

And as the Angles are changed into Sides, so are the Sides into Angles, by writing them down in two several Triangles op­posite one to the other.

This mutual conversion is most convenient in Calculation, to avoid recourse to the opposite Triangle, when the greatest Angle and its opposite Side are changed into their complements to a Se­micircle, but is true of any Side and its opposite Angle so chan­ged; for any other of the three Sides, may be placed in the Limbe as well as that here instanced, and in many Cases with more con­venience, as when one of the three Sides is near a quadrant, and the other two under 70 degrees each.

Having changed the Angles into Sides, the Case is the same as before.

CASE III, IV. Two Sides with the Angle comprehended, given to finde the third Side, and either of the other Angles.

Admit in the former (double) Triangle, there were given the Sides

  • ⊙ Z 37d 53′,
  • Z P 38d 28′,

and the Angle between them ⊙ Z P 125d the Suns Azimuth from the North, to finde the rest.

[figure]

Having drawn the primitive Circle with its two Diameters, ma­king right angles in the Center, from the extremity of one of them, as at Z, prick off one of the Sides from Z to P, and draw P V. Prick off 125d the given angle from B to M, a ruler over Z and M findes A, through the points Z A N describe a Circle, S M being placed from N to O, and from O to G, a ruler from Z findes the pole of that Circle at R, and the Center at C.

Prick the other given Side from Z to A, a ruler from R cuts Z A N at ⊙, through the points P ⊙ F describe a Circle, by ap­plying a ruler through the two Intersections at p and q (made up­on the points ⊙ and P, on one side with any extent at p, and on the other side with the same, or any other extent, as at q) the Center thereof will be found at g, and the Sphere is projected.

To finde the angle Z P ⊙.

Apply a ruler from P to h, and it cuts the Limbe at K, and the [Page 19] arch AE K, being 33 degrees 15 minutes, is the hour from noon.

To finde the Side ⊙ P.

Place AE K from P to a, a ruler from P findes the pole of the hour Circle at T, a ruler applyed over T and ⊙, cuts the Limbe at D, and the arch D P being 66d 29′, is the measure of the Side ⊙ P.

The angle of Position Z ⊙ P is found in the Limbe below B, as before, by applying a ruler from ⊙ over R and T, being 33d 45′.

CASE V, VI. Two Angles with the Side between them given, to finde the third Angle and the other Sides.

In the former distinct Triangle V R T, if there were given the angles V R T 37d 53′, the angle R V T 38d 28′, and the side between them V R 55d, by changing these angles into sides, and that side into an angle, by taking its complement to 180d, there would be given, the same two sides and the angle between them now resolved, and having found the third side to be 66d 29′, be­cause the angle opposed thereto, was the complement of the gi­ven side in the lower Triangle to a Semicircle, therefore the com­plement to a Semicircle of the third side found in the upper Tri­angle, to wit, 113d 31′, is the third Angle sought in the lower Triangle, and the other Angles found in the upper Triangle, are equal to the sides sought in the lower Triangle.

CASE VII, VIII, IX. Two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them given, to finde the third Side, the angle included, or between them and the Angle opposed to the other Side.

Admit there were given in the former (distinct) Triangle, the Side Z ⊙ the complement of the Altitude 37d 53′, the Side ⊙ P 66d 29′, the complement of the Declination, and the Angle P Z ⊙ the Suns Azimuth from the North 125d, to finde the rest.

[figure]

Having drawn the primitive Circle S Z B N, and the two Dia­meters S V B, Z V N, place the side next the given angle in the Limbe from Z to ⊙, to wit, 37d 53′; also place it from S to AE, and draw the two Diameters ⊙ V F and AE V Q. Place the other given Side 66d 29′, from ⊙ to D and E, also place it twice from Q to I and K, a ruler over AE and K cuts the extended Axis at M, the extent V M placed from D, reaches to y in the ex­tended Axis, the Center of the parallel of Declination D E, wherewith describe it.

Then place 55d the complement of the given Azimuth to a Se­micircle from N to G, and from G to H, a ruler from Z findes the pole of the Azimuth Circle at R, and the Center at C in the [Page 21] extended Horizon S V B, thereon describe it, to wit, Z P N.

Through the three points ⊙ P F, draw the arch of a Circle, the Center whereof will be found by help of the two prickt In­tersections at g, and the Sphere is projected.

A ruler laid over R and P, cuts the Limbe at A, and the arch Z A being 38d 28′, is the complement of the Latitude sought, be­ing the measure of the side P Z.

A ruler applyed from ⊙ to h cuts the Limbe at f, and the arch AE f being 33d 45′, is the measure of the angle Z ⊙ P, the angle of Position sought.

Place AE f from F to a, then laying a ruler from it to ⊙, it cuts V Q at T.

A ruler laid from P over R and T, cuts the Limbe at c and d, and the arch c d measured on the Chords, is 33d 15′, and so much is the hour from noon, being the measure of the angle Z P ⊙.

CASE X, XI, XII. Two Angles with a Side opposite to one of them given, to finde the third Angle, the Side between the given Angles, and the Side opposite to the other Angle.

Admit in the double Triangle, in the undermost there had been given the angle V R T 37d 53′, the angle R T V 113d 31′, and the side V R 55d, this by changing the angles into sides, and the side into an angle, had been no other then the Cases now re­solved.

These six Cases I have often called the doubtful Cases, though in the former example there happens no Doubt, yet a question may be propounded in the same Triangle, whereto there will arise a double Solution, and both true.

Two Sides with an Angle opposite to one of them given, to finde the rest.

As if in the Triangle oft before-mentioned there were given

The Side ⊙ P 66d 29′ the complement of the Declination.

The Side ⊙ Z 37d 53′ the complement of the Altitude.

The Angle Z P ⊙ 33d 15′ the hour from noon, and it were re­quired to finde the rest.

In the following Scheme, the Side next the given angle ⊙ P, [Page 22] to wit, 66d 29′, is placed in the Limbe from ⊙ to P, and from B to AE, draw P V F and V AE.

[figure]

Place 33d 15′ the given Angle, from F to a, and from a to e, and thereby finde the pole at R, and the Center at C, by a ruler applied from P, and draw P Z F

Also place 37d 53′ the other gi­ven side from ⊙ to A, and twice from B to G and H, and by a ruler over H finde M, and with V M placed from A to Y, describe the parallel of Alti­tude A L, which passeth through the hour Circle at two places, to wit, at z Z (and therefore a double Solution must be given) through both those points draw the Circles ⊙ Z N and ⊙ z N, and finde the pole of ⊙ Z N, which will happen at u.

The Arks sought measured.

1. Apply a ruler from R to Z, and it cuts the Limbe at m, and the arch P m measured on the Chords, is 38d 28′ the complement of the Latitude sought.

2. Apply a ruler from ⊙ to k, and it cuts the Limbe at n, and the arch B n measured on the Chords, is 33d 45′ the angle of Position sought.

3. A ruler laid from Z over R and u, cuts the Limbe at o and t, and the ark o t being 55 degrees, is the complement of the angle ⊙ Z P to a Semicircle, wherefore the Suns Azimuth is 125d, being the angle ⊙ Z P.

In the other Triangle z P.

1. Lay a ruler from R to z, and it cuts the Limbe at x, and the arch P x being 86d 32′, is also the complement of the Latitude sought.

2. Apply a ruler from ⊙ to b, and it cuts the Limbe near a, the Ark between the Intersection found, and B being 116d 58′, is the measure of the angle of Position P ⊙ z.

3. The acute Angle ⊙ z P is 55d, as we found it in the for­mer Triangle.

Whence 'tis evident, that unless the quality of the said Angle be also known, a double answer must be given, as here we have done, which I have demonstrated in a Treatise, Entituled, The Sector on a Quadrant.

In like manner, if in the former Triangle there were given the complement of the Latitude 38d 28′, the complement of the Al­titude 37d 53′, and the hour from Noon 33d 15′, to finde the rest, a double solution would arise.

First,

The angle of Position would be —33d 45′.

The complement of the Declination would be-66, 29.

The Azimuth from the North would be—125, 00.

Secondly,

The angle of Position would be —146d 15′.

The complement of the Declination would be-00, 43.

The Azimuth from the North —00, 38.

A third Example.

Suppose in the Latitude of Rome 42d, it were required to finde what Altitude the first Star in the great Bears tayl next the rump, Declination 57d 51′, shall have upon the Azimuth of 22d from the North.

Having drawn the primitive Circle H Z B N, with its two Axes H V B and Z V N at right angles, place the complement of the Latitude 48d from Z to P, and from H to AE, and draw P V F and AE V Q, then place 32d 9′ that Stars polar distance from P to D, and twice from Q to G, by a ruler from AE to G, finde M, the extent V M will reach from D to C, the Center of the parallel in the extended Axis, therewith describe the parallel D * S, then place 22d from N to O, and from O to e, a ruler [Page 24] over o and e from Z, findes the pole of the Azimuth Circle at d, and its Center at f, now having the Center, describe the said Circle Z S N.

Which because it passeth through the parallel of Declination in two places, at * and S, that Star will have two Altitudes on that Azimuth, and a double Solution must be given.

Through the three points F * P and F S P, draw two Meridians.

[figure]

To measure the Arks required.

In the Triangle Z * P.

1. A ruler laid from P to h, cuts the Limbe at K, and the arch AE K being 12d 19′, is the measure of the angle Z P *, being the Stars hour from the Meridian.

2. A quadrant placed from K towards N, and a ruler laid over the Intersection found and P, will finde the pole of that hour Cir­cle at a, then a ruler laid from * to d and a, cuts the Limbe at k and u, and the arch k u being 31d 32′, is the measure of the angle Z * h, wherefore the angle Z * P is 148d 28′.

3. A ruler from d over *, cuts the Limbe at t, and the arch Z t being 17 degrees 39 minutes, is the measure of the Side Z *, [Page 25] wherefore the greater Altitude is t B, 72 degrees 21 minutes.

Again in the Triangle Z S P.

1. A ruler over P and E cuts the Limbe near N, the ark be­tween the said Intersection and AE being 137d 25′, is the mea­sure of the angle Z P S.

2. A ruler from d over S, cuts the Limbe at i, and the arch Z i being 74d 3′, is the measure of the Side Z S, wherefore the lesser Altitude is i B 15d 57′.

3. The arch k u being 31d 32′, is the measure of the angle Z S P, being the angle of Position.

From three shadows of a Gnomon or Wyre on a Horizontal Plain, to finde a true Meridian-line, and thereby the Azimuths of those shadows, the Latitude of the place, the Suns Declination, Amplitude, Altitudes, and the Hour of the Day.

The Gnomon is supposed to be perpendicular to the Plain it stands upon, or at least a point in the said Plain must be found, through which a perpendicular let fall from the tip would pass, and from the said Point the lengths of the three shadows must be measured.

In the whole Circular Scheme following, let C B represent a Wyre or Stile standing erect on a Horizontal Plain, and let the three shadows thereof be C F, C E, C D.

Upon C as a Center, with 60d of a Line of Chords, describe the Circle O S Z N, and produce the three lines of shadow be­yond the Center towards H I G.

Then in another Scheme, upon B as a Center, describe the Se­micircle A G N with its Diameter A B N, which divide into two quadrants with the perpendicular B G, then make B C equal to the height of the perpendicular Stile, and draw C F parallel to B G, and therein prick down the three lengths of shadows from C, to E, to D, and F, and from those points draw lines into the Center, cutting the Limbe at E, I, H, and the arks between those points and G, are the respective Altitudes or heights of the Sun, but if measured from A, they are the complements of those Altitudes.

[figure]

Then lay a ruler from N to the three points E, I, H, and it will cut the Radius B G at K, L, M, the distances of which points from B, are the Semitangents of the complements of the Suns three Altitudes.

Then repair to the following Circular Scheme, and place B K on the shadow E, produced from C to I, also make C G on the second shadow equal to B L; likewise make C H on the third shadow equal to B M in the Scheme above.

Then through the three points H I G draw a Circle, the Cen­ter whereof will be found at V; to find it with any extent upon G, describe an ark at a, with the same extent upon I, cross the former ark, do the like with the same or any other convenient ex­tent at e; also upon the points H and I, do the same at o, also be­neath at u, then lay a ruler over the Intersections a e, and draw a line near V, do the like through the other Intersections at o and u, where these lines cross as at V, is the Center of the arch Q H I G R, then describe it, and from V draw the line V C S passing through the Center, and it is a true Meridian-line, or line of North and South, from which the Azimuths of any of the shadows may be measured, perpendicular thereto draw O Z passing through the Center.

[figure]

The arch Q O measured on the Chords, sheweth the Suns am­plitude.

A Ruler laid from O to A, cuts the Limbe at M, and the arch S M is the Suns Meridian Altitude.

The nearest distance from Q to O C, is the Sine of the Suns Amplitude, which place from C to K, when it happeneth on that side of the Vertical, and draw M K produced, and it shall be the parallel of the Suns Declination in the Analemma, if we make S N the Horizontal line; from C draw a line parallel to K M, and it will cut the Limbe at AE, the arch M AE is the measure of the Suns Declination, and the arch S AE is equal to the comple­ment of the Latitude, consequently the arch Z AE is the measure of the Latitude of the place.

Place the said Extent from N to L, then a ruler laid over it and O, cuts the Meridian at P, which is the projected pole Point, through which point and the points H, I, G, if there be arks of great Circles drawn, the angles that the said arks make with the line S P, shall be the measure of the respective hours from Noon proper to each shadow: How to draw such arks, I have explained in a Treatise of Geometrical Dyalling, page 49. — See also Clavius de Astrolabio, Liber secundus, Prop. 13. who handles it largely.

This manner of finding the Hours I confess is troublesom, and may be sooner resolved by the Analemma: now we have the La­titude, Declination, and all the Altitudes given.

In northwardly Regions where the Sun for some competent sea­son doth not rise nor set, he hath no amplitude in that case, the Circle to be drawn through the three points, will fall altogether within the outward Circle, and may very well be described, and it will cut the Meridian S N in two points, the one towards the South, the other towards the North, a ruler from the East point O over each of the former points, will give the Suns south and north Meridian Altitudes in the Limbe; And if the ark between these Meridian Altitudes be divided into halfs, the point in the middle so found, is the Latitude point L, the ark between which and N, shews the Latitude required; after the same manner might the point L be found in all other Cases, which notwithstanding to avoid the drawing of a whole vast Circle we shunned, though when the Sun is near the Winter Tropick, the drawing of part thereof cannot be shunned, without the help of a Steel-bowe or some such like remedy, whereby to describe part of a Circle tho­row three points given, which is the great and onely inconvenience of the Stereographick Projection.

Clavius handles this Proposition after another manner, but not so convenient, and makes no further use of it.

But here we shall also apply it to the making of all Dyals that have Centers, except the Equinoctial. In a Treatise of Geometri­cal Dyalling from page 72 to 82, I have shewed a general method both by Calculation, and with Scale and Compasses, how from three shadows to make all Dyals with Centers, from whence those that have leisure, may calculate the Arks found in the former [Page 29] Scheme, whereto I now further adde, that the former Proposition here insisted on performeth the same; the three shadows C D, C E, and C F here, are the same in length with those there, and make the same angles at the Center here, as those did at the foot of the perpendicular Stile there; and supposing the former Plain to be a Declining Leaning Plain in some other Latitude, the Line S C N is the Substilar Line, and the Arch Z AE is the Stiles height, the same as we found it in that Treatise: Suppose this be a Plain that looks southward, not much leaning from the Zenith, if the former shadows happened in the Summer half year in north Declinations, the Scheme will describe a Winter parallel of as much south declination; also if the Sun had south declination, the Scheme would describe a parallel of as much north declina­tion; but this is onely true when the elevated Pole is elevated above the northern or other face of the Plain, to illustrate this.

[figure]

In the Scheme above let S C N represent the Horizon of a certain place, the Latitude whereof is Z AE, or N L, the Equa­tor is represented by AE Q, and D E represents a parallel of [Page 30] North Declination, let Z C represent a Vertical or upright South Plain in that Latitude, but if the said Vertical Plain be­come an Horizontal Plain, the height of the North Pole will be Z L, and the height of the South Pole H K, I say then, in respect of the first Horizon, the Sun being in the parallel of North Declination between D and A, his Altitudes on any hour from Noon (being the Angles between the Wall and the Sun) above the Vertical Plain Z A in the first Horizon, are in respect of the second Horizon, if the North Pole be elevated, his de­pressions under the same upon the like hour from midnight, which are equal to his Winter Altitudes above the second Horizon Z C H, the Sun having as much South Declination being between B and G in the parallel F G; or, which is all one, retaining the Suns Declination the same, they are his Winter Altitudes upon the like hour from Noon, when the South Pole K is elevated above the Horizon H C Z, which is the reason why the Scheme describes a parallel of South Declination, when his Declination was as much North.

To place the Meridian Line.

This, as I have shewed in the afore-mentioned Treatise, may be projected by the eye on the Plain, by help of a Thread and Plummet, and if the Plains

  • Re clination
  • In clination

be given, together with the Substiles distance from the Plains perpendicular (both which may be got without dependence on the Sun) the Meridians place may be Calculated, or at least the Inclination of Meridians as was there suggested, either will serve; But for the placing of the same (and for finding the Latitude of the place, and the Plains Declination, though not required in the making of the Dyal) the Converse of the Dyalling Scheme there used will per­form it. We shall take the Example there used.

Let the Substiles distance from the Plains perpendicular be—32d 16′.

The Stiles height —41 30.

The Plains Inclination be —15.

[figure]

Upon V as a Center, describe the Circle S E N W, and draw the Diameters S V N and W V E, making right angles in the Center, then assuming V N to represent the Plains per­pendicular, set off the Substiles distance from it the same way it happened from N to Y, to wit, 32d 16′, and from Y prick off the Stiles height to K, from the point K let fall a perpendicular on the Substile at I, and draw I C parallel to N V, from which point let fall I Q produced perpendicular to the Plains perpen­dicular V N, and make Q T equal to I K, and upon V as a Center, with the extent V T, describe an ark in the other qua­drant of the same Semicircle, as at B, then from the same end of the Horizontal Line prick the Inclination from E to R up­wards, and draw V R (but if the Plain recline, it must be prick­ed downward towards N) then with the extent I K draw a Line parallel to R V, and it will pass through the former ark at B, [Page 32] which here we found by entring one foot of that extent in that ark, so that the other turned about, would but just touch V R: Having discovered the point B, through it draw B O parallel to E C, then take the nearest distance from C to R V, and place it in the Line O B from P, on that side thereof which is farthest from R V, here we placed it from P to M, then from the Center draw a line passing through the point M, as doth V X, and it shall be the Meridian Line required.

Through the point O draw V D, and the arch N D shews the Declination of the Plain to be 40d, and the extent V O is the Cosine of the Latitude; Or through the point B draw G B L pa­rallel to V N, and the arch N L is the measure of the Latitude of the place, to wit, 51d 32′. Now having placed the Substile, Stile, and Meridian, the Hour-lines are easily inscribed either in a Circle or Paralellogram, as in that Treatise is largely shewed.

For the Readers recreation and practice of what is here deli­vered, and for tryal how well this kinde of Dyalling agrees with other kindes, he may make a Dyal true to any known Latitude and Scituation, and from any point in the Stile let fall a Perpen­dicular to the Substile, the said Line is called the Perpendicular Stile, and then by help of Mr. Leybourns Appendix to Mr. Stir­rups Dyalling, inscribe any parallel of Declination into his Dyal, and from the foot of the perpendicular Stile draw three Lines, ma­king any angles, limiting them in the said described parallel of De­clination, the lengths of which three Lines and their angles retain­ed, he may assume the same to be the three shadows of the fore­mentioned perpendicular Stile, and therewith proceed to the finding of the place of the Substile from those shadows, and of the height of the Stile above the same, as if all things else were unknown, and then giving or finding the true Scituation of the Meridian line, proceed to the finishing of the Dyal, and finde it the very same as was at first made.

By two Shadows on a Horizontal Plain, and the Suns Declina­tion given, to finde a true Meridian line, the Latitude of the place, the Amplitude, &c.

Or, in regard the lengths of shadow give both the Altitudes and the Angle between them is the difference of Azimuth be­tween those shadows, we may propound it otherwise.

Two Altitudes of the Sun, with the difference of Azimuth be­tween them, and his Declination given, to finde the Latitude of the place, and the Suns true Azimuth.

In the following Scheme, let the first shadow be Z Y, and the Altitude thereto 63d 51′, and the second shadow Z K, and the Altitude thereto 41d, 34′, therefore the difference of Azimuth between these shadows, is the ark Y K.

Upon Z as a Center, with 60d of a Line of Chords, describe a Circle, and produce the said shadows through the Center to the opposite side far enough; set off a quadrant from each sha­dow, to wit, from Y to Q, also from K to q, then prick the Al­titude belonging to the first shadow, to wit, from y to A; also prick the Altitude belonging to the other shadow from k to a, then prick the Suns polar distance, to wit, 66d 29′ from A to D and E, also place it from a to d and e, then apply a ruler over Q, and D, and E, and it cuts the line of shadow y Y, at B and G, which extent divide into halfs at H, and upon H as a Center with H B, describe the arch of a Circle.

Again, a ruler over q, and d, and e, cuts the other shadow ex­tended at L and M, the middle of which extent is at C: upon C as a Center with C L, describe the arch L P the Northern In­tersection of these two Arks happeneth at P, and there is the Pole point, through which draw the line Z P N, and it shall be the Meridian line required.

[figure]

Set off a quadrant from N to W, and draw Z W produ­ced, and it shall be a true Line of East and West, a ruler laid over W and P cuts the Limbe at L, and the arch N L shews the Latitude of the place to be 51d 32′, the arch S G sheweth the Suns Azimuth from the South Eastwards on the first shadow to be 20d, and the ark S k sheweth it for the second shadow, to bee 75d to the Westward of the South: now having the Latitude, Declination, and Altitudes, if it were required, the Analemma might be soon fitted thereto, for finding the hours or respective times of the day, proper to these shadows.

It may so happen that the point M may fall very remote, in that case we may finde the Center C, without finding the whole Diamater, draw a line from a into the Center at Z, and prick down the versed Sine of the Polar distance from a to R, or which is all one, prick down the Sine of the Declination 23d 31′, from Z to R, the taking out of a Sine is easily done, as I have shewed in the Analemma. A ruler from q over R, cuts the Limbe at V, make a T equal to a V, then a ruler from T over q, cuts the sha­dow Line at C, the Center sought. See Clavius de Astralabio, Liber 3. Canon 12. who propounds the Case here resolved.

And what hath been here performed for finding the Meridian line, and Latitude of the place by the help of two shadows on a Horizontal Plain, will finde the Substilar line and Stiles height on any other Plain.

Another Proposition like this, and performed after the same maner, is:

To give the Suns Declination, two Altitudes with the difference of Time between them, to finde the Latitude of the place, and the respective times of the day, answering to those Observations.

Declination 23d 31′ North.

Altitudes

  • the lesser 27d 23′.
  • the greater 53d 45′.

Difference of time 7 hours, or 105d.

[figure]

Having upon P as a Center, with 60d of the Chords, descri­bed a Circle, draw a Line in­to the Center as V P produced, to represent the first hour, and set off 105 de­grees, the diffe­rence of time from V to K, and draw K P produced, then set off a quadrant or 90d, from V to Q, also from K to q, then prick off the Suns Declinati­on 23d 31′ from V to D, also from K to d, and prick off the complement of the lesser Altitude, to wit, 62d 37′ from D to A and L, a ruler over Q and A, cuts P V at C; also a ruler over Q, and L, cuts the said Line produced at F, the half [Page 36] between F and C is at H, with the extent H C, upon H as a Cen­ter, describe the ark C Z.

Again, prick off the complement of the lesser Altitude, to wit, 36d 15′ from d to a and l, a ruler over q and a, cuts K P at R, also a ruler over q and l, cuts P K produced at F, the half between F and R is at G, with the extent G R, upon G and a Center, describe the ark R Z; where these arks intersect, as at Z, is the Zenith, draw the line S M passing through the said Intersection and the Center, and it shall represent the hour-line of 12, the arch S K shews the hour to the greater Altitude to be 30d from the Meridian, or 2 in the afternoon, and the arch S V shews the hour proper to the first observation to be 75d, or 7 in the morning.

Set off a quadrant from S to E, a ruler over E and Z, cuts the primitive Circle at B, and the arch S B being 51d 32′, shews the Latitude of the place to be 51d 32′.

When the Declination is South (being in our Northern Hemi­sphere) it must be prickt below the Hour-lines V P and K P, whereas in this Example being North, it was pricked above them; Or if the Declinations, the Difference of right Ascensions (which is the difference of Time) and the Altitudes of two Stars were gi­ven at any time, though off the Meridian, the Latitude and true time might be found after the same manner; for those Cases of Triangles (though the two Declinations are different) are the same with those here resolved, as I may have occasion elsewhere to calculate, whereto this will be a good check; which Proposi­tions may be of good use at Sea, for finding the Latitude by Ob­servations taken off the Meridian.

FINIS.

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. Searching, reading, printing, or downloading EEBO-TCP texts is reserved for the authorized users of these project partner institutions. Permission must be granted for subsequent distribution, in print or electronically, of this EEBO-TCP Phase II text, in whole or in part.